this file comes from https://diffeology.net/index.php/publications/ Diffeology is the first textbook on the subject. I
268 99 5MB
English Pages 439/560 [560] Year 2022
Patrick IglesiasZemmour
Diffeology ·

Patrick IglesiasZemmour
Diffeology 广义微分几何
［法］ 帕特里克·伊格莱西亚斯  泽穆尔 著
)=$+&0. % 0} the open ball centered at x with radius r. The set of all ndomains will be denoted by Domains(Rn ). We shall also denote by Domains the sum of all the Domains(Rn ) when n runs over the integers. An element of Domains will be called a real domain, or simply a domain, when there is no possible confusion. 1 But note that the real vector space of which the domain is a subset is implicit. 1.2. Sets, subsets, maps etc. Let X be some set. As usual we call subset of X any set A whose elements are elements of X, and we denote A ⊂ X. We denote by P(X) the powerset of X, that is, the set of all the subsets of X,
P(X) = {A  A ⊂ X}. Now, let A be a subset of X, every subset B ⊂ X containing A is called a superset of A. By extension, a superset of a point x ∈ X is any superset of the singleton {x}. For any topological space X, an open superset is a superset which is open for the topology of X. A neighborhood of x ∈ X is a superset of an open superset of x. An open superset of x or an open neighborhood of x are the same thing. For a map f , its domain of definition is denoted by def( f ), and the set of its values by val( f ). Thus, if f : X → Y, def( f ) = X and val( f ) = f (X) ⊂ Y. The set of all maps from X to Y will be denoted by Maps(X, Y). Also, for every set X the identity map will be denoted by 1X . 1.3. Parametrizations in sets. Let X be a set, we call parametrization in X any map P : U → X, where U is a domain. We shall denote by Param(U, X) the set of all the parametrizations in X defined on U, and by Param(X) the set of all parametrizations in X. If U is a nonempty ndomain, we say that the dimension of P 1They are also called Euclidean domains in the AngloSaxon literature.
LINGUISTIC PRELIMINARIES
3
is n, and we denote dim(P) = n. The empty parametrization 1∅ has, by convention, dimension −1. We denote by Paramn (X) the set of all parametrizations in X of dimension n, Paramn (X) = {P ∈ Param(X)  dim(P) = n}. Then, Param(X) = {1∅ }
[
Paramn (X).
n∈N
We can notice that the parametrizations in X form a well defined set. Indeed, for every integer n, for every ndomain U, Param(U, X) is a set. That is because Param(U, X) is a subset of the powerset P(U × X). But since the domains of Rn are a subset of P(Rn ), Paramn (X) is a family of sets, indexed by a set. Therefore, Paramn (X) is itself a set. Then, Param(X) is a family of sets indexed by the integers and thus a set. Also note that the 0parametrizations in X are naturally identified with the elements of X. In other words, Param0 (X) ≃ X. For all element x in X, we denote by the bold letter x the unique 0parametrization with value x : x : {0} → X, with x (0) = x. NOTE. It happens that we write this kind of sentence: “Let P : U → X be a parametrization, let V be a superset of r ∈ U, and let P ↾ V be a parametrization satisfying such condition . . . ”. This implies that V is an open neighborhood of r, since a parametrization is always defined on a domain. 1.4. Smooth parametrizations in domains. Let us recall some basic material on which diffeology is founded. Let U be an ndomain, and let V be an mdomain. Let f : U → V be a map. To fix the names of the variables, we also denote f by f : x 7→ y, with x = (x 1 , . . . , x n ) and y = ( y1 , . . . , ym ). And we also represent the vectors x and y as column matrices. Let f be continuous, f is said to be differentiable if there exists a map D( f ) : U → L(Rn , Rm ) such that: For all x ∈ U and all u ∈ Rn , D( f )(x)(u) = lim
ε→0
f (x + εu) − f (x) . ε
The map D( f ) is called the derivative of f . For all x ∈ U, the map D( f )(x) is called the tangent linear map or simply the tangent map of f at x. It belongs to the space L(Rn , Rm ) of linear maps from Rn to Rm . The tangent map is made of the partial derivatives of f , denoted and defined as follow: ∂ yi = D(x j 7→ f i (x 1 , . . . , x j , . . . , x n ))(x j ), where yi = f i (x 1 , . . . , x n ). ∂ xj
4
1. DIFFEOLOGY AND DIFFEOLOGICAL SPACES
Then, the tangent linear map is represented by a m × n matrix. ∂ y1 ··· x1 y1 ∂ x1 . . . .. D( f )(x) = D .. 7→ .. (x) = . .. ∂ y xn ym m ··· ∂ x1
∂ y1 ∂ xn .. . , ∂y m
∂ xn
The tangent map D( f )(x) is also denoted by D( f ) x or D f x or even d f x . Associated with the variables mapping notation D(x 7→ y)(x), we use the partial derivative shortcut for the tangent linear map itself: ∂y ∂ f (x) or for D( f )(x). ∂x ∂x The map f is said to be of class C k if it satisfies the following conditions: (a) k = 0, where f is continuous. (b) 0 < k < ∞, where f is continuous, differentiable and its derivative D( f ) : U → L(Rn , Rm ) ≃ Rn×m is of class C k−1 . (c) k = ∞, where f is of class C n for every n ∈ N. The set of C k mappings from U to V is denoted by C k (U, V). For k = ∞, we say that f is infinitely differentiable or smooth. The map f is smooth if and only if all its partial derivatives are smooth. Let V be a domain, we call smooth parametrization in V every smooth (infinitely differentiable) map f : U → V, where U is some domain. We denote by Cn∞ (V) the set of all smooth nparametrizations in V, and sometimes by C⋆∞ (V) the set of all smooth parametrizations in V. NOTE. There is a holistic approach to smooth maps between domains that is worth noting. It is due to Jan Boman. Let us begin by defining smooth paths into domains. Let γ be a continuous path into Rn , defined on some open interval J ⊂ R. The map
∆γ (t, t ′ ) =
γ (t ′ ) − γ (t) , for all t ̸= t ′ , t′ − t
is continuous. We say that γ is C 1 if ∆γ admits a continous extension (necessarily unique) on the diagonal. The derivative is then defined by γ ′ (t) = ∆γ (t, t). It is a continuous path defined on the same interval with values in Rn . Next, γ is said to be of class C 2 if γ ′ (t) is C 1 and so on ad infinitum. We have then a clear and simple definition of what a smooth path into a domain is. Then: THEOREM [Bom67]. A continuous parametrization P : U → Rm , is smooth if and only if, for any smooth path γ in U, the composite P ◦ γ is smooth.
AXIOMS OF DIFFEOLOGY
5
Axioms of Diffeology A diffeology on an arbitrary set is defined by declaring which parametrizations in the set are smooth. These parametrizations must satisfy three axioms: covering, locality and smooth compatibility. They are required to ensure the coherence with the usual smooth parametrizations in real domains. A set equipped with a diffeology becomes then a diffeological space. After the introduction of the axiomatics, we give a few simple examples to familiarize the reader with the basics of this theory. 1.5. Diffeologies and diffeological spaces. Let X be a set, a diffeology of X is any set D of parametrizations of X, such that the three following axioms are satisfied: D1. Covering. The set D contains the constant parametrizations x : r 7→ x defined on Rn , for all x ∈ X and all n ∈ N. D2. Locality. Let P : U → X be a parametrization. If for every point r of U there exists an open neighborhood V of r such that P ↾ V belongs to D, then the parametrization P belongs to D. D3. Smooth compatibility. For every element P : U → X of D, for every real domain V, for every F in C ∞ (V, U), P ◦ F belongs to D. A diffeological space is a set equipped with a diffeology. Formally, a diffeological space is a pair (X, D) where X is the underlying set and D its diffeology, but we shall denote most often the diffeological space by one letter, X for example. Some spaces have a natural implicit diffeology and are just denoted by the letter denoting the underlying set, for example R, C, C ∞ (R), etc. It will be specified when it will not be the case. NOTE. Although we can eventually consider the diffeological empty space, we will agree from now on, unless explicitly mentioned otherwise, that our diffeological spaces are a priori non empty. 1.6. Plots of a diffeological space. Let X be a diffeological space. The elements of the diffeology D of X are called the plots of the space X. To be a plot of a diffeological space means to be an element of its diffeology. We shall say an nplot of X for a plot defined on an ndomain. We shall denote by D(U, X) or Plots(U, X) the set of the plots of X defined on the domain U, by Dn (X) or Plotsn (X) the set of the nplots of X. We call global plot of X every plot defined on a whole space Rn . The set of global nplots of X is just D(Rn , X), it will also be denoted by Pathsn (X) (art. 1.64). 1.7. Diffeology or diffeological space? The distinction between a diffeology, as a structure, and a diffeological space, as a set equipped with a diffeology, is purely formal. Every diffeology D of a set X contains the underlying set as the set of 0plots (art. 1.3). The difference between a diffeological space and its diffeology
6
1. DIFFEOLOGY AND DIFFEOLOGICAL SPACES
is psychological. Sometimes it is more convenient to think in terms of diffeology rather than in terms of diffeological space, and vice versa. 1.8. The set of diffeologies of a set. Since a diffeology D of a set X is a subset of Param(X) (art. 1.3), the set of the diffeologies of a set X, that is, Diffeologies(X) = {D ⊂ Param(X)  D satisfies D1, D2 and D3}, is a subset of the powerset of Param(X), Diffeologies(X) ⊂ P(Param(X)). 1.9. Real domains as diffeological spaces. The set of all smooth parametrizations C⋆∞ (U) (art. 1.4) in a domain U is a diffeology. It will be called the usual diffeology, or the standard diffeology, or the smooth diffeology of the domain U. The three axioms (art. 1.5) are obviously satisfied. These are precisely the three properties of smooth parametrizations of real domains which have been chosen to define, by extension, diffeologies. Real domains, equipped with the standard diffeology, are the first and basic examples of diffeological spaces. 1.10. The “wire diffeology”. This is an example of an unexpected diffeology. Let us consider the smooth parametrizations P : U → Rn which factorize locally through R, that is, for every r in U, there exist an open neighborhood V of r, a smooth parametrization Q : V → R and a smooth 1parametrization F in Rn such that P ↾ V = F ◦ Q. We check immediately that these parametrizations form a diffeology. This diffeology, called the wire diffeology, 2 is characterized by the 1plots and does not coincide with the standard diffeology of Rn . Indeed, the identity map of Rn is a plot for the standard diffeology but not a plot for the wire diffeology. 3 We can imagine, of course, other diffeologies of this type: those defined by plots which factorize through R2 , R3 , etc. These examples are related to the construction of diffeologies by means of generating families (art. 1.66). 1.11. A diffeology for the circle. Let us consider the circle S1 as the subset of complex numbers, S1 = {z ∈ C  z¯z = 1}. The parametrizations P : U → S1 satisfying the following condition constitute a diffeology: (♠) For all r0 in U, there exist an open neighborhood V of r0 and a smooth parametrization φ : V → R such that P ↾ V : r 7→ exp(2i πφ (r)). This diffeology is the quotient diffeology of R by the exponential (art. 1.50). 2In French we should say difféologie filaire. 3This diffeology has been introduced, as a significant example, by J.M. Souriau. He named it the spaghetti diffeology. However, since we use it later, we prefer a more neutral, less culinary, name.
AXIOMS OF DIFFEOLOGY
7
PROOF. Let us check the three axioms of a diffeology (art. 1.5). Axiom D1: Let z be a point of S1 , and let z : r 7→ z be the associated global constant nparametrization. Since the exponential from R onto S1 is surjective, there exists θ ∈ R such that exp(2i πθ) = z. Then, for every r0 we choose V = Rn and φ (r) = θ. Axiom D2: By definition, a parametrization satisfying the condition (♠) is local. Axiom D3: Let F : W → U be a smooth parametrization. Let s0 be a point of W, let r0 = F(s0 ), let V and φ as described in the condition (♠). Since φ is a parametrization, V is a domain. Since F is a smooth parametrization, it is continuous, hence V′ = F−1 (V) is a domain and φ ◦ F : V′ → R is a smooth parametrization. Now, by construction, V′ contains s0 . Thus, for every point s0 of W there exist an open neighborhood V′ of s0 and a smooth parametrization φ ′ = φ ◦ F : V′ → R such that (P ◦ F) ↾ V′ : s 7→ exp(2i πφ ′ (s)). Therefore, the parametrization P ◦ F satisfies the condition (♠). □ 1.12. A diffeology for the square. Let us consider the square Sq = [0, 1] × {0, 1} ∪ {0, 1} × [0, 1] ⊂ R × R. The set of the parametrizations of the square which, regarded as parametrizations of R × R, are smooth, is a diffeology. This diffeology is the subset diffeology, inherited from R2 (art. 1.33). PROOF. Let us check the three axioms of a diffeology (art. 1.5). Axiom D1: Every constant parametrization, regarded as a parametrization in R × R, is smooth. Axiom D2: A parametrization in the square which, regarded as a parametrization in R × R, is locally smooth at each point of its domain, is smooth. Axiom D3: The composite of a plot of the square with any smooth parametrization in the source of the plot does not change its set of values and, regarded as a parametrization in R × R, is smooth. □ 1.13. A diffeology for the sets of smooth maps. Let A and B be two, nonempty, real domains. Let us consider the set C ∞ (A, B) of all the smooth maps from A to B. The set D of parametrizations P : U → C ∞ (A, B) satisfying the following condition is a diffeology: (♦) P : (r, s) 7→ P(r)(s) ∈ C ∞ (U × A, B). This diffeology is the functional diffeology of C ∞ (A, B) (art. 1.57). PROOF. First of all, note that U × A is a domain. Thus, it makes sense to consider the set of smooth parametrizations C ∞ (U × A, B). Let us check now the three axioms of a diffeology(art. 1.5). Axiom D1: Every constant parametrization P : r 7→ f , with f ∈ C ∞ (A, B), satisfies P = [(r, s) 7→ P(r)(s) = f (s)] = f ◦ pr2 ∈ C ∞ (U × A, B),
8
1. DIFFEOLOGY AND DIFFEOLOGICAL SPACES
where pr2 : U × A → A is the projection onto the second factor. Then, P is the composite of two smooth maps, therefore P is smooth. Axiom D2: Let us consider a parametrization P : U → C ∞ (A, B) such that for all r0 ∈ U there exists an open neighborhood V of r0 such that P ↾ V is a parametrization in C ∞ (A, B) satisfying (♦). Since P ↾ V is a parametrization, V is a domain and P ↾ V × A belongs to C ∞ (V × A, B). Hence, for all (r0 , s0 ) in U × A there exists an open neighborhood W = V × A such that P ↾ W is a smooth parametrization in B. Therefore, P is a smooth parametrization in B, that is, it satisfies (♦). Axiom D3: Let P : U → C ∞ (A, B) be a parametrization satisfying the condition (♦), and let F : V → U be a smooth parametrization. Let P′ = P ◦ F, the parametrization P′ = [(t, s) 7→ P(F(t), s)] = [(t, s) 7→ (r = F(t), s) 7→ P(r)(s)], as the composite of two smooth parametrizations, is a smooth parametrization. Thus, P ◦ F satisfies the condition (♦). Therefore, D is a diffeology of C ∞ (A, B). □ Exercises
✎ EXERCISE 1 (Equivalent axiom of covering). Check that the first axiom of diffeology (art. 1.5) can be replaced by Axiom D1′: The values of the elements of D S cover X, that is, P∈D val(P) = X. ✎ EXERCISE 2 (Equivalent axiom of locality). Let X be a set, and D ⊂ Param(X). Show that the axiom D2 of diffeology can be replaced by Axiom D2′: For all integers n, for all families {Pi : Ui → X}i∈I of nparametrizations such that r ∈ Ui ∩ U j implies Pi (r) = Pj (r), if all the Pi belong to D, then the following parametrization P belongs to D: [ P:U= Ui → X, with P(r) = Pi (r) if r ∈ Ui . i∈I
NOTE. The family {Pi : Ui → X}i∈I is said to be a compatible family of parametrizations, and P is called the supremum of the family. The axiom D2′ expresses itself this way: the supremum of a compatible family of elements of D belongs to D.
✎ EXERCISE 3 (Global plots and diffeology). Let X be a set, and let D and D ′
be two diffeologies of X. Show that if for every integer n, D(Rn , X) = D ′ (Rn , X) (art. 1.6), then D and D ′ coincide. In other words, prove that the global plots characterize the diffeology. Smooth Maps and the Category Diffeology We consider now the notion of smooth maps between diffeological spaces. They are maps which transform, by composition, the plots of the source into plots of the
SMOOTH MAPS AND THE CATEGORY DIFFEOLOGY
U
P
9
f
X
FIGURE 1.1. A smooth map f ∈ D(X, X′ ).
target. Diffeological spaces, together with smooth maps, define a category denoted by {Diffeology}. The isomorphisms of this category are called diffeomorphisms. 1.14. Smooth maps. Let X and X′ be two diffeological spaces. A map f : X → X′ is said to be smooth if for every plot P of X, f ◦ P is a plot of X′ (Figure 1.1). The set of smooth maps from X to X′ is denoted by D(X, X′ ). In other words, denoting by D and D ′ the diffeologies of X and X′ , D(X, X′ ) = { f ∈ Maps(X, X′ )  f ◦ D ⊂ D ′ }. 1.15. Composition of smooth maps. The composition of two smooth maps is a smooth map. Diffeological spaces together with the smooth maps define a category denoted by {Diffeology}. PROOF. The fact that the composition of smooth maps is smooth results directly from the associativity of the composition of maps. Let X, X′ and X′′ be three diffeological spaces whose diffeologies are denoted by D, D ′ and D ′′ . Let f : X → X′ and g : X′ → X′′ be two smooth maps, that is, f ◦ D ⊂ D ′ and g ◦ D ′ ⊂ D ′′ . Then, (g ◦ f ) ◦ D = g ◦ f ◦ D ⊂ g ◦ D ′ ⊂ D ′′ . Therefore, g ◦ f is smooth. □ 1.16. Plots are smooth. Let X be a diffeological space and U be a nonempty real domain (art. 1.9). The smooth maps from U to X are exactly the plots of X defined on U, and only them. This property, which writes D(U, X) = D(U) (art. 1.6), is the very principle of diffeology. The plots of a space X are the parametrizations of X we want to regard as smooth. Now, let X = V be another real domain, then D(U, V) = C ∞ (U, V). The smooth maps from U to V, from the diffeological point of view, are exactly the usual smooth maps. This justifies the equivalent notation C ∞ (U, X) for D(U, X). By extension, we also denote, for every pair X and X′ of diffeological spaces, C ∞ (X, X′ ) = D(X, X′ ).
10
1. DIFFEOLOGY AND DIFFEOLOGICAL SPACES
PROOF. Let f : U → X be a smooth parametrization. Thanks to the axiom D3 (art. 1.5), the composite f ◦ 1U , where 1U is the identity of U, is a plot of X. Thus D(U, X) ⊂ D(U). Now, let P : U → X be a plot. Thanks again to the axiom D3, for every smooth parametrization F in U, the parametrization P ◦F belongs to D. Hence, P is smooth (art. 1.14). Thus, D(U) ⊂ D(U, X). Therefore, D(U) = D(U, X). □ 1.17. Diffeomorphisms. Let X and X′ be two diffeological spaces. A map ′ f : X → X is called a diffeomorphism if f is bijective, and if both f and f −1 are smooth. Diffeomorphisms are the isomorphisms of the category {Diffeology}. The set of diffeomorphisms from X to X′ is denoted by Diff(X, X′ ). Note that for X = X′ we denote by Diff(X), instead of Diff(X, X), the diffeomorphisms of X. It is a group for the composition. PROOF. By definition, the isomorphisms of the category {Diffeology} are the invertible morphisms, that is, invertible smooth maps whose inverses also are smooth. This is what we called diffeomorphisms. □ Exercises
✎ EXERCISE 4 (Diffeomorphisms between irrational tori). Let α be some irrational
number, α ∈ R − Q. Let Tα be the quotient set R/(Z + αZ), that is, the quotient of R by the equivalence relation: x ∼ x ′ if and only if there exist n, m ∈ Z such that x ′ = x + n+ αm. The set Tα is an Abelian group. We say that Tα is an irrational torus. Let πα : R → Tα be the canonical projection. Let D be the set of parametrizations P : U → Tα such that (✱) for all r0 ∈ U there exist an open neighborhood V of r0 and a smooth parametrization Q : V → R such that πα ◦ Q = P ↾ V. 1) Check that D is a diffeology of Tα (art. 1.11). 2) Check that C ∞ (Tα , R) is reduced to the constants, that is, C ∞ (Tα , R) ≃ R. 3) Let α and β be two irrational numbers. Let f : Tα → Tβ be a smooth map. Show that there exist an interval J of R and some affine map F : J → R, such that πβ ◦ F = f ◦ πα ↾ J , use the fact that Z + αZ is dense in R. Then, show that F can be extended to the whole R in an affine map. Deduce that C ∞ (Tα , Tβ ) does not reduce to the constant maps if and only if there exist four integers a, b, c and d such that a + βb α= · c + βd 4) Show that Tα and Tβ are diffeomorphic if and only if α and β are conjugate modulo GL(2, Z), that is, the four integers a, b, c, d of the question 1) satisfy ad − bc = ±1.
SMOOTH MAPS AND THE CATEGORY DIFFEOLOGY
11
✎ EXERCISE 5 (Smooth maps on R/Q). Let EQ be the quotient of R by Q. Let
π : R → EQ be the projection. Since the set R is a vector space over Q, and Q is a Qvector subspace of R, the quotient EQ inherits the structure of quotient vector space over Q : • for all τ , τ ′ ∈ EQ , if τ = π (x) and τ ′ = π (x ′ ), then τ + τ ′ = π (x)+ π (x ′ ) = π (x + x ′ ), • for all q ∈ Q and all τ ∈ EQ , if τ = π (x) then q · τ = π (qx). Let us equip the quotient vector space EQ with the diffeology defined, mutatis mutandis, by the condition (✱) of Exercise 4, p. 10. 1) Show that the only smooth maps from EQ to EQ are the Qaffine maps: C ∞ (EQ ) = {τ 7→ q · τ + τ ′  q ∈ Q, and τ ′ ∈ EQ }. 2) Show that the only smooth maps from any irrational torus Tα (Exercise 4, p. 10) to EQ are the constant maps, C ∞ (Tα , EQ ) = EQ . 3) Also show that C ∞ (EQ , R) = R and C ∞ (EQ , Tα ) = Tα .
✎ EXERCISE 6 (Smooth maps on spaces of maps). Let C ∞ (R) = C ∞ (R, R), equipped with the functional diffeology defined in (art. 1.13). 1) Let f be an element of C ∞ (R), and let f (k) denote its kth derivative. Show that, for every integer k, the following map is smooth: dk dk ∞ ∞ : C (R) → C (R), defined by ( f ) = f (k) . d xk d xk 2) Show that, for every real number x, the map xˆ : f 7→ f (x), from C ∞ (R) to R, is smooth. Deduce that, for every real number x, for every integer k, the following map, called the kjet or the jet of order k, is smooth: Dxk : C ∞ (R) → Rk+1 , defined by Dxk ( f ) = ( f (x), f ′ (x), . . . , f (k) (x)). 3) Show that, for any pair of real numbers a and b, the following map I a,b is smooth, R where the sign denotes the Riemann integral: I a,b : C
∞
(R) → R, with I a,b ( f ) =
b
Z
f (t) d t . a
4) Let C0∞ (R) be the space of smooth real maps f such that f (0) = 0. Check that the parametrizations of C0∞ (R) satisfying the condition (♦) of (art. 1.13) are still a diffeology. Then, using question 3 above, deduce that the derivative d/d x : f 7→ f ′ , defined from C0∞ (R) to C ∞ (R), is a diffeomorphism.
12
1. DIFFEOLOGY AND DIFFEOLOGICAL SPACES
Comparing Diffeologies The inclusion of diffeologies, regarded as subsets of the powerset of all the parametrizations of a set, is a partial ordering. This relation, called fineness, is a key for the categorical constructions of the theory. 1.18. Fineness of diffeologies. Let X be a set, a diffeology D of X is said to be finer than another D ′ if D ⊂ D ′ . This relation, called fineness, is a partial order. We say equivalently that D is finer than D ′ or D ′ is coarser than D. In other words, D is finer than D ′ if D has fewer elements than D ′ . If X′ denotes the set X equipped with the diffeology D ′ , we also denote X ⪯ X′ to mean that D is finer than D ′ . 1.19. Fineness via the identity map. Let us denote by X 1 and X 2 the same set X equipped with two diffeologies D1 and D2 . The diffeology D1 is finer than D2 if and only if the identity map 1X : X 1 → X 2 is smooth. 1.20. Discrete diffeology. Let X be a set. The locally constant parametrizations of X are defined as follows: (♣) A parametrization P : U → X is said to be locally constant if for all r ∈ U there exists an open neighborhood V of r such that P ↾ V is constant. The locally constant parametrizations in X form a diffeology called the discrete diffeology. The set X, equipped with the discrete diffeology, will be denoted by X ◦ , and the discrete diffeology itself by D◦ (X). A set equipped with the discrete diffeology will be called a discrete diffeological space. NOTE. For every set X, the discrete diffeology is the finest diffeology of X, that is, finer than any other diffeology of X. Every diffeology contains the discrete diffeology. Moreover, let X and X′ be any two sets equipped with the discrete diffeology. Every map f from X to X′ is smooth, that is, C ∞ (X ◦ , X′◦ ) = Maps(X, X′ ). In other words, the correspondence ◦ defined from the category {Set} into the category {Diffeology} by ◦(X) = X ◦ , and ◦( f ) = f , is a full faithful functor we shall call the discrete functor. PROOF. The axioms of diffeology are satisfied by the locally constant parametrizations. For the covering axiom: every constant parametrization is locally constant. For the locality axiom: it is satisfied by the very definition of locally constant parametrizations. For the smooth compatibility: the composite of a locally constant parametrization by a smooth parametrization in its domain is again locally constant. Now, let D be any other diffeology of X. Let n be any integer, and P : U → X be a locally constant nparametrization. Let r ∈ U and x = P(r). Let x : Rn → X be the constant nparametrization with value x. By the axiom D1 of diffeology, the parametrization x is a plot for the diffeology D. Since P is locally constant, there
COMPARING DIFFEOLOGIES
13
exists an open neighborhood V of r such that P ↾ V is a constant parametrization. Let us denote by jV : V → Rn the natural inclusion, it is a smooth parametrization in Rn . By axiom D2, x ◦ jV = P ↾ V belongs to D. Hence, P belongs locally to D everywhere. Thus, by axiom D3, P belongs to D. Therefore, the discrete diffeology D◦ (X) is contained in every diffeology D of X. It is the finest diffeology of X. Next, consider a map f : X → X′ where X and X′ are equipped with the discrete diffeology. Let us recall that f is said to be smooth if the composite of f with any plot of X is a plot of X′ (art. 1.14). The composite of any map with any locally constant parametrization is locally constant. Indeed, let P : U → X be a locally constant parametrization. Let r ∈ U and x = P(r). Let V be an open neighborhood of r such that P ↾ V is the constant parametrization defined on V with value x. Hence, f ◦ P ↾ V is the constant parametrization in X′ , defined on V, with value f (x). Therefore, f ◦ P is locally constant and f ∈ C ∞ (X ◦ , X′◦ ). □ 1.21. Coarse diffeology. Let X be a set. The set of all the parametrizations in X is a diffeology. This diffeology, coarser than every other one, is called the coarse diffeology. The set X equipped with the coarse diffeology will be denoted by X • , and the coarse diffeology itself by D• (X), that is, D• (X) = Param(X). A set equipped with the coarse diffeology will be called a coarse diffeological space. Moreover, let X and X′ be two sets equipped with the coarse diffeology. Every map f from X to X′ is smooth, that is, C ∞ (X • , X′• ) = Maps(X, X′ ). In other words, the correspondence • from the category {Set} to the category {Diffeology} by •(X) = X • and •( f ) = f , is a full faithful functor called the coarse functor. NOTE. Combining the existence of the coarse diffeology on every set X with the existence of the discrete diffeology (art. 1.20), we conclude that every diffeology D of X is somewhere in between, D◦ (X) ⊂ D ⊂ D• (X), or X ◦ ⪯ X ⪯ X • · PROOF. For the set Param(X) the two first axioms of diffeology are obviously satisfied. For the third one, just remark that the composite of a parametrization in X with a smooth parametrization in its source is still a parametrization, since to be a parametrization is just to be defined on a real domain. Now, the composite of any map f : X → X′ with any parametrization in X is a parametrization in X′ , for the same reason as above. Hence, every map f : X → X′ belongs to C ∞ (X • , X′• ), therefore C ∞ (X • , X′• ) = Maps(X, X′ ). □ 1.22. Intersecting diffeologies. Let X be any set. Let D = {Di }i∈I be any family of diffeologies of X, indexed by some set I . The intersection of the elements of the family, denoted by \ D= Di , i∈I
14
1. DIFFEOLOGY AND DIFFEOLOGICAL SPACES
is still a diffeology of X, finer than each element of the family D. Note that we may T also denote just by ∩D the intersection i∈I Di . PROOF. Let us first check the three axioms of diffeology (art. 1.5). Axiom D1: Since every diffeology contains the constant parametrizations, they are contained in each element Di of D. Hence, the constant parametrizations also are T contained in the intersection i∈I Di . Axiom D2: Let P : U → X be a parametrization in X such that, for every point r in U there exists an open neighborhood V of r for which P ↾ V is a parametrization T belonging to the intersection i∈I Di , that is, for each i in I , P ↾ V ∈ Di . Thus, by application of the axiom D2 to the diffeology Di , P is a plot for Di . Therefore, for T all i ∈ I , P ∈ Di , that is, P ∈ i∈cI Di . T Axiom D3: Let P ∈ i∈I Di and let F be a smooth parametrization in the domain of P. For each i in I , P ∈ Di . Since each Di is a diffeology: P ◦ F belongs to Di , hence T T P ◦ F belongs to the intersection i∈I Di . Therefore, D = i∈I Di is a diffeology of X. By construction, this diffeology is contained in every Di , that is, D is finer than every element of the family D. □ 1.23. Infimum of a family of diffeologies. Let X be a set and D be some family of diffeologies of X. The family D has an infimum for the fineness partial ordering (art. 1.18), this is the intersection of the elements of the family D (art. 1.22). inf(D) =
\
D = {P ∈ Param(X)  for all D ∈ D, P ∈ D}.
D∈D
It is the coarsest diffeology contained in every element of the family D. PROOF. Let us recall that the infimum of D, if it exists, is the greatest lower bound of D. A diffeology D ′ is a lower bound of D if and only if D ′ ⊂ D for all D ∈ D. The set of lower bounds of D is not empty, since it contains the discrete diffeology T (art. 1.21). Since ∩D = D∈D D is a diffeology (art. 1.22) and since for all D ′ ∈ D, T ′ of D. Now, let D ′ be a lower bound of D, i.e. D∈D D ⊂ D , ∩D is a lower boundT ′ ′ D ⊂ D for all D ∈ D. Thus, D ⊂ D∈D D = ∩D. Therefore, ∩D is the greatest lower bound of D, that is, its infimum. □ 1.24. Supremum of a family of diffeologies. Let X be a set and D be some family of diffeologies of X. The family D has a supremum for the fineness partial ordering (art. 1.18), this is the infimum of the diffeologies of X containing all the elements of D (art. 1.23). sup(D) = inf{D ′ ∈ Diffeologies(X)  for all D ∈ D, D ⊂ D ′ }. It is the finest diffeology containing every element of the family D,
COMPARING DIFFEOLOGIES
15
PROOF. Let us recall that the supremum of D, if it exists, is the smallest upper bound of D. A diffeology D ′ is an upper bound of D if and only if, for all D ∈ D, D ⊂ D ′ . The set of the upper bounds of D is not empty, since it contains the coarsest diffeology (art. 1.21). Let us consider the intersection of all the upper bounds of D. We know that it is a diffeology (art. 1.22). Next, since every D ∈ D is contained in every upper bound, it is also contained in their intersection. Thus, this intersection is an upper bound of D. Then, since the intersection of the upper bounds of the family D is the infimum of its upper bounds (art. 1.23), this intersection is, by definition, the supremum of the family D. □
FIGURE 1.2. Case 1 — The finest diffeology such that... 1.25. Playing with bounds. It’s a nice property that any family of diffeologies of a set X has an infimum and a supremum. This property has even got a name by Bourbaki, the set Diffeologies(X) is said to be réticulé achevé [Bou72]; in English, it is said to be a complete lattice. This property will be heavily used in order to introduce many diffeologies. It is often uncertain to comment upon what is still not defined, but sometimes it can help the reader to guess what is coming. Many of the cases that we shall meet follow the same pattern. We have a set X and some property P relating to the diffeologies of X — we can understand P as a function from Diffeologies(X) to the set {true, false}. The diffeologies for which P is satisfied constitute some set D = P −1 (true). This set defines two distinguished diffeologies, its infimum inf(D) and its supremum sup(D). In most cases, one or the other of these bounds satisfies the property P . Then, we get one (or two) distinguished diffeologies satisfying P , which deserves to be noticed. Translated in terms of diffeology this gives “the finest diffeology such that. . . ” or “the coarsest diffeology such that. . . ”. Infimum and supremum change then into minimum and maximum. Here are two examples we shall find again later. EXAMPLE 1. The diffeology generated by a set F of parametrizations (art. 1.66) is the minimum of the set of all the diffeologies containing F . EXAMPLE 2. Let Y be a diffeological space, and let X be a set. Let f : X → Y be some map. The supremum of the diffeologies of X such that f is smooth is a maximum, and it is called the pullback of the diffeology of Y (art. 1.26). In other words, it is the coarsest diffeology such that f is smooth. These two examples illustrate a frequent phenomenon in diffeology:
16
1. DIFFEOLOGY AND DIFFEOLOGICAL SPACES
CASE 1. If a family of diffeologies clearly contains the coarse diffeology (the right black point of the Figure 1.2), then the distinguished diffeology is the lower bound, the finest diffeology such that... . This is the case of Example 1. The set of diffeologies containing F clearly contains the coarse diffeology. CASE 2. If a family of diffeologies clearly contains the discrete diffeology (the left white point of the Figure 1.3), then the distinguished diffeology is the upper bound, the coarsest diffeology such that... . This is the case in the second example. The set of all the diffeologies such that f is smooth clearly contains the discrete diffeology because if the left composite of any map with a locally constant parametrization is locally constant, then a plot of every diffeology.
FIGURE 1.3. Case 2 — The coarsest diffeology such that... That said, Figures 1.2 and 1.3 suggest wrongly that fineness is a total order, which is obviously not the case. Figure 1.4 is more representative of the real situation. In this figure, the gray domains represent families of diffeologies, and the dots their infimum and supremum. The far left dot represents the discrete diffeology and the far right dot, the coarse diffeology. One can argue, of course, that every diffeology is always finer than any other coarser diffeology, or conversely coarser than any other finer. Then, any diffeology is distinguished, and hence, all this discussion does not make sense. But it does not matter, we shall see how this discussion applies in concrete situations.
Exercises
✎ EXERCISE 7 (Locally constant parametrizations). Let P : U → X be a parametrization in some set X. Show that P is locally constant (art. 1.20) if and only if P is constant on each pathwiseconnected component of its domain U, that is, if and only if, for every pair of points r and r ′ in U, connected by a smooth path γ ∈ C ∞ (R, U), γ (0) = r and γ (1) = r ′ , then P(r) = P(r ′ ).
✎ EXERCISE 8 (Diffeology of Q ⊂ R). Check that the set of smooth parametrizations in R with values in Q is a diffeology of Q. Show that this diffeology is discrete. Be aware that in the category {Topology} Q is not discrete in R. More generally, show that every countable subset of every real domain (and by consequence, of every manifold) is diffeologically discrete.
PULLING BACK DIFFEOLOGIES
17
FIGURE 1.4. Diffeologies and bounds of families: inf, sup, min, max.
✎ EXERCISE 9 (Smooth maps from discrete spaces). Show that every map defined on a discrete diffeological space to any other diffeological space is smooth, that is, C ∞ (X ◦ , X′ ) = Maps(X, X′ ).
✎ EXERCISE 10 (Smooth maps to coarse spaces). Show that every map defined from any diffeological space to a coarse diffeological space is smooth, that is, C ∞ (X, X′• ) = Maps(X, X′ ). Pulling Back Diffeologies In this section we describe the transfer of diffeology by pullback. Given any set X and any map f from X to a diffeological space X′ , the set X inherits a natural diffeology by pullback of the diffeology of X′ . 1.26. Pullbacks of diffeologies. Let X be a set. Let X′ be a diffeological space and D ′ its diffeology. Let f : X → X′ be some map. There exists a coarsest diffeology of X such that the map f is smooth. This diffeology is called the pullback of the diffeology D ′ by f , and it is denoted by f ∗ (D ′ ). A parametrization P in X belongs to f ∗ (D ′ ) if and only if f ◦ P belongs to D ′ , which writes f ∗ (D ′ ) = {P ∈ Param(X)  f ◦ P ∈ D ′ }. PROOF. Let us consider the family D of all the diffeologies of X such that f is smooth. A diffeology of X belongs to D if and only if the left composition of each of its elements by f is an element of D ′ . By the way, note that the discrete diffeology of X belongs to D (Exercise 9, p. 17). We know that the family D has a supremum (art. 1.24). It is the intersection of all the diffeologies of X containing the set of all
18
1. DIFFEOLOGY AND DIFFEOLOGICAL SPACES
the parametrizations P of X such that f ◦ P belongs to D ′ . But this set, let us call it D, is already a diffeology, let us check it. D1. The composition of every constant map by any function f is constant. Hence, the constant parametrizations belong to D. D2. Let P : U → X be a parametrization such that, locally at each point r of U, f ◦ P ∈ D ′ . Since D ′ is a diffeology, f ◦ P is a plot for D ′ . Hence, P belongs to D. D3. Let P be a parametrization in X. If f ◦ P is a plot of X′ , for every smooth parametrization F in the domain of P, f ◦ (P ◦ F) = ( f ◦ P) ◦ F is a plot of X′ . Hence, P ◦ F belongs to D. Therefore, D = {P ∈ Param(X)  f ◦ P ∈ D ′ } is the maximum of D, that is, the coarsest diffeology such that f is smooth. □ 1.27. Smoothness and pullbacks. Let X and X′ be two diffeological spaces, whose diffeologies are denoted by D and D ′ . The notion of pullback of diffeologies gives a new interpretation of the notion of smooth maps: a map f from X to X′ is smooth if and only if D ⊂ f ∗ (D ′ ), that is, if D is finer than f ∗ (D ′ ) : C ∞ (X, X′ ) = { f ∈ Maps(X, X′ )  D ⊂ f ∗ (D ′ )}. PROOF. If f is smooth, then, for all P ∈ D, f ◦ P ∈ D ′ , by definition. But f ∗ (D ′ ) is the set of parametrizations P in X such that f ◦ P ∈ D ′ (art. 1.26). Thus, P ∈ f ∗ (D ′ ), that is, D ⊂ f ∗ (D ′ ). Conversely, if D ⊂ f ∗ (D ′ ), then, for all P ∈ D, f ◦ P ∈ D ′ , thus f is smooth. Hence, f is smooth if and only if D ⊂ f ∗ (D ′ ). □ 1.28. Composition of pullbacks. Let X and X′ be two sets, and X′′ be a diffeological space. Let f : X → X′ and g : X′ → X′′ be two maps. The pullback by f of the pullback by g of the diffeology D ′′ of X′′ is equal to the pullback of D ′′ by g ◦ f , f g X −−→ X′ −−→ (X′′ , D ′′ ), and f ∗ (g ∗ (D ′′ )) = (g ◦ f )∗ (D ′′ ). In other words, the pullback of diffeologies is contravariant. PROOF. This is a direct consequence of the associativity of the composition of maps, and of the characterization of the plots of the pullback diffeology (art. 1.26). Let D ′ = g ∗ (D ′′ ) = {P ∈ Param(X′ )  g ◦ P ∈ D ′′ }. Then, f ∗ (g ∗ (D ′′ )) = {P ∈ Param(X)  f ◦ P ∈ D ′ } = {P ∈ Param(X)  g ◦ ( f ◦ P) ∈ D ′′ } = {P ∈ Param(X)  (g ◦ f ) ◦ P ∈ D ′′ } = (g ◦ f )∗ (D ′′ ). The pullback is therefore associative.
□
INDUCTIONS
U
Q
P
X
19
f
FIGURE 1.5. An induction. Exercise
✎ EXERCISE 11 (Square root of the smooth diffeology). Let D be the pullback, by the square map sq : x 7→ x 2 , of the smooth diffeology C⋆∞ (R) of R (art. 1.9). Is D finer or coarser than C⋆∞ (R)? Check that the map  ·  : x 7→ x, defined on R, is a plot for the diffeology D. Conclude that all the parametrizations of the kind P : r 7→ Q(r), where Q ∈ C⋆∞ (R), belong to D. Inductions Inductions are injections between diffeological spaces, identifying the source space with the pullback (art. 1.26) of the target. They are a key categorical construction, used in particular in the definition of diffeological subspaces. 1.29. What is an induction? Let X and X′ be two diffeological spaces, and let f : X → X′ be some map. The map f is said to be inductive or to be an induction if the following two conditions are satisfied. 1. The map f is injective. 2. The diffeology D of X is the pullback by f of the diffeology D ′ of X′ , that is, with the notation introduced above, f ∗ (D ′ ) = D. NOTE. The second condition also writes D ⊂ f ∗ (D ′ ) and f ∗ (D ′ ) ⊂ D, where the first inclusion D ⊂ f ∗ (D ′ ) just says that f is smooth (art. 1.27). 1.30. Composition of inductions. The composite of two inductions is an induction. Inductions form a subcategory of the category {Diffeology}, which can be naturally denoted by {Inductions}.
20
1. DIFFEOLOGY AND DIFFEOLOGICAL SPACES
PROOF. Let X, X′ and X′′ be three diffeological spaces, and let us denote by D, D ′ and D ′′ their diffeologies. Let f : X → X′ and g : X′ → X′′ be two inductions, that is, g ∗ (D ′′ ) = D ′ and f ∗ (D ′ ) = D. Since pullbacks are contravariant (art. 1.28), (g ◦ f )∗ (D ′′ ) = f ∗ (g ∗ (D ′′ )) = f ∗ (D ′ ) = D. Since the composite of two injections is an injection, g ◦ f is injective. Therefore, g ◦ f is an induction. □ 1.31. Criterion for being an induction. Let X and X′ be two diffeological spaces. A map f : X → X′ is an induction (art. 1.29) if and only if the following two conditions, illustrated in Figure 1.5, are satisfied: 1. The map f is a smooth injection. 2. For every plot P of X′ with values in f (X), the parametrization f −1 ◦ P is a plot of X. PROOF. Let us recall that the map f : X → X′ is an induction if and only if it is injective and D = f ∗ (D ′ ). Let us assume first that f is an induction. Hence f is injective and smooth (art. 1.29). Now, let P : U → X′ be a plot with values in f (X). Hence, Q = f −1 ◦ P : U → X is a parametrization in X such that P = f ◦ Q is a plot of X′ . Thus, by the definition of induction, Q is a plot of X (art. 1.29). Therefore, for any plot P of X′ with values in f (X), the map f −1 ◦ P is a plot of X. Conversely, let f be a smooth injection such that, for any plot P of X′ with values in f (X), the map f −1 ◦ P is a plot of X. Let P be a parametrization in X such that f ◦ P is a plot of X′ , that is, P ∈ f ∗ (D ′ ). The parametrization Q = f ◦ P is a plot of X′ with values in f (X). By hypothesis f −1 ◦ Q = f −1 ◦ f ◦ P = P is a plot of X, hence f ∗ (D ′ ) ⊂ D. Therefore, since f is smooth and injective, f is an induction. □ 1.32. Surjective inductions. Let X and X′ be two diffeological spaces. Let f : X → X′ be an induction. If f is surjective, then f is a diffeomorphism. Thus, surjective inductions are diffeomorphisms. Conversely, diffeomorphisms are surjective inductions. This behavior expresses the strong nature of inductions. Compare, for example, with the different behavior of local inductions (art. 2.15). PROOF. An induction is, by definition, smooth and injective (art. 1.29). If moreover, f is surjective, then f is a bijection, a smooth bijection. By application of the characterization of induction above (art. 1.31), the map f −1 also is smooth. Therefore, f is a diffeomorphism. Conversely, let us denote by D and D ′ the diffeologies of X and X′ . If f is a diffeomorphism, then it is smooth, thus f ◦ D ⊂ D ′ , or D ⊂ f ∗ (D ′ ) (art. 1.27). Now its inverse also is smooth, thus f −1 ◦ D ′ ⊂ D, that is, D ′ ⊂ f ◦ D, or f ∗ (D ′ ) ⊂ D. Therefore f ∗ (D ′ ) = D, f is an induction, and surjective. □
INDUCTIONS
21
Exercises
✎ EXERCISE 12 (Immersions of real domains). Let U be an ndomain, regarded
as a diffeological space (art. 1.9). Let f : U → Rm be a smooth map, and r ∈ U. Show that, if f is an immersion at the point r, that is, if the tangent linear map D( f )(r) : Rn → Rm is injective, then there exists an open neighborhood O of r such that f ↾ O is an induction. Apply the implicit function theorem, or the rank theorem, for smooth parametrizations; see, for example, [Die70a].
✎ EXERCISE 13 (Flat points of smooth paths). Let γ be a smooth parametrization
defined from an interval ]−ε, +ε[ to Rn . Let γ (0) = 0. We say that γ is flat at 0 if all the derivatives of γ vanish at 0, that is, if γ (k) (0) = 0, for all k > 0. Show that, if there exists a sequence of numbers (t n )∞ n=1 converging to 0, such that t n < t n+1 and γ (t n ) = 0, for all n, then γ (0) = 0 and γ is flat at 0.
✎ EXERCISE 14 (Induction of intervals into domains). Let ε > 0, let f be a smooth injection from an interval ]−ε, +ε[ to Rn , such that f (0) = 0. We say that f is flat at the point 0 if, for all positive integers p, the pth derivative of f at 0 vanishes, which is denoted by f (p) (0) = 0 (see Exercise 13, p. 21). 1) Show that, if f is flat at the point 0, then f is not an induction. Thus, an induction from ]−ε, +ε[ to Rn is nowhere flat. 2) Show that, if f is an induction, there exist a smallest integer p ≥ 0 and a smooth map φ : ]−ε, +ε[ → Rn , such that for all t ∈ ]−ε, +ε[, f (t) = t p × φ (t), and φ ′ (t) ̸= 0. NOTE. An injective immersion from an interval to Rn , that is, a smooth injection whose first derivative never vanishes, is not necessarily an induction. A counterexample is treated in the Exercise 59, p. 72. At the time I wrote this exercise I did not know if there exists an induction of an interval into Rn that is not immersions. It turns out that this question had been solved incidentally, thanks to a theorem by Henri Joris [Jor82]. 4 It proves in particular that the smooth injection t 7→ (t 2 , t 3 ), whose image is the semicubic y 2 = x 3 , is an induction, but it is not an immersion.
✎ EXERCISE 15 (Smooth injection in the corner). Let “the corner” K be the subset of R2 defined by
x 0 K= , with 0 ≤ x < 1 ∪ , with 0 ≤ y < 1 . 0 y 1) Show that if a smooth injection γ : ]−ε, +ε[ → R2 takes its values in the corner K, and if γ (0) = (0, 0), then γ is flat (see the definition in Exercise 13, p. 21) at the 4This theorem was brought to my attention by Yael Karshon; see [KMW22].
22
1. DIFFEOLOGY AND DIFFEOLOGICAL SPACES
point 0. Exhibit a smooth parametrization γ of the corner such that γ (0) = (0, 0) and γ is not flat at 0. 2) Check that j : R → R2 , defined as follows, is a smooth injection whose values are the corner K. 1 0 0 et j(t) = if t < 0, j(0) = , j(t) = − 1 if t > 0. 0 0 e t 3) Exhibit a parametrization c : R → R such that j ◦ c is smooth, but not c (see Exercise 14, p. 21). Is j an induction?
✎ EXERCISE 16 (Induction into smooth maps). Let n be some integer and equip C ∞ (R, Rn ) with the functional diffeology defined in (art. 1.13). Show that the map f : Rn × Rn → C ∞ (R, Rn ) defined by f (x, v) = [t 7→ x + t v] is an induction.
Subspaces of Diffeological Spaces Every subset of a diffeological space inherits the subset diffeology defined as the pullback of the ambient diffeology by the natural inclusion. This construction is related to the notion of induction discussed above (art. 1.29). 1.33. Subspaces and subset diffeology. Let X be a diffeological space, and let D be its diffeology. Pick any subset A of X, and let jA : A → X be the inclusion. The subset A carries naturally the diffeology jA∗ (D), pullback of the diffeology D by the inclusion jA (art. 1.26). This diffeology is said to be inherited from X or induced by the inclusion, or by the ambient space. It is called the subset diffeology of A. The plots of the subset diffeology are just the plots of X with values in A, that is, jA∗ (D) = {P ∈ D  val(P) ⊂ A}. Equipped with the subset diffeology we say that the subset A is a diffeological subspace of X. Thus, a diffeological subspace of X is any subset of X equipped with the subset diffeology. NOTE. If X′ is a diffeological space and f : X → X′ is a smooth map, then just because jA is smooth, f ◦ jA is smooth, in other words, the restriction of a smooth map to any subspace is smooth. 1.34. Smooth maps to subspaces. Let X, X′ and X′′ be three diffeological spaces. Let f : X → X′ be some map, and let j : X′ → X′′ be an induction. The map f is smooth if and only if j ◦ f is smooth. Moreover, the map f is an induction if and only if j ◦ f is an induction.
SUBSPACES OF DIFFEOLOGICAL SPACES
23
This is summarized by the following diagram: X j◦ f
f
X′
j
X′′
PROOF. Let D, D ′ and D ′′ be the diffeologies of X, X′ and X′′ . The map j ◦ f is smooth if and only if D ⊂ ( j ◦ f )∗ (D ′′ ) (art. 1.27). But ( j ◦ f )∗ (D ′′ ) = f ∗ ( j ∗ (D ′′ )) (art. 1.28) and, since j is an induction, D ′ = j ∗ (D ′′ ), thus f ∗ ( j ∗ (D ′′ )) = f ∗ (D ′ ). Hence, D ⊂ ( j ◦ f )∗ (D ′′ ) is equivalent to D ⊂ f ∗ (D ′ ), which means that f is smooth. Note that if j ◦ f is injective, then f is injective. Next, replacing the inclusion above by an equality proves the second assertion. □ 1.35. Subspaces, subsubspaces, etc. Let X be a diffeological space. Let A and B be two subspaces of X such that A ⊂ B ⊂ X. It is equivalent to consider A as a subspace of B, regarded as a subspace of X, or to consider A as a subspace of X. PROOF. The inclusion jA of A into X is the composite jA = jB ◦ jAB , where jB is the inclusion of B into X and jAB the inclusion of A into B. Then, it is just a direct consequence of the transitivity of inductions (art. 1.30). □ 1.36. Inductions identify source and image. Let X′ be a diffeological space and A ⊂ X′ . For the subset diffeology (art. 1.33), the inclusion jA : A → X′ is an induction. More generally, let X and X′ be two diffeological spaces. An induction f : X → X′ (art. 1.29) identifies the source X with its image. In other words, f is a diffeomorphism from X onto f (X), equipped with the subset diffeology. PROOF. The first part of the proposition is clear. Now, if f is an induction, then it is a smooth bijection onto its image A = f (X). Let us consider the image A, equipped with the subset diffeology, and let f −1 : A → X be the inverse map. Let P : U → A be a plot for the subset diffeology, that is, a plot of X′ with values in A (art. 1.33). By criterion (art. 1.31), f −1 ◦ P is a plot of X. Thus, f −1 is smooth and f is a diffeomorphism onto its image, equipped with the subset diffeology. □ 1.37. Restricting inductions to subspaces. Let X and X′ be two diffeological spaces. Let F : X → X′ be an induction and A be some subspace of X. The restriction f of F to A is a diffeomorphism from A onto its image. In particular, restrictions of diffeomorphisms are diffeomorphisms from the source to the image. PROOF. Let jA be the inclusion from A into X. Since diffeomorphisms are inductions (art. 1.32), the map f = F ◦ jA is the composite of two inductions, thus an induction
24
1. DIFFEOLOGY AND DIFFEOLOGICAL SPACES
(art. 1.30). Now, thanks to (art. 1.36), the map f is a diffeomorphism onto its image, equipped with the subset diffeology. □ 1.38. Discrete subsets of a diffeological space. Let X be a diffeological space. A subset A ⊂ X is said to be discrete if its subset diffeology is discrete (art. 1.20), that is, if A, as a subspace of X, is diffeologically discrete. See for example Exercise 8, p. 16 and Exercise 19, p. 24.
Exercises
✎ EXERCISE 17 (Vector subspaces of real vector spaces). Let Rn be equipped with
the standard diffeology. Let (b1 , . . . , bk ) be k independent vectors of Rn . Let B be Pk the linear map from Rk to Rn defined by B(x 1 , . . . , x k ) = i=1 x i bi . Show that B is an induction. Deduce that any vector subspace E of Rn , equipped with the subset diffeology, is diffeomorphic to Rk , with k = dim(E).
✎ EXERCISE 18 (The sphere as diffeological subspace). Let Sn denote the unit
nsphere in Rn+1 , Sn = {x ∈ Rn+1  ∥x∥ = 1}. We equip Sn with the subset diffeology. Let x be a point of the sphere Sn , and E ⊂ Rn+1 be the subspace orthogonal to x. Let f be the following map, defined on the vectors of E whose norm is strictly less than 1; see Figure 1.6. Æ (♦) f : t 7→ t + 1 − ∥t∥2 x, with t ∈ E, and ∥t∥ < 1. Show that f is an induction from B = {t ∈ E  ∥t∥ < 1} to Sn . Thus, for every point x of Sn , there exists an induction from the open unit ball of Rn into Sn whose image is the hemisphere made up of the points x ′ ∈ Sn such that the scalar product x · x ′ is strictly positive.
✎ EXERCISE 19 (The pierced irrational torus). Let Tα be the irrational torus, described in Exercise 4, p. 10. Let τ be some element of Tα . Check that Tα is not discrete but show that the subspace Tα − {τ } is discrete. ✎ EXERCISE 20 (A discrete image of R). Let us consider the set C ∞ (R, R) of smooth maps from R to R. 1) Show that the set of parametrizations P : U → C ∞ (R, R) satisfying the following two conditions is a diffeology: (♣) The parametrization P : (r, s) 7→ P(r)(s) belongs to C ∞ (U × R, R). (♠) For all r0 ∈ U there exists an open ball B centered at r0 , and for all r ∈ B there exists a closed interval [a, b] ⊂ R such that P(r) and P(r0 ) coincide outside of [a, b].
SUMS OF DIFFEOLOGICAL SPACES
m = f(t)
25
E
x t 0
Sn
FIGURE 1.6. The projection f . Note that the condition (♣) says that P is a plot for the diffeology defined in (art. 1.13). The second condition (♠) says that the plots are locally compactly supported variations of smooth maps. 2) Show that the image of the injective map f : R → C ∞ (R, R), which associates with each real a the linear map [x 7→ a x], is discrete. Is the map f smooth? 3) Generalize this construction to C ∞ (Rn , Rn ). What can you say about the injection of GL(n, R) into C ∞ (Rn )? Sums of Diffeological Spaces The category {Diffeology} is closed for coproducts (also called sums or disjoint unions) of diffeological spaces. There exists a distinguished diffeology, called the sum diffeology, on the sum of any family of diffeological spaces. Reminder. Let us recall the formal construction of the sum (also called coproduct) of any family of sets [Bou72]. Let E = {E i }i∈I be an arbitrary family of sets, I being some set of indices. The set I can be the set E itself, in this case the family is said to be selfindexed. The sum of the elements of E is defined as follows: a E i = {(i, e)  i ∈ I , and e ∈ E i }. i∈I
` The sets E i are called the components of the sum i∈I E i . For every index i ∈ I , we denote by ji the natural injection, a ji : E i → E i , defined by ji (e) = (i, e). i∈I
26
1. DIFFEOLOGY AND DIFFEOLOGICAL SPACES
The sum is sometimes simply denoted by
`
E , the family being understood.
1.39. Building sums with spaces. Let {X i }i∈I be a family of diffeological spaces for an arbitrary set of indices I . There exists, on the direct sum X=
a
Xi,
i∈I
` a finest diffeology such that the natural injections ji : X i → i∈I X i are smooth for each index i ∈ I . This diffeology is called the sum diffeology. The set X, equipped with the sum diffeology, is called the diffeological sum, or simply the sum, of the diffeological spaces X i . ` The plots for this diffeology are the parametrizations P : U → i∈I X i which are locally plots of one of the components of the sum. Precisely, a parametrization P : r → (i r , P(r)) is a plot of the diffeological sum X if and only if it satisfies the following condition: (♣) For every r ∈ U there exist an index i and an open neighborhood V of r such that i r ′ = i for all r ′ ∈ V, and P ↾ V is a plot of X i . NOTE. For the sum diffeology, every natural injection ji : X i → X is an induction (art. 1.29). Each component X i equipped with the subset diffeology induced by the sum is diffeomorphic to the original X i . PROOF. Let us check that (♣) defines a diffeology. By axiom D1, the constant maps take their values in one of the X i , with i ∈ I . The locality axiom D2 is satisfied by definition. The smooth compatibility axiom D3 is satisfied thanks to the continuity of smooth parametrizations in real domains, and because each X i is itself ` a diffeological space. Therefore, (♣) defines a diffeology of the sum X = i∈I X i , for which every injection ji is obviously smooth. ` Conversely, let us consider a diffeology D on the sum X = i∈I X i such that every ` injection ji , i ∈ I , is smooth. Let P : r 7→ (i r , P(r)) ∈ i∈I X i be a parametrization satisfying the condition (♣). Thus, for all r ∈ U, there exist an index i and an open neighborhood V of r such that i r ′ = i for all r ′ ∈ V, and P ↾ V is a plot of X i . Since ji : X i → X is smooth for each i ∈ I , the composite ji ◦ (P ↾ V) : r 7→ (i, P(r)) belongs to D. But ji ◦(P ↾ V) = P ↾ V, thus P is the supremum of a family of elements of D, and thanks to the axiom of locality, P itself belongs to D. Hence, the elements of the diffeology defined by the condition (♣) are elements of every diffeology such that the natural injections ji , i ∈ I , are smooth. Therefore the diffeology defined by (♣) is the finest diffeology for which every injection ji is smooth. The fact that the injections ji are inductions is obvious. □
SUMS OF DIFFEOLOGICAL SPACES
27
` 1.40. Refining a sum. Let X = i∈I X i be a sum of diffeological spaces. Let, for ` some j ∈ I , X j = k∈K X kj . Let us consider the new family of indices I ′ = {I − { j}}
a
K = {(I , i)  i ∈ I , and i ̸= j} ∪ {(K , k)  k ∈ K }.
For all i ′ ∈ I ′ , let X i ′ = X i if i ′ = (I , i) and i ̸= j, and let X i ′ = X kj if i ′ = (K , k), with k ∈ K . Then, there exists a natural equivalence between the two decompositions, a a X= Xi ≃ X i′ . i ′ ∈I ′
i∈I
This decomposition applies recursively to any subfamily of components which are themselves the sum of diffeological spaces. That leads to the finest decomposition of every diffeological space into the sum of its components (art. 5.8). 1.41. Foliated diffeology. Let X be a diffeological space X, and R be an equivalence relation defined on X. Let Q denote the quotient of X by the relation R, that is, Q is the set of the equivalence classes q = class(x) ⊂ X, x ∈ X. As a set, X is equivalent to the sum of its classes, a X≃ q, q∈Q
thanks to the bijection σ : x 7→ (class(x), x). The pullback of the sum diffeology of the family Q (art. 1.39), by σ (art. 1.26), where each class is equipped with the subset diffeology of X (art. 1.33), is called the foliated diffeology of X (associated with the relation R). The elements of the foliated diffeology are the plots of X, which take locally their values in some equivalence class. More precisely, a parametrization P : U → X is a plot for the foliated diffeology if and only if the following condition is satisfied: (♣) For all r ∈ U there exists an open neighborhood V of r, such that P ↾ V is a plot of X with values in class(P(r)). The foliated diffeology is obviously finer than the original diffeology. 1.42. Klein structure and singularities of a diffeological space. The notion of singularity takes a special meaning in the diffeological context. For example, the irrational torus Tα = R/(Z + αZ) described in Exercise 4, p. 10, often viewed as singular is — as a group — extremely regular. Indeed, the regularity of a diffeological space X lies in its homogeneity, and conversely, its inhomogeneity expresses its singularities. Precisely, the action of the group of diffeomorphisms Diff(X) (art. 1.17) distinguishes between subsets of points of the same kind. A space transitive under the action of its diffeomorphisms — all its points are of the
28
1. DIFFEOLOGY AND DIFFEOLOGICAL SPACES
same kind — may be regarded as regular, otherwise it can be split into orbits, [ X= O x , with O x = {g(x)  g ∈ Diff(X)}. x∈X
Each orbit represents a certain degree of singularity. Note that each orbit O may be equipped with the subset diffeology, and the sum diffeology of the orbits of Diff(X) may be called the Klein diffeology of X. Equipped with the Klein diffeology, the set may be denoted by X Klein , that is, a X Klein = O. O ∈(X/Diff(X))
The space X Klein reflects the singular splitting of X. If X is transitive under Diff(X), then X is said to be a Klein space. 5 The orbits of Diff(X), equipped with the subset diffeology, may be called the Klein strata of X. The way the Klein strata are glued together to build the space X is encoded by the quotient S(X) = X/Diff(X), equipped with the quotient diffeology, as it is described further (art. 1.50). These are perhaps the tools to explore the notion of singularity from the diffeological viewpoint. 6 We could refine this analysis by considering the orbits of the groupoid of germs of local diffeomorphisms (art. 2.5). NOTE. Klein strata satisfy the socalled frontier condition which states that the closure, for the Dtopology (art. 2.8), of a Klein stratum is a union of Klein strata. This is the starting point of a diffeological theory of stratifications. 7 EXAMPLE. Let us consider the halfline ∆ ∞ = [0, ∞[⊂ R, equipped with the subset diffeology; see Exercise 24, p. 29 and Exercise 64, p. 80. The group Diff(∆ ∞ ) has two orbits: the point • = {0} and the open subset ◦ = ]0, ∞[. Thus, S(∆ ∞ ) is the pair {•, ◦}. But the diffeology of S(∆ ∞ ) is not the discrete diffeology, not all plots are locally constant (see also Exercise 48, p. 61 for an example of a 2point nondiscrete space). The diffeology of S(∆ ∞ ) encodes the relationship between the singularity • = {0} and the regular stratum ◦ = ]0, ∞[. Informally, the quotient space S(∆ ∞ ) represents what is called generally the transverse structure, here the transverse structure of the partition in Klein strata. PROOF. Diffeomorphisms are Dhomeomorphisms (art. 2.9), the closure relation is then preserved by diffeomorphisms. The following is just given to make this statement obvious. Let x belongs to the closure of O y , and let x ′ = f (x) with f ∈ Diff(X). Let U′ be a Dopen neighborood of x ′ , hence U = f −1 (U′ ) is a Dopen 5In reference to Felix Klein’s Erlangen program, where he presented his ideas about what a geometry is. Here, we describe the geometry defined by a diffeology. 6This program has started with the article “Orbifolds as stratified diffeologies” [GIZ22], in collaboration with Serap Gürer, where a diffeological theory of stratifications is proposed. 7For a discussion see [PIZ22a].
PUSHING FORWARD DIFFEOLOGIES
29
neighborhood of x. Then, there exists z = g( y) ∈ O y ∩ U. Thus z ′ = f (z) belong to U′ = f (U) and z ′ ∈ O y , since z ∈ O y and z ′ = f (z). Therefore U′ ∩ O y ̸= ∅. □ Exercises
✎ EXERCISE 21 (Sum of discrete or coarse spaces). Check that the sum of discrete spaces is discrete. Show that a diffeological space X is discrete if and only if it is ` the sum of its elements, that is, if and only if X = x∈X {x}. What about the sum of coarse spaces? ` ✎ EXERCISE 22 (Plots of the sum diffeology). Let X = i∈I X i be a sum of diffeological spaces. Show that a parametrization P : U → X is a plot if and only if S there exists a partition {Ui }i∈I of U, that is, U = i∈I Ui and Ui ∩ U j = ∅ if i ̸= j, such that, for every nonempty Ui , Pi = P ↾ Ui is a plot of X i . We say that the plot P is the sum of the Pi . R − {0}, equipped with the ✎ EXERCISE 23 (Diffeology of R − {0}). Check that ` subset diffeology of R, is equal to the sum ]−∞, 0[
]0, ∞[.
✎ EXERCISE 24 (Klein strata of [0, ∞[). Let X be the segment [0, ∞[ equipped with the subset diffeology of R. Show that every diffeomorphism φ of X fixes 0, that is, φ (0) = 0. Justify the fact that the segment has two Klein strata: the singleton {0} and the open interval ]0, ∞[. ✎ EXERCISE 25 (Compact diffeology). Check that the diffeology of C ∞ (R) defined in Exercise 20, p. 24 is the foliated diffeology of C ∞ (R) for the following equivalence relation.
(♦) Two functions f and g are equivalent if there exists a compact K of R such that f and g coincide outside K. This diffeology is called the compact diffeology of C ∞ (R) [Igl87]. The third part of Exercise 20, p. 24 can be rephrased as follows: the group GL(n, R) inherits the discrete diffeology from the compact diffeology of C ∞ (Rn ). Pushing Forward Diffeologies In this section we describe the transfer of diffeology by pushforward. Given a diffeological space X and a map f from X to some set X′ , the set X′ inherits a natural diffeology by pushing forward the diffeology of X to X′ . 1.43. Pushforward of diffeologies. Let X be a diffeological space, and let X′ be a set. Let f : X → X′ be a map. There exists a finest diffeology of X′ such that the map f is smooth. This diffeology is called the image, or the pushforward, by f of
30
1. DIFFEOLOGY AND DIFFEOLOGICAL SPACES
the diffeology D of X, and will be denoted by f∗ (D). A parametrization P : U → X′ is a plot for f∗ (D) if and only if it satisfies the following condition: (♣) For every r ∈ U, there exists an open neighborhood V of r such that, either P ↾ V is a constant parametrization, or there exists a plot Q : V → X such that P ↾ V = f ◦ Q. In the case where P ↾ V = f ◦ Q, we say that P lifts locally, at the point r, along the map f . We also say that Q is a local lift of P, over V, along f . PROOF. The set D of all the diffeologies of X′ such that f is smooth is nonempty, since it contains the coarse diffeology. Now, this family D has an infimum, let us denote it by D ′ , it is the intersection of all the elements of D (art. 1.23). We have now to check that this infimum is actually a minimum, that is, f is smooth for the diffeology D ′ . But by the very definition of smooth maps, for any plot P belonging to D, P ◦ f belongs to every element of D. Thus, P ◦ f belongs to their intersection D ′ . Next, let us check that the set of parametrizations satisfying (♣) is a diffeology. The axioms D1 and D2 are satisfied by definition. Let us consider then a parametrization P : U → X′ satisfying (♣), and let F : U′ → U be a smooth parametrization. Let P′ = P ◦F, r ′ ∈ U′ , r = F(r ′ ), V′ = F−1 (V). Since F is continuous, V′ is a domain, and by construction an open neighborhood of r ′ . Then, let Q′ = Q ◦ F, then P ↾ V = f ◦ Q implies P′ ↾ V′ = f ◦ Q′ . Therefore, the axiom D3 is satisfied. Now, let D ′ be a diffeology such that the map f is smooth, that is, for every plot Q of X, f ◦ Q is a plot of X′ . Hence, the diffeology D ′ contains the set of all the parametrizations of the type f ◦ Q. By restriction to any subdomain of the plots Q (permitted by the axiom D3), D ′ contains the elements of the diffeology described by (♣). It also contains the locally constant parametrizations (art. 1.20). Therefore, this diffeology is the finest diffeology such that f is smooth. □ 1.44. Smoothness and pushforwards. Let X and X′ be two diffeological spaces, whose diffeologies are denoted by D and D ′ . The notion of pushforward of diffeologies gives a new interpretation of the notion of differentiability: a map f : X → X′ is smooth if and only if f∗ (D) ⊂ D ′ . In other words, C ∞ (X, X′ ) = { f ∈ Maps(X, X′ )  f∗ (D) ⊂ D ′ }. PROOF. Let us assume first that f is smooth. Said differently, D ′ is a diffeology of X′ such that f is smooth. But f∗ (D) is the intersection of all the diffeologies of X′ for which f is smooth (art. 1.43), thus f∗ (D) ⊂ D ′ . Now, let us assume that f∗ (D) ⊂ D ′ . Let P be a plot of X and P′ = f ◦ P. Thanks to (art. 1.43, (♣)), P′ is a plot of f∗ (D). Thus, by hypothesis, P′ is a plot of D ′ . Therefore, f is smooth. □
PUSHING FORWARD DIFFEOLOGIES
31
1.45. Composition of pushforwards. Let X be a diffeological space, and let X′ and X′′ be two sets. Let f : X → X′ and g : X′ → X′′ be two maps. The pushforward by g of the pushforward by f of the diffeology D of X coincides with the pushforward of D by g ◦ f , f g (X, D) −−→ X′ −−→ X′′ , and g∗ ( f∗ (D)) = (g ◦ f )∗ (D). In other words, the pushforward of diffeologies is associative. PROOF. Let us prove first that (g ◦ f )∗ (D) ⊂ g∗ ( f∗ (D)). Let P : U → X′′ be a plot for (g ◦ f )∗ (D). By (art. 1.43) P is either locally constant or writes locally P ↾ V = (g ◦ f ) ◦ Q, where Q is a plot of X. If P is locally constant, every local constant plot is included in every diffeology, a fortiori in g∗ ( f∗ (D)). Now, (g ◦ f ) ◦ Q = g ◦ ( f ◦ Q). But f ◦ Q belongs to f∗ (D), hence P ↾ V belongs to g∗ ( f∗ (D)). We get then the first inclusion: (g ◦ f )∗ (D) ⊂ g∗ ( f∗ (D)). Next, let us check that g∗ ( f∗ (D)) ⊂ (g ◦ f )∗ (D). Let P : U → X′′ be an element of g∗ ( f∗ (D)). The plot P is either locally constant or writes locally P ↾ V′ = g ◦ Q′ , where Q′ is a plot for f∗ (D). Locally constant parametrizations belong to every diffeology, a fortiori to (g ◦ f )∗ (D). Then, let Q′ write locally Q′ ↾ V = f ◦ Q where Q is a plot of X defined on V. Thus, P ↾ V = (g ◦ f ) ◦ Q, that is, P belongs to (g ◦ f )∗ (D). □ Exercise
✎ EXERCISE 26 (Square of the smooth diffeology). Let D be the pushforward of the smooth diffeology of R by the square map sq = [x 7→ x 2 ], that is, D = sq∗ (C⋆∞ (R)) (art. 1.9). Is D finer or coarser than C⋆∞ (R)? Let P : U → R be an nplot for D, n > 0, and let r ∈ U. 1) Check that if P(r) < 0, then there exists an open ball B centered at r such that P ↾ B is constant. 2) Check that if P(r) > 0, then there exists an open ball B centered at r such that p the parametrization P is smooth. 3) Check that if P(r0 ) = 0, then the tangent linear map of P at r0 , denoted by D(P)(r0 ), vanishes. Check that the Hessian H of P at the point r0 , that is, H = D2 (P)(r0 ) = D(r 7→ D(P)(r))(r0 ), regarded as a bilinear map on Rn , is positive, i.e. for all v ∈ Rn , H(v)(v) ≥ 0. 4) Is the real function f : x 7→ x 2 − x 3 , defined on ] − ∞, 1[, a plot of D?
32
1. DIFFEOLOGY AND DIFFEOLOGICAL SPACES
Subductions Subductions are surjections between diffeological spaces, identifying the target with the pushforward (art. 1.43) of the source. They are a categorical key construction, used in particular in the definition of the diffeological quotients (art. 1.50). 1.46. What is a subduction? Let X and X′ be two diffeological spaces, and let f : X → X′ be some map. The map f is said to be a subduction if it satisfies the following conditions: 1. The map f is surjective. 2. The diffeology D ′ of X′ is the pushforward of the diffeology D of X, that is, with the notation introduced above, f∗ (D) = D ′ . NOTE. Writing the second condition: f∗ (D) ⊂ D ′ and D ′ ⊂ f∗ (D), the first inclusion just says that f is smooth (art. 1.44). 1.47. Compositions of subductions. The composite of two subductions is a subduction. Subductions form a subcategory of the category {Diffeology}, which may be naturally denoted by {Subductions}. PROOF. Let X, X′ and X′′ be three diffeological spaces, and let D, D ′ and D ′′ be their diffeologies. Let f : X → X′ and g : X′ → X′′ be two subductions, that is, f∗ (D) = D ′ and g∗ (D ′ ) = D ′′ . Since the pushforward is associative (art. 1.45), (g ◦ f )∗ (D) = g∗ ( f∗ (D)) = g∗ (D ′ ) = D ′′ . Therefore, g ◦ f is a subduction. □ 1.48. Criterion for being a subduction. Let X and X′ be two diffeological spaces, and let f : X → X′ be some map. The map f is a subduction if and only if the following conditions, illustrated in Figure 1.7, are satisfied: 1. The map f is a smooth surjection. 2. For every plot P : U → X′ , for every r ∈ U, there exist an open neighborhood V of r and a plot Q : V → X such that P ↾ V = f ◦ Q. Put differently, using the vocabulary introduced in (art. 1.43), the map f is a subduction if and only if f is smooth and every plot of X′ lifts locally along f , at each point of its domain. PROOF. The first condition is equivalent to f∗ (D) ⊂ D ′ (art. 1.44). The second condition is the reduction of the condition D ′ ⊂ f∗ (D) (art. 1.43), in the case of a surjection. □ 1.49. Injective subductions. Let X and X′ be two diffeological spaces, and let f : X → X′ be a subduction. If f is injective, then f is a diffeomorphism. Conversely, diffeomorphisms are injective subductions.
SUBDUCTIONS
33
X
Q U
f V
P r
FIGURE 1.7. A subduction.
PROOF. A subduction is, by definition, smooth and surjective (art. 1.46). If moreover, f is injective, then f is a smooth bijection. Now, let P : U → X′ be a plot, for every r ∈ U there exist an open neighborhood V of r and a plot Q of X such that f ◦ Q = P ↾ V (art. 1.48). But since f is bijective, Q is unique and Q = f −1 ◦ (P ↾ V), that is, f −1 ◦ P is locally a plot of X at each point r of U. Hence, f −1 ◦ P is a plot of X (axiom D2) and f −1 is smooth. Thus, f is a diffeomorphism. Conversely, let D and D ′ denote the diffeologies of X and X′ . If f is a diffeomorphism, then it is smooth and f∗ (D) ⊂ D ′ (art. 1.44). Now, its inverse also is smooth and f∗−1 (D ′ ) ⊂ D. But, thanks to (art. 1.47), this is equivalent to D ′ ⊂ f∗ (D). Therefore, f∗ (D) = D ′ . □ Exercises
✎ EXERCISE 27 (Subduction onto the circle). Equip R with the standard diffeology,
and the circle S1 ⊂ R2 with the subset diffeology. Show that the map Π : t 7→ (cos(t), sin(t)) from R to S1 is a subduction.
✎ EXERCISE 28 (Subduction onto diffeomorphisms). Let G be the set of smooth maps defined by G = { f ∈ C ∞ (R)  for all x ∈ R, f ′ (x) ̸= 0, and f (x + 2π ) = f (x) ± 2π }, where f ′ denotes the first derivative. 1) Check that G is a group, actually a subgroup of Diff(R).
34
1. DIFFEOLOGY AND DIFFEOLOGICAL SPACES
2) Let S1 ⊂ R2 be equipped with the subset diffeology, and Diff(S1 ) its group of diffeomorphisms. Show that the set of parametrizations P : U → Diff(S1 ) satisfying the following condition is a diffeology of Diff(S1 ): (♦) For all plots Q : V → S1 , the parametrization (r, s) 7→ P(r)(Q(s)), defined on U × V, is a plot of S1 . 3) Show that, for every f ∈ G, there exists a unique diffeomorphism φ of S1 such that Π ◦ f = φ ◦ Π , where Π is defined in Exercise 27, p. 33. Show that the map Φ : f 7→ φ is a homomorphism. 4) Let G be equipped with the subset diffeology of the diffeology of C ∞ (R) defined in Exercise 6, p. 11. We shall admit that any smooth map, from an open ball of a real domain to S1 ⊂ R2 , has a global smooth lift to R along the subduction Π . Show that the map Φ is a subduction from G onto Diff(S1 ). Describe the preimage of any φ ∈ Diff(S1 ). 5) Show that the subgroup of translations x 7→ x + a, where a is any real number, is a subgroup of G, diffeomorphic to R. Show that its image by Φ is a subgroup of Diff(S1 ) diffeomorphic to the circle S1 . Quotients of Diffeological Spaces Any quotient of a diffeological space inherits the quotient diffeology defined as the pushforward of the diffeology of the source space to the quotient. This construction is related to the notion of subduction discussed above in (art. 1.46). We say that the category {Diffeology} is closed by quotient. I remember in high school, I was always uncomfortable with the notion of quotient of a set X by an equivalence relation ∼, even though I understood pretty well that the class of an element x was the set of all its equivalent elements. Only later did I realize my confusion: it was the various representations of the quotients, natural or not, used by my teachers, like magic tricks. I decided then to always regard a class for what it is: a subset of X, independently of any representation, and I decided to regard every quotient, the set of all the equivalence classes, as a subset of the powerset P(X). Embedding the quotient into the powerset comforted me. This is the way I shall understand thereafter the notion of quotient. I will also often use the generic notation class(x) to denote the class of the element x, i.e. class(x) = {x ′ ∈ X  x ′ ∼ x}. Thus, class : X → P(X) is an application, the natural projection — or the canonical projection — from X onto its quotient, and by definition X/∼ = class(X) ⊂ P(X). 1.50. Quotient and quotient diffeology. Let X be a diffeological space, and let D be its diffeology. Pick an equivalence relation R on X. The quotient set X/R carries a natural diffeology class∗ (D), the pushforward of the diffeology D
QUOTIENTS OF DIFFEOLOGICAL SPACES
35
by the natural projection class : X → X/R (art. 1.43). This diffeology is called the quotient diffeology. For the quotient diffeology, the projection class is a subduction (art. 1.46). The set X/R equipped with the quotient diffeology is called the quotient space or the diffeological quotient of X by the relation R. For example, let Q be a diffeological space. Every surjection π : X → Q defines a natural equivalence relation R, that is, x R x ′ if π (x) = π (x ′ ). The quotient space X/R is often also denoted by X/π . We shall see in (art. 1.52) that, if π is a subduction, then the bijection class(x) 7→ π (x), from X/R to Q, is a diffeomorphism. NOTE. It is the absolute nontriviality of the quotient diffeology of the nonHausdorff irrational torus [DI83], that has been at the origin of the development of diffeology. 1.51. Smooth maps from quotients. Let X, X′ and X′′ be three diffeological spaces. Let π : X → X′ be a subduction. A map f : X′ → X′′ is smooth if and only if f ◦ π is smooth. X f ◦π
π
X′
X′′
f
Moreover, the map f is a subduction if and only if f ◦ π is a subduction. PROOF. Let D, D ′ and D ′′ be the diffeologies of X, X′ and X′′ . The map f ◦ π is smooth if and only if ( f ◦ π )∗ (D) ⊂ D ′′ (art. 1.44). But ( f ◦ π )∗ (D) = f∗ (π∗ (D)) (art. 1.45). Since π is a subduction, π∗ (D) = D ′ and f∗ (π∗ (D)) = f∗ (D ′ ). Hence, ( f ◦ π )∗ (D) ⊂ D ′′ is equivalent to f∗ (D ′ ) ⊂ D ′′ which means that f is smooth. Note that if π ◦ f is surjective, then f is surjective. Next, replacing above the inclusion by an equality proves the second assertion. □ 1.52. Uniqueness of quotient. Let X, X′ and X′′ be three diffeological spaces. Let π ′ : X → X′ and π ′′ : X → X′′ be two subductions. If f : X′ → X′′ is a bijection such that f ◦ π ′ = π ′′ , then f is a diffeomorphism. In particular, let X be a diffeological space and R be an equivalence relation on X. Let X/R be the diffeological quotient (art. 1.50). Let Q be a set and p : X → Q be a surjection such that p(x) = p(x ′ ) if and only if x R x ′ . Therefore, the map f : class(x) 7→ p(x), is a diffeomorphism from X/R to Q, where Q is equipped with the pushforward diffeology of X (art. 1.43). X π
X/R
p
f
Q
36
1. DIFFEOLOGY AND DIFFEOLOGICAL SPACES
We say that the space Q is a representation of the quotient X/R. PROOF. Since f ◦ π ′ = π ′′ and π ′′ is a subduction, f is a subduction (art. 1.51). Since f is bijective, f is a diffeomorphism (art. 1.49). □ 1.53. Sections of a quotient. It is sometimes convenient to characterize — or compute — the quotient X/R, of a diffeological space X by an equivalence relation R, by restricting the equivalence relation to a subspace X′ . In other words, giving X′ ⊂ X and R ′ , the restriction of R to X′ , what are the conditions for which the natural map
Φ : X′ /R ′ → X/R, with Φ : class′ (x ′ ) 7→ class(x ′ ) is a diffeomorphism? We remark that since R ′ is the restriction of R to X′ , then class′ (x ′ ) = class(x ′ ) ∩ X′ ⊂ class(x ′ ). Note that Φ is necessarily smooth, since class and class′ are two subductions, and moreover injective, its inverse is given by
Φ−1 : X/R → X′ /R ′ , with Φ−1 : class(x) 7→ class(x) ∩ X′ . The first condition, that Φ is surjective, writes X′ ∩ class(x) ̸= ∅, for all x ∈ X. If this condition is fulfilled, then Φ is a smooth bijection. Now, if Φ is surjective, then Φ−1 is smooth if and only if for all plots P : U → X, for all r ∈ U, there exist an open neighborhood V of r and a plot P′ : V → X′ such that class(P′ (r ′ )) = class(P(r ′ )) for all r ′ ∈ V. If these conditions are fulfilled, then we shall say that (X′ , R ′ ) is a reduction of (X, R). If moreover, X′ is such that class(x) ∩ X′ is reduced to one point, then we shall say that X′ is a smooth section of the projection class : X → Q = X/R. Indeed, the map σ : Q → X defined by σ (q) = q ∩ X′ is a diffeomorphism and satisfies class ◦σ = 1Q . In other words, X′ represents Q. NOTE. If there exists a smooth projector ρ : X → X, that is, ρ ◦ ρ = ρ, which preserves the equivalence relation class ◦ρ = class, then X′ = ρ(X), together with the restriction R ′ , is a reduction of (X, R). Moreover, if class′ is injective, then X′ is a smooth section of class. PROOF. The map Φ is smooth because for every plot r 7→ q′r of Q ′ = X′ /R ′ , there exists, locally everywhere, a smooth parametrization r 7→ x r′ such that q′r = class′ (x r′ ). Then, Φ ◦ r 7→ q′r = class ◦ r 7→ x r′ is smooth. Next, Φ is clearly injective, let Φ(class′ (x ′ )) = Φ(class′ (x ′′ )), that is, class(x ′ ) = class(x ′′ ). Thus, class′ (x ′ ) = class(x ′ ) ∩ X′ = class(x ′′ ) ∩ X′ = class′ (x ′′ ). Now, let us assume that Φ is surjective, let P : r 7→ q r be a plot of Q, by definition, there exists, locally everywhere, a plot r 7→ x r such that q r = class(x r ). Let us assume next that, after possibly shrinking the domain of r 7→ x r , there exists a plot r 7→ x r′ of X′ such that class(x r′ ) = class(x r ). Hence, locally,
Φ−1 (q r ) = Φ−1 (class(x r )) = class(x r ) ∩ X′ = class(x r′ ) ∩ X′ = class′ (x r′ ).
QUOTIENTS OF DIFFEOLOGICAL SPACES
37
Therefore, Φ−1 ◦ [r 7→ q r ] is locally smooth, thus Φ−1 is smooth, and Φ is a diffeomorphism. Conversely, let us assume that Φ is a diffeomorphism, that is, Φ−1 is smooth. Let P : U → X be a plot, thus class ◦P is a plot of Q, and Φ−1 ◦ class ◦P is a plot of Q ′ . Hence, there exists locally everywhere a plot P′ of X′ such that class′ (P′ (r)) = Φ−1 (class(P(r))), or Φ(class′ (P′ (r))) = class(P(r)), that is, class(P′ (r)) = class(P(r)). Now, if X′ ∩ class(x) is reduced to one point, then class′ is an injective subduction, that is, a diffeomorphism. Let us assume next that there exists a smooth projector ρ satisfying the conditions of the note. The subspace X′ = ρ(X) intersects every orbit. Indeed, let q ∈ Q and x ∈ q, thus x ′ = ρ(x) ∈ X′ and class(x ′ ) = q. Thus, Φ is surjective. Next, let P be a plot of X, the parametrization P′ = ρ ◦ P is a plot of X′ , and since class ◦ ρ = class, the condition of the proposition is satisfied. □ 1.54. Strict maps, between quotients and subspaces. Let X and X′ be two diffeological spaces. We say that a map f : X → X′ is strict if f is a subduction onto its image, when its image is equipped with the subset diffeology. We may also use the following criterion: (♦) A map f : X → X′ is strict if and only if f is smooth and for all plots P : U → X′ such that val(P) ⊂ f (X), for all r ∈ U, there exist an open neighborhood V of r and a plot Q : V → X such that f ◦ Q = P ↾ V. NOTE. There exists a universal factorization described by the following diagram, where X/ f is the quotient by the equivalence relation defined by f (art. 1.50), p is the natural projection, and j is the inclusion f (X) ⊂ X′ . X
f
p
X/ f
X′ j
φ
f (X)
The map φ , called the factorization of f , is always a smooth bijection from X/ f , equipped with the quotient diffeology, to f (X), equipped with the subset diffeology. Then, saying that f is strict is equivalent to say that φ is a diffeomorphism. In other words, a strict smooth map identifies the quotient X/ f with the image f (X). PROOF. Since f is smooth and p is a subduction, we know that φ is smooth and, by construction, injective. We have just to express that φ −1 is smooth. Then, let P : U → f (X) be a plot, that is, a plot P of X′ with values in f (X) (art. 1.33). The parametrization φ −1 ◦ P is a plot of X/ f if and only if φ −1 ◦ P lifts locally along the projection p, at every point r of U (art. 1.46). Thus, φ −1 is smooth if and only if,
38
1. DIFFEOLOGY AND DIFFEOLOGICAL SPACES
for all r in U there exist an open neighborhood V of r and a plot Q : V → X, such that p ◦ Q = φ −1 ◦ P ↾ V, i.e. φ ◦ p ◦ Q = P ↾ V, that is, f ◦ Q = P ↾ V. □ Exercises
✎ EXERCISE 29 (Quotients of discrete or coarse spaces). Check that any quotient of any discrete diffeological space (art. 1.20) is discrete. As well, any quotient of any coarse space is coarse.
✎ EXERCISE 30 (Examples of quotients). Give a few examples, encountered in the previous exercises, of diffeological quotients.
✎ EXERCISE 31 (The irrational solenoid). The following example of the irrational
solenoid, or Kronecker flow, mixes inductions and subductions. Let T2 be the 2torus, defined as the quotient space of R2 by the subgroup Z2 . In other words, two points (x, y) and (x ′ , y ′ ) of R2 are equivalent if there exist two integers n and m such that x ′ = x + n and y ′ = y + m. 1) Check that the map q : (x, y) 7→ (p(x), p( y)), with p(t) = (cos(2π t), sin(2π t)), from R2 to R2 × R2 , is strict (art. 1.54), and identifies R2 /Z2 with S1 × S1 ⊂ R2 × R2 . 2) Let ∆ α ⊂ R2 be the line {(x, α x)  x ∈ R}, with α ∈ R−Q. Let Sα = q(∆ α ) ⊂ S1 ×S1 . The subspace Sα is the irrational solenoid with slope α. Show that qα = q ↾ ∆ α is an induction, and thus that Sα ⊂ S1 × S1 is diffeomorphic to R. 3) Consider the space S1 × S1 as a group, after identification with R2 /Z2 , for the operation inherited from the addition in R2 . Note that Sα is a subgroup. Show that the quotient (S1 × S1 )/Sα is diffeomorphic to the irrational torus Tα defined in Exercise 4, p. 10.
✎ EXERCISE 32 (A minimal powerset diffeology). Exhibit, for all diffeological
spaces X, a diffeology of the powerset P(X), that induces for any equivalence relation ∼ defined on X, the quotient diffeology on X/∼. Let us recall that the canonical projection class : X → P(X) is defined by class(x) = {x ′ ∈ X  x ′ ∼ x}, and that X/∼ = class(X) ⊂ P(X).
✎ EXERCISE 33 (Universal construction). Let X be a diffeological space, and let D be its diffeology. Let N be the diffeological sum (art. 1.39) a N = def(P) = {(P, r)  P ∈ D, and r ∈ def(P)}, P∈D
where the domains of the plots are equipped with the standard diffeology. 1) Check that the map ev : N → X defined by ev(P, r) = P(r) is a subduction. In other words, show that X is equivalent to the quotient N /ev.
PRODUCTS OF DIFFEOLOGICAL SPACES
39
2) Is the subset of N made up of the 0plots a smooth section? NOTE. In other words, every diffeological space is the quotient of the union of some real domains by some equivalence relation. The set N defined above is called the Nebula of the diffeology D; see (art. 1.76). This exercise shows the important role played by the two operations, sum and quotient, in diffeology.
✎ EXERCISE 34 (Strict action of SO(3) on R3 ). Let us consider the space R3 , equipped with smooth diffeology. Let SO(3) be the group of all 3 × 3 real matrices M such that M t M = 1, where M t is the transposed matrix of M, and det(M) = +1. The group SO(3) is a part of the real space R9 , each matrix M is defined by its P3 nine components M i j , M = i, j=1 M i j ei j , where ei j is the matrix with a 1 at the line i and the column j and 0 elsewhere. The group SO(3) is equipped with the subset diffeology of R9 . Let X be some point of R3 , show that the orbit map R(X) : SO(3) → R3 , with R(X)(M) = MX, is strict (art. 1.54). Products of Diffeological Spaces As well as for direct sums of spaces (art. 1.39), the category {Diffeology} is closed for products. In other words, there exists a natural diffeology, called the product diffeology, on the product of every family of diffeological spaces. We give here its definition (art. 1.55), and then we describe some related constructions. Reminder. First of all, let us recall the formal construction of the product for any family of sets [Bou72]. Let E = {E i }i∈I be an arbitrary family of sets, I being any set of indices. The set I can be the set E itself, in this case one says that the family is selfindexed. The product of the elements of the family E is the set of all the maps σ which associate with each index i ∈ I some element σ (i) ∈ E i . In other ` words, let i∈I E i be the sum of the elements of E , then a E i = {(i, e) ∈ I × ∪i∈I E i  e ∈ E i }. i∈I
` Let us denote by pr1 the projection from i∈I E i on the first factor: a pr1 : E i → I , with pr1 (i, e) = i. i∈I
The product of the members of the family E = {E i }i∈I is the set of all the sections of the projection pr1 , that is, Y a E i = {s : I → E i  pr1 ◦ s = 1I }. i∈I
i∈I
For any index i ∈ I , we denote by πi the natural projection Y πi : E i → E i , with πi (s) = pr2 (s(i)), i∈I
40
1. DIFFEOLOGY AND DIFFEOLOGICAL SPACES
` where pr2 : (i, e) 7→ e is the projection from i∈I E i onto the second factor. In other words, πi (s) = e if and only if s(i) = (i, e). For the sake of simplicity, we shall Q Q denote sometimes the product i∈I E i by E . Note that, if the set of indices I is Q finite, I = {1, . . . , N}, then the product i∈I E i is denoted by E1 × · · · × EN . 1.55. Building products with spaces. Let {X i }i∈I be a family of diffeological spaces, indexed by some set I . Let us denote by Di , i ∈ I , their diffeologies. Then, there exists on the product Y X= Xi i∈I
a coarsest diffeology D such that, for each index i ∈ I , the projection πi : Q i∈I X i → X i is smooth. This diffeology is called the product diffeology of the family {Di }i∈I . The set X, equipped with the product diffeology, is called the diffeological product, or simply the product, of the X i . NOTE. The product diffeology D is the intersection, over all indices i ∈ I , of the pullbacks by the projection πi of the diffeologies Di . D=
\
πi∗ (Di ).
i∈I
Q The plots for the product diffeology are the parametrizations P : U → i∈I X i such that, for each i ∈ I , the parametrization πi ◦ P is a plot of X i . In other words, a Q plot P : U → i∈I X i is a family {Pi : U → X i }i∈I such that Pi ∈ Di , for all i ∈ I . In particular, if I is a finite set of indices, I = {1, . . . , N}, then the plot P is an Ntuple (P1 , . . . , PN ), with Pi ∈ Di . Q PROOF. For each i ∈ I , there exists a coarsest diffeology of i∈I X i such that the projection πi is smooth, it is the pullback πi∗ (Di ) (art. 1.26). Then, the coarsest diffeology such that πi is smooth, for any i ∈ I , contains at least the intersection of all these pullbacks. But the intersection of any family of diffeologies is a diffeology (art. 1.22), and this intersection is the infimum of all the diffeologies containing the πi∗ (Di ). This infimum is clearly a minimum for the property in question. Therefore, T the diffeology product is just the intersection D = i∈I πi∗ (Di ). Now, the condition for P to be a plot of X, stated in the proposition, is clearly necessary. It just means that each projection is smooth. The three axioms of diffeology (art. 1.5) for this set of parametrizations are inherited from the diffeology of each element of the family {X i }i∈I . Thus, this condition defines a diffeology D on X such that each projection πi is smooth. On the other hand, every other diffeology for which each projection πi is smooth satisfies this condition, so it is contained in D. Therefore, this diffeology D is indeed the product diffeology. □
FUNCTIONAL DIFFEOLOGY
41
Q 1.56. Projections on factors are subductions. Let X = i∈I X i be the diffeological product of some family {X i }i∈I of diffeological spaces. Every projection πi : X → X i (art. 1.55) onto each factor is a subduction (art. 1.46). PROOF. Let P : U → X k be a plot. For every index i ̸= k, let x i be a point of X i . The parametrization P : U → X defined by P(r) = [i 7→ (i, x i ) if i ̸= k, and (k, P(r)) for i = k] is a lift of P, that is, πk ◦ P = P. Hence πk is a subduction, according to the characterization of the plots of a subduction (art. 1.46). Remark that the construction of P uses the axiom of choice of the theory of sets. But, from the very beginning of the diffeology theory, this axiom has been implicit. □ Exercises
✎ EXERCISE 35 (ProductsQand discrete diffeology). Check that for the discrete diffeology on the product i∈I X i (art. 1.55), the projections πi are smooth. Link that remark to the discussion of (art. 1.25). In the same spirit, comment on the definition of the sum diffeology (art. 1.39). ✎ EXERCISE 36 (Products of coarse or discrete spaces). Check that any product of coarse spaces is coarse. Show directly that finite products of discrete spaces are discrete. Using the result of the Exercise 7, p. 16, show that actually every product of discrete spaces is discrete.
✎ EXERCISE 37 (Infinite product of R over R). Describe the sum diffeology of an infinite number of copies of R indexed by R. Describe then the product diffeology of an infinite number of copies of R indexed by R.
✎ EXERCISE 38 (Graphs of smooth maps). Let X and X′ be two diffeological spaces, and let f : X → X′ be any map. Let us denote by Gr( f ) ⊂ X × X′ the graph of f , that is, the subset of pairs (x, f (x)) ∈ X × X′ , where x runs over X, equipped with the subset diffeology of the product diffeology. Show that f is smooth if and only if the first projection prX : (x, x ′ ) 7→ x, restricted to Gr( f ), is a subduction (art. 1.46).
✎ EXERCISE 39 (The 2torus). Check that the diffeology of S1 × S1 described in
Exercise 31, p. 38 is the product diffeology of S1 by S1 . Functional Diffeology
A special and remarkable feature of diffeology is that the set of the smooth maps between two diffeological spaces X and X′ carries a natural diffeology, called the functional diffeology. This diffeology is used intensively everywhere, in the theory of diffeological spaces: in homotopy theory, for fiber bundles, in Cartan’s differential calculus, etc. To be more precise, C ∞ (X, X′ ) carries a whole family of functional diffeologies, all
42
1. DIFFEOLOGY AND DIFFEOLOGICAL SPACES
those such that the evaluation map ev : ( f , x) 7→ f (x) is smooth (art. 1.57). But if some of them are however interesting, for example the compact controlled diffeology (art. 1.65), the supremum of this family, that is, the standard functional diffeology, is the most used. Equipped with this functional diffeology, the category of diffeological spaces is Cartesian closed. 1.57. Functional diffeologies. Let X and X′ be two diffeological spaces, and let C ∞ (X, X′ ) be the set of smooth maps from X to X′ (art. 1.14). Let ev be the evaluation map, defined by ev : C ∞ (X, X′ ) × X → X′ , and ev( f , x) = f (x). We shall call functional diffeology any diffeology of C ∞ (X, X′ ) such that the map ev is smooth. Note that the discrete diffeology is a functional diffeology. But there exists a coarsest functional diffeology on C ∞ (X, X′ ); we shall call it the standard functional diffeology, or simply the functional diffeology, when there is no risk of confusion. Actually, the plots of this diffeology are explicitly given by the following condition: (♣) A parametrization P : U → C ∞ (X, X′ ) is a plot for the standard functional diffeology if and only if the map (r, x) 7→ P(r)(x) is smooth. That means that, for every plot Q : V → X, P · Q : (r, s) 7→ P(r)(Q(s)) is a plot of X′ . PROOF. First of all, let us consider the set C ∞ (X, X′ ) equipped with the discrete diffeology. A plot of the product C ∞ (X, X′ ) × X is some parametrization r 7→ ( f , x) such that r 7→ f is locally constant (art. 1.20) and r 7→ x is a plot of X. Hence, the parametrization r 7→ f (x) is a plot of X′ by the very definition of smooth maps (art. 1.14). Therefore, the set of functional diffeologies is not empty, and the discrete diffeology is a functional diffeology. Let us check the equivalence of conditions in (♣). If (r, x) 7→ P(r)(x) is smooth, then, for every plot s 7→ Q(s) in X, the parametrization (r, s) 7→ (r, Q(s)) 7→ P(r)(Q(s)) is the composite of smooth maps, thus a plot of X′ . Conversely, let us assume that P × Q is smooth for every plot Q of X. Let s 7→ (r(s), Q(s)) be a plot of U × X, then [s 7→ P(r(s))(Q(s))] = [s 7→ (r(s), s) 7→ P(r(s))(Q(s))] is the composite of smooth maps, thus (r, x) 7→ P(r)(x) is smooth. D1. This is equivalent to the fact that the discrete diffeology of C ∞ (X, X′ ) is a functional diffeology (art. 1.57). D2. Let P : U → C ∞ (X, X′ ) be a parametrization satisfying locally (♣); that is, for every r ∈ U, there exists an open neighborhood W of s such that for every plot Q : V → X, the parametrization (P ↾ W) · Q : W × V → X′ is a plot. Hence, the parametrization P · Q is locally a plot of X′ . Therefore, P · Q is a plot of X′ and the parametrization P satisfies (♣).
FUNCTIONAL DIFFEOLOGY
43
D3. Let P : U → C ∞ (X, X′ ) be a parametrization satisfying (♣), and F : W → U be a smooth parametrization. Let Q : V → X be a plot. The parametrization (P ◦ F) · Q : (t, s) → P(F(t)(Q(s)) decomposes into (t, s) 7→ (F(t), s) 7→ P(F(t))(Q(s)). Now, (P ◦ F) · Q is the composite of two smooth maps. Thus, (P ◦ F) · Q is smooth. Therefore, P ◦ F satisfies (♣). Hence, the condition (♣) defines a diffeology on C ∞ (X, X′ ). For this diffeology, the map ev is smooth. Indeed, let P × Q : r 7→ (P(r), Q(r)) be a plot of C ∞ (X, X′ ) × X. Then, ev ◦ (P × Q) = P · Q = [r 7→ P(r)(Q(r))] is a plot of X′ , by the very definition of the plot P. Now, let us show that every diffeology of C ∞ (X, X′ ) such that ev is smooth satisfies (♣). Since the map ev is smooth, for every plot P × Q : r 7→ (P(r), Q(r)) of C ∞ (X, X′ ) × X, the map P · Q : r 7→ P(r)(Q(r)) is a plot of X′ . Let P : U → C ∞ (X, X′ ) and Q : V → X be two plots. The parametrizations P′ : (r, s) 7→ P(r) and Q′ : (r, s) 7→ Q(s), defined on U × V, are two plots. Thus, the parametrization P′ · Q′ : (r, s) 7→ P′ (r, s)(Q′ (r, s)) is a plot of X′ . But, P′ (r, s)(Q′ (r, s)) = P(r)(Q(s)). Hence, P satisfies (♣). Thus, every diffeology of C ∞ (X, X′ ) such that ev is smooth is contained in the diffeology defined by (♣). Therefore, this is the coarsest diffeology such that ev is smooth. □ 1.58. Restriction of the functional diffeology. Let X and X′ be two diffeological spaces. Let C ∞ (X, X′ ) be the set of smooth maps from X to X′ . Every subset M ⊂ C ∞ (X, X′ ) inherits the functional diffeology (art. 1.33). The map evM = ev ↾ (M × X) remains smooth, since it is the composition of a smooth map with an induction. The subset functional diffeology of M is still the coarsest diffeology of M such that evM is smooth (art. 1.57). This subset diffeology will be called again the functional diffeology of M . NOTE. As an example of such restriction, we can think of the subset of 2π periodical smooth maps from R to R, which inherits the functional diffeology. 1.59. The composition is smooth. Let X, X′ and X′′ be three diffeological spaces. Let C ∞ (X, X′ ), C ∞ (X′ , X′′ ) and C ∞ (X, X′′ ) be equipped with the standard functional diffeology (art. 1.57), and C ∞ (X, X′ ) × C ∞ (X′ , X′′ ) with the product diffeology (art. 1.55). Then, the composition map is smooth: ◦ : C ∞ (X, X′ ) × C ∞ (X′ , X′′ ) → C ∞ (X, X′′ ), with ◦ ( f , g) = g ◦ f . NOTE. This property, satisfied by the smooth maps between manifolds, was at the origin of Souriau’s theory of groupes différentiels [Sou80], which then led to the introduction of diffeology. 1.60. Functional diffeology and products. Let X, X′ and X′′ be three diffeological spaces. Let X × X′ be equipped with the product diffeology (art. 1.55).
44
1. DIFFEOLOGY AND DIFFEOLOGICAL SPACES
Let C ∞ (X′ , X′′ ), C ∞ (X × X′ , X′′ ), and C ∞ (X, C ∞ (X′ , X′′ )) be equipped with the functional diffeology. The spaces C ∞ (X, C ∞ (X′ , X′′ )) and C ∞ (X × X′ , X′′ ) are diffeomorphic. The diffeomorphism ϕ consists in the game of parentheses,
ϕ( f ) : (x, x ′ ) 7→ f (x)(x ′ ), for all f ∈ C ∞ (X, C ∞ (X′ , X′′ )). We say that the category {Diffeology} is Cartesian closed. PROOF. First of all, let us check that f = ϕ( f ) ∈ C ∞ (X × X′ , X′′ ). Since f ∈ C ∞ (X, C ∞ (X′ , X′′ )), for every plot Q of X, r 7→ f (Q(r)) is a plot of C ∞ (X′ , X′′ ), which means that for every plot Q′ of X′ , (r, s) 7→ f (Q(r))(Q′ (s)) is a plot of X′′ . But this implies that, for every plot (Q, Q′ ) of X × X′ , r 7→ f (Q(r), Q′ (r)) = f (Q(r))(Q′ (r)) is a plot of X′′ . Then, f = ϕ( f ) is smooth, that is, belongs to C ∞ (X × X′ , X′′ ). Now let us remark that ϕ is bijective, since f (x, x ′ ) = f (x)(x ′ ) is just a game of parentheses. Now, let us prove that ϕ is smooth. Let P be a plot of C ∞ (X, C ∞ (X′ , X′′ )), that is, a parametrization such that for every plot Q of X, the parametrization (r, s) 7→ P(r)(Q(s)) is a plot of C ∞ (X, X′ ). This means that for every plot Q′ of X′ the parametrization (r, s, s′ ) 7→ P(r)(Q(s))(Q′ (s′ )) is a plot of X′′ . But this is equivalent to the fact that, for every plot Q × Q′ of X × X′ , the parametrization (r, s, s′ ) 7→ ϕ(P(r))(Q(s), Q′ (s′ )) is a plot of X′′ . Hence, ϕ ◦ P is a plot of C ∞ (X × X′ , X′′ ). Therefore, ϕ is smooth. Since what we have said is completely reversible, that proves that ϕ is a diffeomorphism. □ 1.61. Functional diffeology on diffeomorphisms. Let X be a diffeological space. The group Diff(X), as well as any of its subgroups, inherits the functional diffeology of C ∞ (X, X). Note that the structure of diffeological group (art. 7.1) of Diff(X) is finer. It is the coarsest group diffeology such that the evaluation map is smooth (art. 1.57). A parametrization P of Diff(X) is a plot of the standard diffeology of group of diffeomorphisms if r 7→ P(r) and r → P(r)−1 are plots for the functional diffeology. 8 1.62. Slipping X into C ∞ (C ∞ (X, X), X). Let X be a diffeological space. Let us associate with every x ∈ X the xevaluation map x : C ∞ (X, X) → X, with x : f 7→ f (x). By definition of the functional diffeology (art. 1.57), the map x is smooth, that is, x ∈ C ∞ (C ∞ (X, X), X). Moreover, the map j : x 7→ x is an induction from X into 8For a manifold (art. 4.1), the second condition, r → P(r)−1 smooth, is the consequence of the first one, thanks to the implicit function theorem. For arbitrary diffeological spaces, this may not happen and that is why this condition is added.
FUNCTIONAL DIFFEOLOGY
45
C ∞ (C ∞ (X, X), X). We shall see further that j is stronger than an induction: it is also an embedding (art. 2.13). PROOF. First of all, applying this definition to the identity f = 1X , we get the injectivity of j, x (1X ) = x ′ (1X ) ⇒ x = x ′ . Now, let us check that j is smooth. Let Q be a plot of X. The parametrization j ◦ Q is a plot of C ∞ (C ∞ (X, X), X) if and only if, for every plot P of C ∞ (X, X), the map (r, s) 7→ ( j ◦ Q(r))(P(s)) is a plot of X. But, by definition, ( j ◦ Q(r))(P(s)) = P(s)(Q(r)), and to be a plot of C ∞ (X, X) means precisely that, for every plot Q of X, the parametrization (r, s) 7→ P(r)(Q(s)) is a plot of X (art. 1.57). Thus, j is smooth. Finally, let us check that the pullback of the diffeology of C ∞ (C ∞ (X, X), X) by j is finer than the diffeology of X. Let Q be a parametrization in X, such that j ◦ Q is a plot of C ∞ (C ∞ (X, X), X). Then (r, f ) 7→ f (Q(r)) is smooth. Restricting to f = 1X , r 7→ (r, 1X ) 7→ 1X (Q(r)) = Q(r), we conclude that Q is a plot of X. Therefore, by application of (art. 1.31), j is an induction. □ 1.63. Functional diffeology of a diffeology. Every diffeology, regarded as a set of smooth maps, carries a natural diffeology, which is a specialization of the functional diffeology (art. 1.57). Pick a diffeological space X and let D be its diffeology. The set of parametrizations P : U → D satisfying the following condition is a diffeology: (♦) For all r0 ∈ U, for all s0 ∈ def(P(r0 )), there exist an open neighborhood V ⊂ U of r0 and an open neighborhood W of s0 such that W ⊂ def(P(r)) for all r ∈ V, and (r, s) 7→ P(r)(s), defined on V × W, is a plot of X. About vocabulary, to avoid confusion it is sometimes preferable to say: smooth family of plots instead of plot of a diffeology, when diffeology is considered itself as a diffeological space. NOTE 1. A plot P of D takes locally its values in the set of plots of X with same dimension (art. 1.3). Also, the last condition writes again [r 7→ P(r) ↾ W] ↾ V ∈ C ∞ (V, C ∞ (W, X)). This is why this diffeology will be called the standard functional diffeology of D. It will be used later in some constructions. NOTE 2. In short, a parametrization P : U → D is a smooth family of nplots if and only if, the domain {(r, s)  s ∈ def(P(r))} of the evaluation map ev : (r, s) 7→ P(r)(s) is open in U × Rn , and ev is a plot of X. PROOF. For a constant parametrization P : s 7→ Q, with Q ∈ C ∞ (U, X), we can take W = U. Hence, the axiom D1 of diffeology is satisfied. The axiom D2 is satisfied by the very definition. Now, let P : U → D satisfy (♦), and let F : U′ → U be a smooth parametrization. Then, let r0′ ∈ U′ and r0 = F(r0′ ). Let V be an open neighborhood of r0 ∈ U satisfying (♦), and let V′ = F−1 (V). Then, V′ is a domain satisfying (♦),
46
1. DIFFEOLOGY AND DIFFEOLOGICAL SPACES
with the same W. Thus, the axiom D3 is satisfied, and (♦) defines a diffeology on the set D. □ 1.64. Iterating paths. Functional diffeology is heavily used in the theory of homotopy of diffeological spaces (Chapter 5), in particular through the following construction of the iterated spaces of paths. Let X be a diffeological space. The space of paths in X, denoted by Paths(X), is defined by Paths(X) = C ∞ (R, X). Now, let us define the following recurrence, Paths0 (X) = X, and Pathsk (X) = Paths(Pathsk−1 (X)), for all k > 0. Said differently, Paths1 (X) = Paths(X), Paths2 (X) = Paths(Paths(X)), etc. The spaces Pathsk (X) will be called 9 the iterated spaces of paths in X. For each integer k, Pathsk (X) is equipped with the functional diffeology. An element of Pathsk (X) is called a kpath in X. Let jk : σ 7→ σ be the map defined, for all integers k ≥ 0, from Pathsk (X) to Maps(Rk , X), by
σ : (x 1 , . . . , x k ) 7→ σ (x 1 ) · · · (x k ), for all σ ∈ Pathsk (X).
(♦)
Then, the map jk takes its values in C ∞ (Rk , X), and is a diffeomorphism from Pathsk (X) onto C ∞ (Rk , X). NOTE. The injection ιX : X → Paths(X) which associates with each point x the constant path x : t 7→ x is not just smooth but it is also an induction. Indeed, for any plot P : U → Paths(X) such that P(U) ⊂ ιX (X), ι−1 X ◦ P = [r 7→ P(r)(0)] is smooth. This is also clear for the iterated space of paths. PROOF. Let us prove the proposition for k = 0. In this case, the map j0 is given by x 7→ x = [0 7→ x], and maps Paths0 (X) = X in Maps(R0 , X). First of all, let us remark that every map from R0 = {0} to X is constant, hence smooth. Thus Maps(R0 , X) = C ∞ (R0 , X), and j0 : X → C ∞ (R0 , X). Now, j0 is bijective, let us show that j0−1 is smooth. Let P : U → X be a plot, j0 ◦ P : r 7→ [0 7→ P(r)] and Q : V → R0 be some plot. But Q is constant, Q(s) = 0, and P(r)(Q(s)) = P(r)(0) = P(r). Thus, (r, s) 7→ P(r)(Q(s)) = P(r) is a plot of X and j0 is smooth (art. 1.57). Conversely, let P : U → C ∞ (R0 , X) be a plot of the functional diffeology. Since the evaluation map is smooth (art. 1.57), the map j0−1 ◦ P = [r 7→ P(r)(0)] is smooth, and hence is a plot of X. Thus, j0−1 is smooth and j0 is a diffeomorphism from X to C ∞ (R0 , X), equipped with the functional diffeology. 9In reference to Chen’s paper Iterated paths integrals [Che77]; see also the Afterword.
FUNCTIONAL DIFFEOLOGY
47
Now, let us complete the proof by a recurrence. Let us assume the proposition is true for some k ≥ 0. Now Pathsk+1 (X) = Paths(Pathsk (X)) = C ∞ (R, Pathsk (X)) ≃ C ∞ (R, C ∞ (Rk , X)). But, thanks to (art. 1.60), C ∞ (R, C ∞ (Rk , X)) ≃ C ∞ (R × Rk , X). Hence, Pathsk+1 (X) ≃ C ∞ (Rk+1 , X). Thus, the proposition is true for k+1. □ 1.65. Compact controlled diffeology. Functional diffeology can be used as a formal framework for the variational calculus. Let us exemplify this claim by the simple classical problem of the extremals of the energy functional Z d γ (t) 1 E(γ ) = . ∥˙ γ (t)∥2 d t, with γ ∈ Paths(Rn ), and γ˙ (t) = 2 dt As we know, this integral does not converge in general, but we can avoid this difficulty by just changing the diffeology of the space of paths. Let us begin by computing informally the variation of this integral for a smooth 1parameter family of paths s 7→ γs , and let γ = γ0 . The variable s is supposed to belong to some open neighborhood of 0 ∈ R. We get · Z Z § ª · ∂ E(γs ) ∂ γ˙s (t) d ∂ γs (t) ˙ ˙ d t, = γ (t) , d t = γ (t) , ∂ s s=0 ∂ s s=0 dt ∂s s=0 which we can also write informally Z · d ∂ γs (t) dE(δγ ) = γ˙ (t) , δγ (t) d t, with δγ (t) = . dt ∂ s s=0
(•)
As usual in variational calculus, if we assume that the variation s 7→ γs is compactly supported, that is, if γs coincides with γ outside an interval [a, b], then the integral will converge since the variation δγ vanishes outside [a, b]. This consideration suggests we equip the space Paths(Rn ) with the compact diffeology, defined in Exercise 25, p. 29. But we need to differentiate under the integral sign, and with boundaries moving with the parameter s, this is a little bit uncomfortable. To secure the place, we introduce a new diffeology, finer than the compact diffeology. Let X and Y be two diffeological spaces. The parametrizations of the functional diffeology P : U → C ∞ (X, Y), satisfying the following condition, form the compact controlled diffeology [Igl87]. (♠) For all r0 ∈ U there exist an open neighborhood V of r0 and a Dcompact K of X such that, for all r ∈ V, P(r) and P(r0 ) coincide outside K. A Dcompact means a compact for the Dtopology (art. 2.8). There is a difference with Exercise 25, p. 29 : when r runs around r0 the compact diffeology implies that there exists a compact K r , a priori depending on r, such that P(r) and P(r0 ) coincide outside of K r . The compact controlled diffeology, as far as it is concerned, implies that we can find one large compact K matching the condition for all r belonging to some small open ball centered at r0 .
48
1. DIFFEOLOGY AND DIFFEOLOGICAL SPACES
Coming back to our problem, these are exactly the conditions of the variational calculus. Let P : U → Paths(Rn ) be an mplot for the compact controlled diffeology. Adjusting the above expression of the variation of the energy, denoted by dE(P) r (δ r), where r belongs to U and δ r is any vector of Rm , and after a classical integration by parts, we get Z b 2 § ª · d ∂ P(r)(t) P(r)(t) , d t, dE(P) r (δ r) = − ( δ r) d t2 ∂r a where [a, b] is some interval satisfying the condition (♠) for P in an open neighborhood of r. Now, this last expression of dE, mapping every plot P : U → Paths(Rn ) to the 1form dE(P) of U, is a well defined (closed) differential 1form of Paths(Rn ), for the compact controlled diffeology (art. 6.28) and gives to (•) its formal status. The critical points of the energy are the zeros of dE. In our very simple case, this 1form is indeed exact, but the choice of a primitive depends on an arbitrary constant on which dE does not depend. PROOF. The proof that (♠) defines a diffeology is a simple adaptation of the proof of Exercise 20, p. 24. □ Exercises
✎ EXERCISE 40 (The space of polynomials). Let us consider the space of polynomials with coefficients in Rm , and degree less or equal than n, Poln (R, Rm ) = {t 7→ x 0 + t x 1 + · · · + t n x n  t ∈ R, and x 0 , . . . , x n ∈ Rm }. 1) Show that, the map jn , defined from (Rm )n+1 to C ∞ (R, Rm ) by jn (x 0 , x 1 , . . . , x n ) = [t 7→ x 0 + t x 1 + · · · + t n x n ], where C ∞ (R, Rm ) is equipped with the functional diffeology (art. 1.57), is an induction. Conclude that Poln (R, Rm ), equipped with the functional diffeology, inherited from C ∞ (R, Rm ), is diffeomorphic to (Rm )n+1 . 2) Let ω ⊂ (Rm )n+1 be any domain. Show that there exists a subset Ω of C ∞ (R, Rm ) such that: (♦) Ω ∩ Poln (R, Rm ) = jn (ω); (♥) for every nplot P of C ∞ (R, Rm ), P−1 (Ω) is an ndomain. We say that the subset Poln (R, Rm ) is embedded in C ∞ (R, Rm ) (art. 2.13). NOTE. Polynomials are just defined by their coefficients. Since the coefficients belong to some vector space, we decide usually to carry arbitrarily the structure of (a power of) the vector space to the set of polynomials. But polynomials are, above
GENERATING FAMILIES
49
all, maps between vector spaces. This exercise shows that this smooth structure coincides with the functional diffeology of polynomials.
✎ EXERCISE 41 (A diffeology for the space of lines). Let PL(Rn ) be the set of
parametrized lines in Rn , defined as the set of all polynomials of Rn of degree strictly equal to 1, (see Exercise 40, p. 48). 1) Show that two lines f and g have the same images in Rn if and only if g(t) = f (at + b), where a and b are two real numbers, and a ̸= 0. 2) Check that 1) defines an action of the affine group of R, denoted by Aff(R), on PL(Rn ), that is, (a, b) : f 7→ [t 7→ f (at + b)]. 3) Let Aff+ (R) ⊂ Aff(R) be the group of direct affine transformations, the ones for which a > 0. Let then UL+ (Rn ) = PL(Rn )/Aff+ (R) be the set of oriented unparametrized lines, equipped with the quotient diffeology. Show that the space PL(Rn ) is diffeomorphic to Rn × (Rn − {0}); use the result of Exercise 40, p. 48. 4) Let ρ be the map (x 0 , x 1 ) 7→ (r, u) defined by r = x 0 − (x 0 · u) × u, with u =
x1 , ∥x 1 ∥
where the centered dot · denotes the ordinary scalar product in Rm , and ∥ ∗ ∥ denotes the associated norm. Show that ρ is a smooth section of the projection π : PL(Rn ) → UL+ (Rn ) (art. 1.53). Conclude that the space of oriented unparametrized lines UL+ (Rn ), equipped with the diffeology specified in 2), is diffeomorphic to the subspace TSn−1 ⊂ Rn × Rn defined by TSn−1 = {(u, r) ∈ Rn × Rn  ∥u∥ = 1, and u · r = 0}. Deduce that the space Lines(R2 ) of unparametrized and nonoriented lines of R2 is diffeomorphic to the Möbius strip, that is, the quotient of S1 × R by the equivalence relation (u, r) ∼ (−u, −r).
✎ EXERCISE 42 (A diffeology for the space of circles). Write down an exercise of the same type as Exercise 41, p. 49, for circles instead of lines. Generating Families The diffeologies can be built by generating families. Any family of parametrizations of a set generates a diffeology. Conversely, any diffeology is generated by some set of parametrizations (art. 1.66). This mode of construction of diffeologies is very useful since it can reduce the analysis of the properties of a diffeological space to a subset of its plots, sometimes smaller than the whole diffeology. This definition leads to the definition of the dimension of a diffeological space (art. 1.78), which is a first
50
1. DIFFEOLOGY AND DIFFEOLOGICAL SPACES
global invariant of the category {Diffeology}. But this construction also leads to the introduction of important subcategories of diffeological spaces, for example the category of manifolds (art. 4.7), or the category of orbifolds (art. 4.17), etc. 1.66. Generating diffeology. Let X be a set. Pick a set F of parametrizations of X, that is, F ⊂ Param(X). There exists a finest diffeology containing F , this diffeology will be called the diffeology generated by F and will be denoted by 〈 F 〉. Conversely, let X be a diffeological space and D be its diffeology. A family F of plots of X, which generates the diffeology D, will be called a generating family of the diffeology D, or a generating family for the space X. The set of all the generating families of the diffeology D will be denoted by Gen(D), or by Gen(X). Gen(D) = {F ⊂ D  〈 F 〉 = D}, Gen(X) = Gen(D). PROOF. The finest diffeology of a set X containing a family F of parametrizations is the intersection of all diffeologies containing F (art. 1.22). \ 〈F 〉 = D, with D = {D ∈ Diffeologies(X)  F ⊂ D}. (♦) D∈D
Note that the set D of all diffeologies containing F is not empty since it contains, at least, the coarse diffeology. □ 1.67. Generated by the empty family. Let X be a set, and let us consider the empty family F = ∅ as a subset of Param(X). The diffeology of X generated by the empty family (art. 1.66) is the discrete diffeology (art. 1.20), that is, the intersection of all diffeologies of X. Hence, considering the set X, 〈 ∅ 〉 = D◦ (X). 1.68. Criterion of generation. Let X be a set, and F be a family of parametrizations of X. The plots of the diffeology generated by F are characterized by the following property, illustrated in Figure 1.8. (♣) A parametrization P : U → X is a plot for the diffeology generated by a family F if and only if, for all r ∈ U, there exists an open neighborhood V of r such that either P ↾ V is a constant parametrization, or there exist a parametrization F : W → X belonging to F , and a smooth parametrization Q : V → W such that P ↾ V = F ◦ Q. Now, if the union of the images of the elements F of F covers X, that is, if X = S F∈F val(F) (we shall say that F is a parametrized cover of X), the criterion above is reduced to the following: (♠) A parametrization P : U → X is a plot for the diffeology generated by a parametrized cover F if and only if, for every point r in U, there exist an open neighborhood V of r, a parametrization F : W → X belonging to F , and a smooth parametrization Q : V → W such that P ↾ V = F ◦ Q.
GENERATING FAMILIES
51
W
F
Q
V U
P ! X
FIGURE 1.8. Smooth local lift of a parametrization.
A generating family F which is a parametrized cover will be called a covering generating family. The criterion above can be rephrased as follows: let F be a covering generating family for X, a parametrization P is a plot of X if and only if it ifts locally, at each point, along an element of F . PROOF. Let us check first, for the second case (♠), that the defined set of parametrizations of X is a diffeology (art. 1.5). Since F is a parametrized cover, the plots satisfying (♠) cover X (see Exercise 1, p. 8), and the covering axiom D1 is satisfied. The locality axiom D2 is satisfied by the very definition. Then, let P : U → X be a parametrization satisfying the condition (♠). Let ϕ : U′ → U be a smooth parametrization, where U′ is some domain. Let P′ = P ◦ ϕ, and r ′ ∈ U′ , let r = ϕ(r ′ ). Let F : W → X belonging to F , and Q : V → W such that F ◦ Q = P ↾ V, according to (♠). Now, F ◦ Q ◦ ϕ = (P ↾ V) ◦ ϕ = (P ◦ ϕ) ↾ V′ , where V′ = ϕ−1 (V). Thus, P′ ↾ V′ = F ◦ Q′ , with Q′ = Q ◦ ϕ. Therefore, P′ satisfies (♠) and the locality axiom D3 is satisfied. In the general case described by (♣) everything works as well as for (♠), except for D3, where there is something to check. If P is a constant parametrization defined on an open neighborhood V of r, then, ϕ being continuous, V′ = Q−1 (V) is an open neighborhood of r ′ , and P ◦ ϕ ↾ V′ = P ↾ V is constant. The axiom D3 is checked. Now, since (♠) is a special case of (♣), we consider only the case (♣). This property defines a diffeology containing F . By application of axioms D1 and D3 of diffeology, any other diffeology containing F contains either the constant parametrizations
52
1. DIFFEOLOGY AND DIFFEOLOGICAL SPACES
or the plots of the form F ◦ Q, where F ∈ F and Q is a smooth parametrization in the domain of F. Thus, the diffeology defined by (♣) is contained in any diffeology containing F . Hence, it is the finest diffeology containing F , that is, the diffeology generated by F . □ 1.69. Generating diffeology as projector. Let X be a set, and let D be a diffeology of X. Since the finest diffeology of X containing D is D itself, the diffeology generated by D (art. 1.66) is D. For all D ∈ Diffeologies(X), 〈 D 〉 = D. Thus, the construction of diffeologies by means of generating families can be interpreted as a projector from the set of all the subsets of Param(X) onto the set of all the diffeologies of X, which can written: 〈 − 〉 : P(Param(X)) → Diffeologies(X), and 〈 〈 − 〉 〉 = 〈 − 〉 . 1.70. Fineness and generating families. Let X be a set, and let F and F ′ be two families of parametrizations of X such that F ⊂ F ′ . The diffeology generated by F is finer than the diffeology generated by F ′ , F ⊂ F ′ implies 〈 F 〉 ⊂ 〈 F ′ 〉 . In other words, generating diffeologies by means of families of parametrizations is monotonic, relating to the partial ordering defined by inclusion. In particular, let X be a diffeological space. Let F be any family of plots of X, that is, a subset of the diffeology D of X. The diffeology generated by F is finer than the original D, F ⊂ D implies 〈 F 〉 ⊂ D. PROOF. The diffeology generated by F is the intersection of all the diffeologies D containing F , that is, \ 〈F 〉 = D, with D = {D ∈ Diffeologies(X)  F ⊂ D}. D∈D
Let us split the set D into the following two disjoint sets A and B : A = {D ∈ Diffeologies(X)  F ⊂ D, and F ′ ⊂ D}, B = {D ∈ Diffeologies(X)  F ⊂ D, and F ′ ̸⊂ D}. Thus, D = A ∪ B, and A ∩ B = ∅. Then, by associativity of the intersection, 〈 F 〉 is the intersection of the diffeologies belonging to A and the diffeologies belonging to B, that is, \ \ \ \ \ 〈F 〉 = D= D= D D . D∈D
D∈A ∪B
D∈A
D∈B
GENERATING FAMILIES
53
But since F ⊂ F ′ , any diffeology containing F ′ contains necessarily F , and the set A is just the set of all the diffeologies containing F ′ , A = {D ∈ Diffeologies(X)  F ′ ⊂ D}. Hence, \
′
′
D = 〈F 〉 ⇒ 〈F 〉 = 〈F 〉
D∈A
\ \
D .
D∈B ′
Therefore, 〈 F 〉 ⊂ 〈 F 〉, and the first part of the proposition is complete. Now, since 〈 D 〉 = D (art. 1.69), if F ′ = D is a diffeology, then 〈 F 〉 ⊂ D. □ 1.71. Adding and intersecting families. Let X be a set. Let F and F ′ be two families of parametrizations of X, then 〈 F ∪ F ′ 〉 = 〈 〈 F 〉 ∪ 〈 F ′ 〉 〉, and 〈 F ∩ F ′ 〉 ⊂ 〈 F 〉 ∩ 〈 F ′ 〉 . PROOF. Let us prove the first assertion. Let us check first that 〈 F ∪ F ′ 〉 ⊂ 〈 〈 F 〉 ∪ 〈 F ′ 〉 〉. Since F ⊂ 〈 F 〉 and F ′ ⊂ 〈 F ′ 〉, F ∪ F ′ ⊂ 〈 F 〉 ∪ 〈 F ′ 〉. By application of (art. 1.70) we get 〈 F ∪ F ′ 〉 ⊂ 〈 〈 F 〉 ∪ 〈 F ′ 〉 〉. Now, let us check that 〈 〈 F 〉 ∪ 〈 F ′ 〉 〉 ⊂ 〈 F ∪ F ′ 〉. Since F ⊂ F ∪ F ′ , 〈 F 〉 ⊂ 〈 F ∪ F ′ 〉 (art. 1.70), as well 〈 F ′ 〉 ⊂ 〈 F ∪ F ′ 〉. Thus, 〈 F 〉 ∪ 〈 F ′ 〉 ⊂ 〈 F ∪ F ′ 〉. Hence 〈 〈 F 〉 ∪ 〈 F ′ 〉 〉 ⊂ 〈 〈 F ∪ F ′ 〉 〉 = 〈 F ∪ F ′ 〉 (art. 1.69). Therefore, 〈 F ∪ F ′ 〉 = 〈 〈 F 〉 ∪ 〈 F ′ 〉 〉. Now concerning the second assertion, since F ∩ F ′ ⊂ F , 〈 F ∩ F ′ 〉 ⊂ 〈 F 〉 (art. 1.70). As well, F ∩ F ′ ⊂ F , and then 〈 F ∩ F ′ 〉 ⊂ 〈 F ′ 〉. Hence, 〈 F ∩ F ′ 〉 ⊂ 〈 F 〉 ∩ 〈 F ′ 〉. □ 1.72. Adding constants to generating family. Let X be a set, and let F be a family of parametrizations of X. Let X be some family of parametrizations generating the discrete diffeology, that is, 〈 X 〉 = D◦ (X), then 〈 F 〉 = 〈 X ∪ F 〉. Thus, it is always possible to add a family of parametrizations, generating the discrete diffeology, to a generating family, without altering the generated diffeology. For example, considering the criterion (art. 1.68), extending the family F by the constant parametrizations X = C ∞ (R0 , X) reduces the case (♣) to the case (♠). We may denote by F = C ∞ (R0 , X) ∪ F the extended family. PROOF. First of all, by (art. 1.70) we have 〈 F 〉 ⊂ 〈 X ∪ F 〉. Then, since the diffeology generated by X is the discrete diffeology, by (art. 1.71) we have 〈 X ∪ F 〉 = 〈 D◦ (X) ∪ 〈 F 〉 〉. But, since every diffeology contains the discrete diffeology, D◦ (X) ∪ 〈 F 〉 = 〈 F 〉, and 〈 X ∪ F 〉 = 〈 F 〉. □ 1.73. Lifting smooth maps along generating families. Let X and and X′ be two diffeological spaces. Let X be generated by a family F , and X′ by a family F ′ . A map f : X → X′ is smooth if and only if, for every element F : U → X of F , for
54
1. DIFFEOLOGY AND DIFFEOLOGICAL SPACES
every r ∈ U there exists an open neighborhood V ⊂ U of r, such that either f ◦ F ↾ V is constant, or there exist a parametrization F′ : U′ → X′ belonging to F ′ and a smooth parametrization ϕ : V → U′ such that f ◦ F ↾ V = F′ ◦ ϕ. The following commutative diagram summarizes this criterion: ϕ
U⊃V
F′
F
X
U′
f
X′
PROOF. Let us assume that f is smooth, for every plot P : U → X the map f ◦ P is a plot of X′ , in particular for P = F ∈ F . Then, according to (art. 1.68), since F ′ is a generating family of X′ , for every point r of U there exists an open neighborhood V of r such that either the parametrization f ◦ P ↾ V is constant or there exist an element F′ : U′ → X′ of F ′ , and a smooth parametrization ϕ : V → U′ , such that F′ ◦ ϕ = f ◦ F ↾ V. Conversely, let P : O → X be a plot, and let s be a point in O . Since F is a generating family for X, there exists an open neighborhood W of s such that either P ↾ W is constant — thus f ◦ P ↾ W is a constant parametrization, hence a plot of X′ — or there exist a plot F : U → X belonging to F and a smooth parametrization Q : W → U such that P ↾ W = F ◦ Q. In the second case, since F is an element of F , by assumption there exists an open neighborhood V of r = Q(s) such that either f ◦ F ↾ V is constant, or there exist an element F′ : U′ → X′ of F ′ and a smooth parametrization ϕ : V → U′ such that f ◦ F ↾ V = F′ ◦ ϕ. Now, let W′ = Q−1 (V) ∩ W, the point s belongs to W′ , and since Q is a smooth parametrization Q−1 (V) is a domain, but W is also a domain, hence W′ = Q−1 (V) ∩ W is a domain. Thus, P ↾ W′ is a parametrization in X, defined on a neighborhood of s. Now, in the first case, f ◦ P ↾ W′ = f ◦ F ◦ Q ↾ W′ is a constant parametrization, hence a plot of X′ . In the second case, f ◦ P ↾ W′ = f ◦ F ◦ Q ↾ W′ = F′ ◦ ϕ ◦ Q ↾ W′ . But, since F′ is a plot of X′ and ϕ and Q are smooth parametrizations, F′ ◦ ϕ ◦ Q is a plot of X′ . Finally, f ◦ P is locally a plot of X′ at each point s of O . Therefore, f ◦ P is a plot of X′ and then f is smooth. □ 1.74. Pushing forward families. Let X and X′ be two sets. Let F be a family of parametrizations of X, and let f : X → X′ be a map. We call pushforward of the family F by f , the family f∗ (F ) of parametrizations of X′ , defined by f∗ (F ) = { f ◦ F  F ∈ F } . Then, the diffeology generated by the pushforward of the family F by f is the pushforward by f of the diffeology generated by F (art. 1.43), that is, 〈 f∗ (F ) 〉 = f∗ (〈 F 〉).
GENERATING FAMILIES
55
Let X and X′ be two diffeological spaces, and f : X → X′ be a subduction (art. 1.46). The pushforward f∗ (F ) of a generating family F for X is a generating family for X′ . PROOF. Let us denote D = 〈 F 〉, F ′ = f∗ (F ) and D ′ = 〈 F ′ 〉. We want to show that f∗ (D) = D ′ . First of all, let us remark that, for X equipped with D and X′ equipped with D ′ , the map f is smooth. Indeed, let P : O → X be a plot of X, and let r be a point of O . Then, according to (art. 1.68), at least one of the two following possibilities occurs. Either there exists an open neighborhood V of r such that if the parametrization P ↾ V is constant, then f ◦ P ↾ V is constant, and f ◦ P ↾ V belongs to D ′ . Or there exists an open neighborhood V of r, an element F : U → X of F and a smooth parametrization Q : V → U such that P ↾ V = F ◦ Q. Thus, f ◦ P ↾ V = f ◦ F ◦ Q, but F′ = f ◦ F ∈ F ′ , hence f ◦ P ↾ V = F′ ◦ Q belongs to D ′ . In the two cases, f ◦ P is locally a plot of X′ at each point of O , thus f ◦ P is a plot of X′ . Therefore, f is smooth, and since f is smooth, f∗ (D) ⊂ D ′ (art. 1.44). Let us show now that D ′ ⊂ f∗ (D). Let P′ : O ′ → X′ be a plot of X′ , and let r ′ be a point of O ′ . Then, according to (art. 1.68), at least one of the two following possibilities occurs: Either there exists an open neighborhood V′ of r ′ such that the parametrization P′ ↾ V′ is constant, and then P′ ↾ V′ belongs to f∗ (D). Or there exists an open neighborhood V′ of r ′ , an element F′ : U′ → X′ of F ′ and a smooth parametrization Q′ : V′ → U′ such that P′ ↾ V′ = F′ ◦ Q′ . But F′ = f ◦ F, for some F ∈ F , thus P′ ↾ V′ = f ◦ F ◦ Q′ = f ◦ Q, with Q = F ◦ Q′ . Next, since Q ∈ D (art. 1.68), P′ ↾ V′ belongs to f∗ (D). In the two cases P′ is locally an element of □ f∗ (D) at each point of O ′ , thus P′ belongs to f∗ (D). Therefore, D ′ ⊂ f∗ (D). 1.75. Pulling back families. Let X and X′ be two sets. Let F ′ be a family of parametrizations of X′ , and let f : X → X′ be any map. Let us define the pullback of the family F ′ by f as the family f ∗ (F ′ ) of parametrizations F : U → X satisfying the following property: (♦) Either f ◦ F is constant or there exist an element F′ : U′ → X′ of F ′ and a smooth parametrization ϕ : U → U′ such that F′ ◦ ϕ = f ◦ F. Then, the diffeology generated by the pullback f ∗ (F ′ ) is the pullback by f of the diffeology generated by F ′ , that is, 〈 f ∗ (F ′ ) 〉 = f ∗ (〈 F ′ 〉). In particular, let X and X′ be two diffeological spaces, and let f : X → X′ be an induction (art. 1.29). The pullback f ∗ (F ′ ) of any generating family F ′ for X′ is a generating family for X. Unfortunately, compared with the pushforward of a family, the pullback of a small generating family may happen to be huge, almost as big as the diffeology itself; see Exercise 45, p. 57 and its consequences Exercise 51, p. 61.
56
1. DIFFEOLOGY AND DIFFEOLOGICAL SPACES
NOTE. Concerning diffeologies, the choice of a generating family is relatively arbitrary. For example, the empty family is equivalent to the family of constant parametrizations. If the family F ′ is empty, its pullback is not empty, but is the set of the parametrizations of X with values in the preimages of points f −1 (x ′ ), x ′ ∈ X′ . This must not surprise us since the pullback of the discrete diffeology is the sum of the preimages of points, equipped with the coarse diffeology. PROOF. Let F = f ∗ (F ′ ), D = 〈 F 〉, and D ′ = 〈 F ′ 〉. We want to check that D = f ∗ (D ′ ). First of all, let us notice that, for X equipped with D and X′ equipped with D ′ , the map f is smooth. Indeed, let P : O → X be a plot and r0 ∈ O . According to (art. 1.68), there exists an open neighborhood V of r0 such that either P ↾ V is constant or there exist F ∈ F and ψ ∈ C ∞ (V, def(F)) such that F ◦ ψ = P ↾ V. In the first case f ◦ (P ↾ V) is constant, thus f ◦ (P ↾ V) is a plot of X′ . In the second case, according to the definition of F = f ∗ (F ′ ), either f ◦ F is constant or there exist F′ ∈ F ′ and ϕ ∈ C ∞ (def(F), def(F′ )) such that F′ ◦ ϕ = f ◦ F. If f ◦ F is constant, so is f ◦ F ◦ ψ = f ◦ (P ↾ V), then f ◦ (P ↾ V) is a plot of X′ . If F′ ◦ ϕ = f ◦ F, then f ◦ (P ↾ V) = f ◦ F ◦ ψ = F′ ◦ ϕ ◦ ψ, and f ◦ (P ↾ V) is a plot of X′ . Therefore, f ◦ P is a plot of X′ (axiom of locality) and f is smooth, that gives D ⊂ f ∗ (D ′ ) (art. 1.27) and thus 〈 f ∗ (F ′ ) 〉 ⊂ f ∗ (〈 F ′ 〉). Let us show next that f ∗ (D ′ ) ⊂ D. Let P : O → X be an element of f ∗ (D ′ ), that is, f ◦ P ∈ D ′ . Let r0 ∈ O , according to (art. 1.68) there exists an open neighborhood V of r0 such that either f ◦ P ↾ V is constant or there exist a parametrization F ′ : U′ → X′ belonging to F ′ , and a smooth parametrization ϕ : V → U′ such that f ◦ P ↾ V = F′ ◦ ϕ. Let F = P ↾ V. We have just said that either f ◦ F is constant or f ◦ F = F′ ◦ ϕ. But this is exactly the definition (♦) of the elements of the pullback f ∗ (F ′ ) = F . Hence, P is locally an element of F at each point of O . Hence, P is an element of D. Therefore, f ∗ (D ′ ) ⊂ D. □ 1.76. Nebula of a generating family. Let X be a diffeological space, and let F be a generating family for X (art. 1.66). Let us assume that F is a parametrized cover of X (art. 1.68). Note that if it is not the case, we can always add the constants C ∞ (R0 , X) to F and then consider the extended generating family F = C ∞ (R0 , X) ∪ F (art. 1.72). We call nebula of the generating family F the diffeological sum (art. 1.39) of the domains of the elements of F , where the domains of the elements of F are equipped with the standard diffeology, that is, a Nebula(F ) = def(F) = {(F, r)  F ∈ F , and r ∈ def(F)} . F∈F
Then, the natural evaluation map, denoted by evF and defined by evF : Nebula(F ) → X, with evF (F, r) = F(r),
GENERATING FAMILIES
57
is a subduction. Therefore, the space X can be regarded as the quotient space Nebula(F )/evF (art. 1.50). Now, let us define a nebula over X as any diffeological sum N of real domains together with a subduction π : N → X. Then, the nebula of any generating family F of X, together with evF , is a nebula over X. Conversely, every nebula over X is the nebula of a generating family of X. The nebula associated with the diffeology D of X is the maximal nebula of X, every other nebula is some of its subspaces. NOTE. This construction shows that every finite dimensional diffeological space X (art. 1.78) is equivalent to the quotient of a manifold, maybe with variable dimension; see (art. 4.1) and (art. 4.7, note 2). Indeed, if dim(X) = n < ∞, there exists a generating family F made up of plots with dimensions less than or equal to n, and Nebula(F ) is clearly a manifold, in a broad sense. ` PROOF. Let us show that evF is smooth. Let Q : O → F∈F def(F) be a plot of the nebula. By definition of the sum diffeology (art. 1.39), for every r in O , there exist an open neighborhood V of r and an element F : U → X of F , such that Q ↾ V is a smooth parametrization in U. Now, evF ◦ Q ↾ V = F ◦ Q ↾ V, but since F is a plot of X and Q is a smooth parametrization in its domain, F ◦ Q ↾ V is a plot of X. Thus, evF ◦ Q is locally, at each point of O , a plot of X, thus evF ◦ Q is a plot of X, and evF is smooth. Now, let P : O → X be a plot of X and r be a point of O . Since F is a generating family for X, there exist an open neighborhood V of r, an element F : U → X of F , and a smooth parametrization Q : V → U such that P ↾ V = F ◦ Q ` (art. 1.68). But Q′ : r 7→ (F, Q(r)), defined on V, is a plot of F∈F def(F), and P ↾ V = evF ◦ Q′ . Thus, the plot P lifts locally at each point of its domain along evF . Therefore, evF is a subduction (art. 1.48). ` Now, let N be a nebula over X. By definition N = i∈I Ui , for some family of indices I , where {Ui }i∈I is a family of domains, and π : N → X is some subduction. Then, let us define the family of parametrizations F = {Fi = π ↾ Ui }i∈I . Since π is smooth, the parametrizations are plots of X, and since π is a subduction, F is a generating family for X (cf. the first part of the proof), thus N = Nebula(F ). Therefore, every nebula over X is the nebula of a generating family. □ Exercises
✎ EXERCISE 43 (Generating tori). Exhibit a minimal generating family for S1 defined in (art. 1.11), for the irrational torus Tα defined in Exercise 4, p. 10, and for R/Q, Exercise 5, p. 11. families). Let X be a diffeological space. ✎ EXERCISE 44 (Global plots as generating S Show that the set of global plots P =
n∈N C
∞
(Rn , X) is a generating family.
58
1. DIFFEOLOGY AND DIFFEOLOGICAL SPACES
✎ EXERCISE 45 (Generating the halfline). Consider [0, ∞[ ⊂ R equipped with the subset diffeology inherited from the standard diffeology of R (art. 1.33). Let F be the generating family of R reduced to the identity, F = {1R }. Show that the pullback of the generating family F by the inclusion j : [0, ∞[ → R (art. 1.75) is the whole diffeology of [0, ∞[.
✎ EXERCISE 46 (Generating the sphere). Let us consider the constructions and
notations of Exercise 18, p. 24. For each point x of Sn , let us choose, once and for all, an orthonormal basis (u1 , . . . , un ) of E = x ⊥ . Let B be the open unit ball centered at 0 ∈ Rn . Let F : B → Sn be the parametrization defined by F(s1 , . . . , sn ) = Pn f i=1 si ui , where f is defined in that exercise by (♦). Show that the set of such F, when x runs over Sn , is a generating family for Sn .
✎ EXERCISE 47 (When the intersection is empty). Let us consider the two families
F = {x 7→ x} and F ′ = {x 7→ 2x} of parametrizations in R. Check that 〈 F ∩ F ′ 〉 = D◦ (R) and 〈 F 〉 ∩ 〈 F ′ 〉 = C⋆∞ (R). Conclude that if generally 〈 F ∩ F ′ 〉 ⊂ 〈 F 〉 ∩ 〈 F ′ 〉, it is not true that 〈 F ∩ F ′ 〉 = 〈 F 〉 ∩ 〈 F ′ 〉. Dimension of Diffeological Spaces
The first numerical invariant of a diffeological space is its dimension. The global dimension of a diffeological space, introduced in this section, has a refinement given further in (art. 2.22), the dimension map of a diffeological space. 1.77. Dimension of a family of parametrizations. Let X be a set, and let F be some nonempty family of parametrizations of X. We define the dimension of F as the supremum of the dimensions of its elements (art. 1.3), that is, dim(F ) = sup{dim(F)  F ∈ F }. By convention we admit that for the empty family dim(∅) = −1, as well as for the family reduced to the empty parametrization. On the other hand, if the dimension of the elements of F is unbounded, that is, if for all n ∈ N there exists an element F of F such that dim(F) = n, we agree that the dimension of F is infinite and we denote dim(F ) = ∞. 1.78. Dimension of a diffeological space. Let X be a diffeological space, and let D be its diffeology. We shall call dimension of X the infimum of the dimensions of the generating families of D, dim(X) = inf dim(F ) = inf {dim(F )  F ⊂ D, and 〈F 〉 = D} . 〈 F 〉=D
If the diffeology D has no generating family with finite dimension, the dimension of X will be said to be infinite, and we shall denote dim(X) = ∞.
DIMENSION OF DIFFEOLOGICAL SPACES
59
1.79. The dimension is a diffeological invariant. Let X and X′ be two diffeological spaces. If they are diffeomorphic, then they have the same dimension. PROOF. Let f : X → X′ be a diffeomorphism. Let F be a generating family for X. Clearly, f ◦ F = { f ◦ F  F ∈ F } is a generating family for X′ (art. 1.74). Conversely, let F ′ be a generating family of X′ , then f −1 ◦ F ′ is a generating family of X. The generating families of X and X′ are conjugated by f , therefore dim(X) = dim(X′ ). □ 1.80. Dimension of real domains. The diffeological dimension of a (nonempty) ndomain U, equipped with the standard diffeology (art. 1.9), is n. For real domains, the diffeological dimension coincides with the usual dimension: for all U ∈ Domains(Rn ), dim(U) = n. PROOF. The singleton {1U : U → U} is a generating family of U, hence dim(1U ) = dim(U) ≤ n. Now, let us assume that there exists a generating family F of U such that dim(F ) < n. Then, for every r ∈ U there exist an open neighborhood V of r, an element F : W → U of F , that is, F ∈ C ∞ (W, U) — since F needs to factorize through the identity 1U — and a smooth map Q : V → W such that 1U ↾ V = 1V = F ◦ Q. But dim(F ) < n implies that dim(F) = dim(W) < n. Now, the rank of the linear tangent map D(F ◦ Q) is less or equal to dim(W) < n, but D(F ◦ Q) = D(1V ) = 1Rn , thus rank(D(F ◦ Q)) = rank(1Rn ) = n. Therefore, there is no generating family F of U with dim(F ) < n, and dim(U) = n. □ 1.81. Dimension zero spaces are discrete. The dimension of a diffeological space is zero if and only if it is discrete. But note that a diffeological space may consist of a finite number of points and have a nonzero dimension; see for example Exercise 48, p. 61. PROOF. Let X ◦ be a set X, equipped with the discrete diffeology (art. 1.20). Every plot P : U → X, being locally constant, lifts locally along some 0plot x : 0 → x, where x = P(r) (art. 1.3). Hence, dim(X ◦ ) = 0. Conversely, let X be a diffeological space such that dim(X) = 0. Then, by application of (art. 1.68), the 0plots generate the diffeology D of X. Every plot lifting locally along a 0plot is locally constant. Therefore, X is discrete. □ 1.82. Dimensions and quotients of diffeologies. Let X and X′ be two diffeological spaces and π : X → X′ be a subduction. Then, dim(X′ ) ≤ dim(X). Put differently, for any equivalence relation R defined on X, dim(X/R) ≤ dim(X). PROOF. Let D and D ′ be the diffeologies of X and X′ . Let Gen(D) and Gen(D ′ ) denote the sets of all the generating families of D and D ′ . We know that for every generating
60
1. DIFFEOLOGY AND DIFFEOLOGICAL SPACES
family F of D, π ◦ F is a generating family of D ′ , that is, π ◦ Gen(D) ⊂ Gen(D ′ ) (art. 1.74). Now, for every plot P : U → X, dim(P) = dim(U) = dim(π ◦ P). Hence, for every generating family F ∈ Gen(D), dim(F ) = dim(π ◦ F ). It follows the series of inequalities, dim(X′ ) = ≤ ≤
inf
dim(F ′ )
inf
dim(π ◦ F )
since π ◦ Gen(D) ⊂ Gen(D ′ )
inf
dim(F )
since dim(π ◦ F ) = dim(F )
F ′ ∈Gen(D ′ ) F ∈Gen(D) F ∈Gen(D)
by definition
≤ dim(X)
by definition.
Therefore, dim(X′ ) ≤ dim(X).
□
1.83. Dimension of a product. Let X and X′ be two diffeological spaces. The dimension of the product X × X′ satisfies the following inequality, 10 max(dim(X), dim(X′ )) ≤ dim(X × X′ ) ≤ dim(X) + dim(X′ ). PROOF. Let F and F ′ be two generating families, for X and X′ . Since every plot of the product X × X′ is a pair (P, P′ ) ∈ D × D ′ , where D and D ′ are the diffeologies of X and X′ , the product F × F ′ is a generating family for X × X′ . The elements (F, F′ ) ∈ F × F ′ define a parametrization F × F′ : U × U′ → X × X′ by F × F′ (r, r ′ ) = (F(r), F′ (r ′ )). Then, dim(X × X′ ) = inf dim(F′′ )  F′′ ∈ Gen(X × X′ ) ≤ inf dim(F × F′ )  (F, F′ ) ∈ Gen(X) × Gen(X′ ) ≤ inf dim(F) + dim(F′ )  (F, F′ ) ∈ Gen(X) × Gen(X′ ) ≤ inf {dim(F)  F ∈ Gen(X)} + inf dim(F′ )  F′ ∈ Gen(X′ ) ≤ dim(X) + dim(X′ ). Now, let F ′′ be a generating family for X × X′ . The set of parametrizations F = prX ◦ F ′′ , where prX is the projection onto the first factor, is a generating family for ¯ : r 7→ (P(r), x ′ ) X. Indeed, let x 0′ ∈ X′ , every plot P : U → X extends into a plot P 0 ′ ¯ lifts at each point along some element F′′ of F ′′ , by of X × X . Thus, the plot P composition with prX we get a local lift of P along prX ◦ F′′ . The same holds for X′ , and F ′ = prX′ ◦ F ′′ is a generating family for X′ . For these generating families we have dim(F ) = dim(F ′′ ) and dim(F ′ ) = dim(F ′′ ). Thus, dim(X × X′ ) = inf dim(F ′′ )  F ′′ ∈ Gen(X × X′ ) = inf dim(F )  F = prX ◦ F ′′ , F ′′ ∈ Gen(X × X′ ) ≥ inf {dim(F )  F ∈ Gen(X)} 10I still do not know, at this moment, if we have something better than this inequality.
DIMENSION OF DIFFEOLOGICAL SPACES
61
≥ dim(X). Exchanging X and X′ then gives dim(X×X′ ) ≥ max(dim(X), dim(X′ )). The inequality is then complete. □ 1.84. Dimension of a subspace? There is no simple relation between the dimension of a diffeological space X and the dimension of its subspaces. The dimension of a subspace A ⊂ X can be less than the dimension of X, equal or even greater. Exercise 51, p. 61 is the simple example of the subspace [0, ∞[ ⊂ R, having infinite dimension, while R has dimension 1. Exercises
✎ EXERCISE 48 (Has the set {0, 1} dimension 1?). Let π : R → {0, 1} be the parametrization defined by π (x) = 0 if x ∈ Q and π (x) = 1 otherwise. Let {0, 1}π be the set {0, 1} representing the quotient R/π . Show that dim({0, 1}π ) = 1. ✎ EXERCISE 49 (Dimension of tori). Let Γ ⊂ R be any strict subgroup of (R, +),
and let TΓ be the quotient R/Γ . Show that dim(TΓ ) = 1. Note that this applies in particular both to the circles (art. 1.11) and to the irrational tori; see Exercise 4, p. 10, and Exercise 43, p. 57.
✎ EXERCISE 50 (Dimension of Rn /O(n, R)). Let ∆ n be the quotient space of Rn by the action of the orthogonal group O(n, R) (art. 1.50), that is, two points x and x ′ of Rn are equivalent if there exists an element A of O(n, R) such that x ′ = Ax.
1) Show that ∆ n is equivalent to the set [0, ∞[ equipped with the pushforward of the standard diffeology of Rn by the map νn : x 7→ ∥x∥2 . 2) Show that the plot νn cannot be lifted locally at the point 0 along a pplot, with p < n. Consider the tangent map of νn at the point 0. 3) Deduce that dim(∆ n ) = n and that Rn /O(n, R) and Rm /O(m, R), n ̸= m, are not diffeomorphic. NOTE. This exercise shows how a diffeology encodes a smooth structure and not just a set, or even a topology of a set. These quotients Rn /O(n, R) are homeomorphic two to two, but indeed not diffeomorphic if they are not identical.
✎ EXERCISE 51 (Dimension of the halfline). Let ∆ ∞ be [0, ∞[ ⊂ R, equipped with the subset diffeology (art. 1.33). Show that dim(∆ ∞ ) = ∞. Use a similar development to that in Exercise 50, p. 61, and the fact that for any integer n, the map νn is a plot of ∆ ∞ .
62
1. DIFFEOLOGY AND DIFFEOLOGICAL SPACES
NOTE. This exercise and the previous one show in particular that the quotient ∆ 1 = R/{±1}, which has a structure of an orbifold (art. 4.17), is not a manifold with boundary (art. 4.15), which is the case of the halfline ∆ ∞ = [0, ∞[ ⊂ R.
CHAPTER 2
Locality and Diffeologies Diffeology is built on purpose on a dry set, without structure. This may appear unusual, when most of the traditional constructions in differential geometry are built on top of topological spaces. However, that does not mean that topology is completely absent from the theory; it appears actually as a byproduct of local smoothness. This is the way that I chose to introduce these notions, following the logic of diffeology. Indeed, a smooth map f from X to X′ transforms, by composition, the plots of X into plots of X′ . Thus, a local smooth map f from X to X′ will be a map, defined on a subset A ⊂ X, to X′ , which transforms every plot P of X into a plot of X′ . But that raises the question of the domain of definition. Naturally f ◦ P is defined on P−1 (A), which needs therefore to be a domain (maybe empty). Thus, a local smooth map is defined on a special kind of subset A, the ones for which P−1 (A) is open for all plots P of X, and these are the open sets of a special topology, first introduced in [Igl85], the Dtopology of X (art. 2.8). I could have presented first the Dtopology of the diffeological spaces and then the local smooth maps, but I think this breaks the logic, or selfconsistency, of the theory. Moreover, diffeology applies on useful spaces for which topology is helpless, irrational tori for example. Emphasizing Dtopology could have been misinterpreted. However, the reader who is uncomfortable with my choice can begin by the section on Dtopology and come back afterwards to local smoothness. That said, locality in diffeology will allow us to refine some diffeological concepts such as subduction or induction. It will suggest the notions of embeddings and embedded subsets. It will give us the notion of local diffeomorphisms which is associated with the definition of manifolds, or more generally, with the concept of modeling diffeological spaces.
To Be Locally Smooth If we can define local smoothness for diffeological spaces, we must keep in mind that for many singular spaces, like irrational tori, this notion is helpless. For this kind of space, there are no local smooth maps, only global. Nevertheless, local smoothness will be essential to include properly the category of manifolds in the category {Diffeology}, or the category of orbifolds, or some infinite dimensional spaces, and others. 63
64
2. LOCALITY AND DIFFEOLOGIES
2.1. Local smooth maps. Let X and X′ be two diffeological spaces. Let A ⊂ X be some subset. We shall say that a map f from A ⊂ X to X′ is a local smooth map if, for every plot P of X, the parametrization f ◦ P defined on P−1 (A) is a plot of X′ . That implies in particular that P−1 (A) is a domain. We shall say that a map f : X → X′ is locally smooth at the point x ∈ X if there exists a superset A of x such that the map f , restricted to A, is a local smooth map. We shall admit that the empty map is a local smooth map. NOTE 1. Since P−1 (A) must be open for each plot P of X, the domain of definition A ⊂ X of the local smooth map f is not any subset, but an open subset for the Dtopology of X, see (art. 2.8). NOTE 2. To clearly express that the property of local smoothness of f involves the whole set of plots of X, and not just the ones with values in A, I shall often use this notation f : X ⊃ A → X′ . NOTE 3. When considering local properties we may use the subscript ⋆loc , for ∞ instance, to denote space of local smooth maps Cloc (X, X′ ) or local diffeomorphisms Diffloc (X) and so on. NOTE 4. There is a special functional diffeology on local smooth maps. Let F be the ∞ domain of the evaluation map of the local smooth maps Cloc (X, X′ ) : ∞ F = {( f , x)  f ∈ Cloc (X, X′ ) and x ∈ def( f )}, with ev( f , x) = f (x). ∞ There exists on Cloc (X, X′ ) a coarsest diffeology such that the evaluation map is a local local smooth map, which implies in particular that F is Dopen (art. 2.8) ∞ in the product Cloc (X, X′ ) × X. This functional diffeology appears in [IZL18] and [IZP21]. We met it already in the case of the diffeology on a diffeology (art. 1.63).
2.2. Composition of local smooth maps. The composite of two local smooth maps is again a local smooth map. More precisely, let X, Y and Z be three diffeological spaces. Let f : X ⊃ A → Y and g : Y ⊃ B → Z be two local smooth maps. The map g ◦ f : X ⊃ f −1 (B) → Z is a local smooth map. PROOF. Let P : U → X be a plot of X, since f is locally smooth: P−1 (A) is a domain, and Q = f ◦ P : P−1 (A) → Y is a plot of Y. Now, since g is a local smooth map and Q is a plot of Y, Q−1 (B) = ( f ◦ P)−1 (B) = P−1 ( f −1 (B)) is a domain and g ◦ Q = g ◦ ( f ◦ P) = (g ◦ f ) ◦ P : P−1 ( f −1 (B)) → Z is a plot of Z. Hence, for every plot P of X, the map (g ◦ f ) ◦ P is a plot (maybe empty) of Z. Therefore g ◦ f is a local smooth map. □ 2.3. To be smooth or locally smooth. Let X and X′ be two diffeological spaces. A map f : X → X′ is smooth if and only if f is locally smooth at every point x of X.
TO BE LOCALLY SMOOTH
65
PROOF. Obviously, if f is smooth it is locally smooth at every point x of X, just choose X as a superset of x (art. 2.1). Conversely, let us assume that f is locally smooth at every point x of X. Let P : U → X be a plot of X. For all r ∈ U there exists, by assumption, a superset A of x = P(r) such that f ↾ A : X ⊃ A → X′ is a local smooth map (art. 2.1). This implies in particular that ( f ↾ A) ◦ P, defined on V = P−1 (A), is a plot of X′ . Thus, V ⊂ U is a domain and ( f ◦ P) ↾ V is a plot of X′ . Hence, f ◦ P is locally a plot of X′ at every point r ∈ U, that is, by axiom D2 of diffeology (art. 1.5), f ◦ P is a plot of X′ . Therefore, for any plot P of X, f ◦ P is a plot of X′ , and f is smooth. □ 2.4. Germs of local smooth maps. Let X and Y be two diffeological spaces, and let x be a point of X. We say that two local smooth maps f : X ⊃ A → Y and f ′ : X ⊃ A′ → Y have the same germ at the point x if and only if, there exists a superset A′′ ⊂ A ∩ A′ of x such that f ↾ A′′ : X ⊃ A′′ → Y, and f ′ ↾ A′′ : X ⊃ A′′ → Y are still two local smooth maps, and f ↾ A′′ = f ′ ↾ A′′ . NOTE 1. Having the same germ at the point x is an equivalence relation whose classes are called germs. The germ of the local smooth map f at the point x will be denoted by germ( f )(x) or germ( f ) x . If ϕ is the germ of f at the point x, the value y = f (x) is well defined and is called the value of the germ of f at x, and we denote ϕ(x) = y. NOTE 2. Let Z be a third diffeological space, and let f : X ⊃ A → Y and g : Y ⊃ B → Z be two local smooth maps. Let x ∈ A and y = f (x) ∈ B. The germ of g ◦ f : X ⊃ f −1 (B) → Z at x depends only on the germ of f at x and on the germ of g at y. We shall denote germ(g)( y) · germ( f )(x) = germ(g ◦ f )(x). This defines the composition of germs. Like composition of functions, composition of germs is associative. PROOF. For the first point, having the same germ at some point is obviously an equivalence relation. Now, for every local smooth map f ′ : X ⊃ A′ → Y, having the same germ as f at x implies that the point x belongs to A′ and f ′ (x) = f (x). Hence y = f (x) depends only on the germ of f . For the second point, let f ′ : X ⊃ A′ → Y be a local smooth map such that germ( f ′ )(x) = germ( f )(x). Then, let g ′ : Y ⊃ B′ → Z be a local smooth map such that germ(g ′ )( y) = germ(g)( y). Thus, there exists a superset A′′ ⊂ A ∩ A′ of x such that f ↾ A′′ and f ′ ↾ A′′ are two equal local smooth maps. There exists, as well, a superset B′′ ⊂ B ∩ B′ of y such that g ↾ B′′ and g ′ ↾ B′′ are two equal local smooth maps. Hence, g ◦ f ↾ f −1 (B′′ ) = g ′ ◦ f ′ ↾ f −1 (B′′ ), x ∈ f −1 (B′′ ), g ◦ f and g ′ ◦ f ′ are local smooth maps (art. 2.2). Hence, germ(g ′ ◦ f ′ )(x) = germ(g ◦ f )(x) and germ(g ◦ f )(x) depends only on the germ of f at x and the germ of g at y. Associativity of composition of germs is a direct consequence of the associativity of the composition of maps. □
66
2. LOCALITY AND DIFFEOLOGIES
2.5. Local diffeomorphisms and étale maps. Let X and X′ be two diffeological spaces. We say that a map f : X ⊃ A → X′ is a local diffeomorphism if and only if f is injective and f is a local smooth map as well as its inverse f −1 : X′ ⊃ f (A) → X. The set of local diffeomorphisms from X to X′ will be denoted by Diffloc (X, X′ ), and Diffloc (X) when X = X′ . Let x be a point of X, we say that a map f : X → X′ is a local diffeomorphism at x, or is étale at x, if there exists a superset A of x such that f ↾ A : X ⊃ A → X′ is a local diffeomorphism. The map f is said to be étale if it is étale at each point. 2.6. Étale maps and diffeomorphisms. An étale map f : X → X′ (art. 2.5), where X and X′ are two diffeological spaces, is not necessarily a diffeomorphism, because f is not necessarily bijective. But, if f is bijective and étale, then f is a diffeomorphism. This is a direct consequence of (art. 2.3). 2.7. Germs of local diffeomorphisms as groupoid. The set Diffloc (X) of local diffeomorphisms of X is no longer a group, since the domains and the sets of values of local diffeomorphisms do not coincide necessarily. But let ϕ be the germ of a local diffeomorphism f at a point x ∈ X, and let γ be the germ of a local diffeomorphism g at a point y = f (x). Then, the germ γ · ϕ of g ◦ f at the point x is well defined (art. 2.4) and maps the point x to the point z = g( y). This construction gives to the set of germs of local diffeomorphisms of X the structure of a groupoid [McL71]; see also (art. 8.3). The objects of this groupoid are the points of X and the morphisms from x to x ′ are the germs, at the point x, of the local diffeomorphisms of X mapping x to x ′ . This groupoid may be useful to explore the local structure of a diffeological space and its singularities, in relation to (art. 1.42). 1
Exercise
✎ EXERCISE 52 (To be a locally constant map). Let X and X′ be two diffeological
spaces. Let f : X → X′ be a locally constant map, that is, for each point x 0 ∈ X there exists a superset V of x 0 such that f ↾ V is a local smooth map and constant: f ↾ V : x → f (x 0 ). Show that f is constant on the connected components of X (art. 5.6), that is, if x 0 and x 1 are two points of X such that there exists a 1plot γ : R → X connecting x 0 to x 1 , i.e. γ (0) = x 0 and γ (1) = x 1 , then f (x 0 ) = f (x 1 ). Dtopology and Local Smoothness There are several topologies on a diffeological space, compatible with the diffeology, that is, such that smooth maps are continuous, for example, the coarse topology. But one 1This groupoid has been indeed useful to describe the stratified structure of orbifolds [GIZ22].
DTOPOLOGY AND LOCAL SMOOTHNESS
67
of them plays a particular role, it is the finest topology such that plots are continuous. This topology is called the Dtopology of the space. In particular, local smooth maps are necessarily defined on Dopen subsets, that is, open subsets for the Dtopology. The Dtopology defines a faithful functor from the category {Diffeology} of diffeological spaces to the category {Topology} of topological spaces. 2.8. The DTopology of diffeological spaces. There exists on every diffeological space X a finest topology such that the plots are continuous. This topology is called the Dtopology of X [Igl85]. The open sets for the Dtopology are called Dopen sets, they are characterized by the following property: (♣) A subset A ⊂ X is open for the Dtopology if and only if, for every plot P of X, P−1 (A) is open. PROOF. Let us consider the set T of all the subsets A of X such that, for any plot P of X, P−1 (A) is open. This set is a topology of X, indeed: 1. The empty set belongs to T , since P−1 (∅) = ∅ is open. 2. The set X belongs to T , since P−1 (X) = def(P) is open by assumption. T 3. Let {A i }i∈I be any finite family, with A i ∈ T , and let A = i A i . We have T T P−1 (A) = P−1 ( i A i ) = i P−1 (A i ). But every P−1 (A i ) is open. Since the family is T finite, the intersection i P−1 (A i ) is open. Hence, P−1 (A) is open. S 4. Let {A i }i∈I be any family, with A i ∈ T , and let A = i A i . We have P−1 (A) = S S S P−1 ( i A i ) = i P−1 (A i ). Since every P−1 (A i ) is open the union i P−1 (A i ) is open. Hence, P−1 (A) is open. Now, let T ′ be another topology for which the plots are continuous. Let us recall that T is finer than T ′ if T has more open sets, that is T contains T ′ , T ′ ⊂ T . Let A ⊂ X be open for the topology T ′ , A ∈ T ′ . Because the plots are T ′ continuous, P−1 (A) is open for all plots P of X, thus, A is Dopen: A ∈ T , and thus T ′ ⊂ T . Therefore, the Dtopology is finer than T ′ . Thus, the Dtopology is the finest topology such that the plots are continuous. □ 2.9. Smooth maps are Dcontinuous. Let X and X′ be two diffeological spaces. 1. Every smooth map f from X to X′ is Dcontinuous, that is, continuous for the Dtopology. 2. Every diffeomorphism f from X to X′ is a Dhomeomorphism, that is, a homeomorphism for the Dtopology. Associating the underlying Dtopological space with a diffeology defines a faithful functor from the category {Diffeology} to the category {Topology}.
68
2. LOCALITY AND DIFFEOLOGIES
PROOF. Let us denote by D and D ′ the diffeologies of X and X′ . By the very definition of smooth maps (art. 1.14), f sends every plot P ∈ D into a plot f ◦ P ∈ D ′ . Let A′ ⊂ X′ be Dopen, and A = f −1 (A′ ). For every plot P ∈ D, P−1 (A) = P−1 ( f −1 (A′ )) = ( f ◦ P)−1 (A′ ). But f ◦ P is a plot of D ′ and A′ is Dopen, thus ( f ◦ P)−1 (A′ ) is open. Hence, P−1 (A) is open for every plot P ∈ D. Therefore A = f −1 (A′ ) is Dopen and f is continuous. Next, a diffeomorphism is a bijective map, smooth as well as its inverse. Thus, a diffeomorphism is a bijective bicontinuous map, that is, a homeomorphism. □ 2.10. Local smooth maps are defined on Dopens. Let f be a map defined on a subset A of a diffeological space X with values in another one X′ . (♣) The map f : X ⊃ A → X′ is a local smooth map (art. 2.1) if and only if A is Dopen and f is smooth as a map from A to X′ , where A is equipped with the subset diffeology. In particular, if f : X ⊃ A → X′ is a local diffeomorphism, then: A) Both A and f (A) are Dopen, B) f is a local homeomorphism for the Dtopology, C) and f ↾ A is a diffeomorphism onto f (A), equiped with the subset diffeology. PROOF. Let us assume first that f is a local smooth map. By definition, for every plot P : U → X, the parametrization f ◦ P : P−1 (A) → X′ is a plot of X′ . Hence, since plots are defined on domains, P−1 (A) is a domain. Thus, since for any plot P of X the set P−1 (A) is a domain, A is Dopen. Now let us consider A ⊂ X equipped with the subset diffeology (art. 1.33) and f : A → X′ . Let P : U → A be a plot, since the injection jA : A → X is smooth, P also is a plot of X. Now, since f is a local smooth map, f ◦ P is a plot of X′ . Therefore, f : A → X′ , where A is equipped with the subset diffeology, is smooth. Conversely, let us assume that A is Dopen and that f : A → X′ , where A is equipped with the subset diffeology, is smooth. Let P : U → X be a plot. since A is Dopen, V = P−1 (A) is a domain. Since the inclusion map jV : V → U is a smooth parametrization, P ↾ V = P ◦ jV is a plot of X with values in A, thus P ↾ V is a plot of A for the subset diffeology. Now, since f : A → X is smooth, f ◦ (P ↾ V) is a plot of X′ . Then, since f ◦ P = f ◦ (P ↾ V), the parametrization f ◦ P is a plot of X′ . Therefore, f is a local smooth map from A ⊂ X to X′ . Now, if f is a local diffeomorphism, f −1 , defined on f (A), is a local smooth map, thus both A and f (A) are Dopen. The restrictions f ↾ A : A → f (A) and f −1 ↾ f (A) : f (A) → A, where A and f (A) are equipped with the subset diffeology, are smooth, thus f ↾ A a diffeomorphism onto f (A). Then, f ↾ A is a homeomorphism for the Dtopology (art. 2.9), that is, f is a local homeomorphism. □
DTOPOLOGY AND LOCAL SMOOTHNESS
69
2.11. Dtopology on discrete and coarse spaces. The Dtopology of discrete diffeological spaces is discrete. The Dtopology of coarse diffeological spaces is coarse. But note that a noncoarse diffeological space can inherit the coarse Dtopology (see Exercise 55, p. 70). PROOF. Let us consider a set X be equipped with the discrete diffeology. Let x ∈ X, and let P : U → X be a plot of the discrete diffeology, if x ∈ / P(U), then P−1 (x) = ∅ is open. If x = P(r), r ∈ U, there exists an open neighborhood V of r such that P ↾ V is constant and equal to x. Then, since P−1 (x) is a union of open subsets of U, it is open. Thus, every point of X is Dopen, and the Dtopology of the discrete diffeology is discrete. On the other hand, let X be equipped with the coarse diffeology. Let us assume that X is not reduced to a point. Let Ω ⊂ X such that Ω ̸= ∅ and Ω ̸= X. Then, there exist a point x ∈ X − Ω and a point y ∈ Ω. Let us define P : R → X by P(t) = x if t ∈ R − {0} and P(0) = y. Since every parametrization in X is a plot, P is a plot. But, P−1 (Ω) = {0} is closed in R, then Ω is not Dopen. Therefore, the only Dopen subsets of X are the empty set and X, the Dtopology associated with the coarse diffeology is coarse. □ 2.12. Quotients and Dtopology. Let X and X′ be two diffeological spaces. Let π : X → X′ be a subduction (art. 1.46). Then, the Dtopology of X′ is the quotient of the Dtopology of X by π . In other words, a subset A′ ⊂ X′ is Dopen if and only if A = π −1 (A′ ) ⊂ X is Dopen. This applies in particular to the quotient of X by any equivalence relation (art. 1.50). PROOF. Let A′ be a subset of X′ . Let us assume that A = π −1 (A′ ) ⊂ X is Dopen. Let P′ : U → X′ be a plot. For all r ∈ U, there exist an open neighborhood V of r, and a plot P : V → X, such that π ◦ P = P′ ↾ V. Hence, there exists an open covering {Ui }i∈I of U, indexed by some set I (I can be U itself), and for each i ∈ I there exists a plot Pi : Ui → X, such that P′ = sup{π ◦ Pi }i∈I (where sup −1 denotes the smallest common extension). Then, P′ (A′ ) = (sup{π ◦Pi }i∈I )−1 (A′ ) = S S −1 ′ −1 −1 ′ −1 ′ i∈I (π ◦ Pi ) (A ) = i∈I Pi (π (A )). But π (A ) is assumed to be Dopen, −1 −1 and the Pi are plots of X. Thus, for all i ∈ I , Pi (π (A′ )) are domains, and their −1 union is a domain. Hence, P′ (A′ ) is a domain for all plots P′ of X′ . Therefore, A′ is Dopen. Conversely, if A′ is Dopen, since π is smooth, π is continuous and A = π −1 (A′ ) is Dopen. □
70
2. LOCALITY AND DIFFEOLOGIES
Exercises
✎ EXERCISE 53 (Diffeomorphisms of the square). Let Sq be the square [0, 1] ×
{0, 1} ∪ {0, 1} × [0, 1], equipped with the subset diffeology (art. 1.33) of the smooth diffeology of R2 . Justify that the restriction of the diffeomorphisms of Sq to the four corners defines a homomorphism h from Diff(Sq) to the group of permutations S4 . Describe the image of h.
✎ EXERCISE 54 (Smooth Dtopology). Show that the Dtopology of a real domain, equipped with the smooth diffeology (art. 1.9), coincides with its standard topology.
✎ EXERCISE 55 (Dtopology of irrational tori). Let TΓ be the quotient of R by a
strict dense subgroup (for example Q or Z + αZ where α ∈ / Q). Show that the Dtopology of TΓ is coarse. Deduce that the Dtopology is not a full functor.
Embeddings and Embedded Subsets Combining smoothness and Dtopology leads to a refinement of the notion of induction and introduces the notion of diffeological embedding. Moreover, since every subset of a diffeological space has a natural subset diffeology, the comparison between the Dtopology induced by the ambient space and the Dtopology of the induced diffeology distinguishes between embedded subsets of a diffeological space and the others, without referring to anything other than the ambient diffeology. 2.13. Embeddings. Let Σ and X be two diffeological spaces, and f : Σ → X be an induction (art. 1.29). DEFINITION 1. We shall say that the induction f is an embedding if the pullback of the Dtopology of X, by f , coincides with the Dtopology of Σ. Explicitely, if for every Dopen subset A ⊂ Σ, there exists a Dopen subset B ⊂ X such that f −1 (B) = A. However, the case of the semicubic (art. 4.4, Note 2) suggests a refinement of the notion of embedding. Define the pseudogroup of local diffeomorphisms of X preserving Σ by: ¯ ∈ Diffloc (Σ ¯ )}, Diffloc (X, Σ) = {ϕ ∈ Diffloc (X)  Φ ↾ Σ ¯ = f (Σ). Let F be the pullback : where Σ F : Diffloc (X, Σ) → Diffloc (Σ), and F : ϕ 7→ φ , with φ = f −1 ◦ ϕ ◦ f . DEFINITION 2. We shall say that the induction f is a smooth embedding if — at the ¯ coincides with level of germs — the pullback of the local diffeomorphisms preserving Σ the local diffeomorphisms of Σ.
EMBEDDINGS AND EMBEDDED SUBSETS
71
Explicitely, f is a smooth embedding if the map F is surjective on the germs of local diffeomorphisms from Diffloc (X, Σ) to Diffloc (Σ); see [PIZ22c]. 2.14. Embedded subsets of a diffeological space. Let X be a diffeological space and A ⊂ X be some subset. We shall say that A is embedded if the canonical induction jA : A → X, where A is equipped with the subset diffeology, is an embedding. Every subspace A of X carries two natural topologies: the Dtopology given by the induced diffeology of X, and the induced topology of the ambient Dtopology of X. The set A is embedded if these two topologies coincide. In other words, A ⊂ X is embedded if every U ⊂ A, open for the Dtopology of the induced diffeology, is the imprint of some Dopen V of X, that is, U = A ∩ V. Similarly, the subset A can be smoothly embedded in X or not, depending on the relationship between the local diffeomorphisms of X preserving A and the local diffeomorphisms of A; see (art. 2.13, Note 2). NOTE. For a subset of a diffeological space, to be embedded or smoothly embedded, depends only on the diffeology of the ambient space X, and not on any additional structure.
Exercises
✎ EXERCISE 56 (Q is discrete but not embedded in R). Show that Q ⊂ R, where R is equipped with the smooth diffeology, is not embedded.
✎ EXERCISE 57 (Embedding GL(n, R) in Diff(Rn )). Let us consider the linear group GL(n, R) as a group of matrices. The components of a matrix M will be denoted by M i j , i, j = 1 · · · n. The identification between an element of GL(n, R) and the ordered set of its matrix elements (for any given definite ordering) identifies GL(n, R) with a domain of Rn×n . By this identification GL(n, R) inherits the diffeology of Rn×n . This diffeology will be called the standard diffeology of GL(n, R) and will equip GL(n, R). On the other hand, GL(n, R) can be regarded as a subgroup of Diff(Rn ). We equip Diff(Rn ) with the functional diffeology (art. 1.61). 1) Show that the inclusion GL(n, R) ,→ Diff(Rn ) is an induction. 2) Show that this induction is actually an embedding. Hint: Consider the following subsets of Diff(Rn ):
Ωε = { f ∈ Diff(Rn )  D( f )(0) ∈ B(1n , ε)}, where D( f )(0) is the linear tangent map of f at the point 0, and B(1n , ε) is the open ball in GL(n, R), centered at the identity 1n , with radius ε.
72
2. LOCALITY AND DIFFEOLOGIES
✎ EXERCISE 58 (The irrational solenoid is not embedded). Show that the irrational solenoid, defined in Exercise 31, p. 38, is not embedded. Local or Weak Inductions Some smooth injections look like inductions but are not. The example of the infinite symbol of Exercise 59, p. 72, is a good illustration of this situation. This is why we need to weaken, or refine, the definition of inductions and also consider maps which are only locally inductive. This notion is close to the ordinary concept of immersion, but it does not coincide, see the Note of Exercise 12, p. 21. 2.15. Local inductions. Let X and X′ be two diffeological spaces. Let f : X → X′ be a smooth map. We shall say that f is a local induction at the point x ∈ X if there exists an open neighborhood O of x such that f ↾ O is injective and for every plot P : U → f (O ) centered at x ′ = f (x), P(0) = x ′ , f −1 ◦ P is a plot of X. Put differently, f is an induction at the level of the germ of the diffeology of X at x (art. 2.19). Note that an induction is a local induction everywhere, but a local induction everywhere is not necessarily an induction; see Exercise 59, p. 72. It is not enough for a local induction to be injective for being an induction. NOTE. For a smooth injection j from an ndomain U into an mdomain V, if j is an immersion at a point x, that is, if its tangent map D( j)(x) is injective, then j is a local induction at x; see Exercise 12, p. 21. I am still not sure whether the converse is true for n = 1 and m > 1. Actually, it could be weird if local inductions between real domains were not immersions. 2 For n = m = 1, j is a local diffeomorphism, thus these notions coincide.
Exercise
✎ EXERCISE 59 (The infinite symbol). Let j be the smooth map of Figure 2.1, j : ] − π , π [ → R , with j(t) = 2
sin t
sin 2t
.
1) Check that j is injective and that lim t → −π j(t) = lim t → +π j(t) = (0, 0). 2) Let P be the following plot of R2 : P : ] − π , π [ → R , with P(t) = 2
sin t − sin 2t
.
2When J. M. Souriau wrote one of his first papers on diffeology, he named immersion what we call induction now, but after a remark from J. Pradines he changed his mind. He named also submersions what is now subductions, but for that question things are different; see (art. 2.16).
LOCAL OR STRONG SUBDUCTIONS
73
j 0
FIGURE 2.1. The infinite symbol. Check that P and j have the same image. Draw the image of P, similar to the image of j drawn in Figure 2.1. 3) Show that j −1 (P( ] − π /4, π /4[ )) is disconnected. Conclude that the injection j is not an induction. 4) Check that j is everywhere a local induction. Local or Strong Subductions Subductions (art. 1.46) express a global behavior of some surjections. As we localized the notion of induction and then obtained the notion of local induction (art. 2.15), the notion of subduction can be localized, or refined, as well and leads to the notion of local subduction. Exercise 61, p. 75, illustrates the case where a subduction is not everywhere a local subduction. 2.16. Local subductions. Let X and X′ be two diffeological spaces. We shall say that a smooth surjection f : X → X′ is a local subduction at the point x ∈ X if for every plot P : U → X′ pointed at x ′ = f (x), P(0) = x ′ , there exist an open neighborhood V of 0 and a plot Q : V → X such that Q(0) = x and f ◦ Q = P ↾ V. Said differently, f is a subduction (art. 1.46) at the level of the germ of the diffeology of X at the point x (art. 2.19). We simply shall say local subductions for everywhere local subductions, they are a fortiori subductions. NOTE. For a smooth surjection π : U → V between real domains, if π is a submersion at a point x ∈ U, that is, if its tangent map D(π )(x) is surjective, then π is a local subduction at x. Conversely, if π is a local subduction at x, then it is a submersion
74
2. LOCALITY AND DIFFEOLOGIES
at this point. Hence, since for real domains these two notions coincide, it would be legitimate to rename local subductions, submersions. But for the balance between local immersion and local subduction, we prefer to continue, for now, with this vocabulary. Even if there is no a complete symmetrie between the two situations. PROOF. Let dim(U) = n and dim(V) = m. If π : U → V is a submersion at x, thanks to the rank theorem for domains [Die70a, 10.3.1], there exists a local diffeomorphism ϕ defined on a neighborhood O of x to Rm × Rn−m such that the projection π is equivalent to the projection onto the first factor. Therefore, every plot centered at x ′ can be simply locally lifted at x by choosing a constant in the second factor. Conversely, if π is a local subduction at x, for every vector v ∈ Rm , the path t 7→ x ′ + t v has a local lift c : t → x t , π (x t ) = x ′ + t v, centered at x. Thus, D(π )(x)(˙c (0)) = v, with ˙c (t) = d c(t)/d t. Therefore, D(π )(x) is surjective. □ 2.17. Compositions of local subductions. Let X, X′ and X′′ be three diffeological spaces. Let f : X → X′ and f ′ : X′ → X′′ be two local subductions. The composite f ′ ◦ f is still a local subduction. PROOF. First of all, the composition of two smooth surjections is still a smooth surjection. Let P : U → X′′ be a plot centered at x ′′ . Let x ∈ X such that f ′ ◦ f (x) = x ′′ . Let x ′ = f (x), since f ′ is a local subduction there exist an open neighborhood V′ of 0, and a plot Q′ : V′ → X′ , such that Q′ (0) = x ′ and P ↾ V′ = f ′ ◦ Q′ . Since Q′ is a plot of X′ and f is a local subduction, there exist an open neighborhood V of 0, and a plot Q : V → X, such that Q(0) = x and Q′ ↾ V = f ◦ Q. Hence, the plot Q satisfies Q(0) = x and ( f ′ ◦ f ) ◦ Q = P ↾ V. □ 2.18. Local subductions are Dopen maps. Let X and X′ be two diffeological spaces. Let f : X → X′ be a local subduction. If A ⊂ X is a Dopen set, then f (A) also is Dopen. Local subductions are Dopen maps. PROOF. First of all, let us remark that, composing with a translation, we can replace 0 by any r such that P(r) = x in the definition of local subduction (art. 2.16). Now, let A′ = f (A) and P : U → X′ be a plot. We want to show that P−1 (A′ ) is a domain. For every r ∈ P−1 (A′ ) let us choose x ∈ A such that f (x) = P(r). Now, since f is a local subduction, there exist an open neighborhood V of r and a plot Q : V → X such that Q(r) = x and f ◦ Q = P ↾ V. But since A is open, Q−1 (A) is a domain. Let us define W = Q−1 (A) ∩ V, W is still a domain, still containing r. Then, let us define ¯ = Q ↾ W, Q ¯ is still a plot of X. But Q(W) ¯ Q = Q(W) ⊂ A, by construction, thus ′ ¯ P(W) = f ◦ Q(W) ⊂ f (A) = A , that is, W ⊂ P−1 (A′ ). Thus, for every r ∈ U we found a domain W such that W is an open neighborhood of r and W ⊂ P−1 (A′ ). Hence, since P−1 (A′ ) is the union of all the domains W, when r runs over P−1 (A′ ), P−1 (A′ )
LOCAL OR STRONG SUBDUCTIONS
75
is itself a domain. Hence, P−1 (A′ ) is a domain for every plot P of X′ . Therefore A′ is Dopen. □ Exercises
✎ EXERCISE 60 (Quotient by a group of diffeomorphisms). Let X be a diffeological space, and let G ⊂ Diff(X) be a group of diffeomorphisms equipped with the functional diffeology (art. 1.61). Choose a point x ∈ X and denote by O the orbit G(x) = {g(x)  g ∈ G} ⊂ X, equipped with the subset diffeology. Let Q = G/π denote the same orbit, but be equipped with the pushforward of the functional diffeology of G by the projection π : g 7→ g(x). Let j : Q → O be the identity map. 1) Check that j is smooth, that is, the quotient diffeology of G by π is finer than the subset diffeology of G(x). 2) Show that π is a local subduction from G to Q. 3) Let us denote by T the space R2 , equipped with the subdiffeology of the wire diffeology (art. 1.10) generated by the vertical and horizontal lines, that is, the parametrizations t 7→ (c, t) and t 7→ (t, c), where c runs over R. Check that for all u ∈ R2 the translation Tu : T → T , Tu (τ ) = τ + u is a diffeomorphism. Show that the subgroup G ⊂ Diff(T ) of these translations, equipped with the functional diffeology, is discrete. For x = (0, 0), note that G(x) = T , and that the quotient diffeology of G by π from the first question (which coincides with G), is strictly finer than the diffeology of the orbit T of x. In other words, the translations, equipped with the functional diffeology, are transitive on T but do not generate its diffeology.
✎`EXERCISE 61 (A notsostrong subduction). Let X be the diffeological sum
R R2 (art. 1.39), where the real spaces R and R2 are equipped with the smooth diffeology. Let ∥ · ∥ : X → [0, ∞[ be the modulus ∥x∥ = x if x ∈ R, and the usual norm when x ∈ R2 . Let Q be the quotient X/∥ · ∥ (art. 1.50), that is, the quotient of X by the equivalence relation x ∼ x ′ if ∥x∥ = ∥x ′ ∥. Consider the quotient Q as the halfline [0, ∞[, equipped with the pushforward of the diffeology of X by the map ∥ · ∥2 . Show that the plot P : R2 → Q, defined by P(r) = ∥r∥2 , cannot be lifted locally at (0, 0) ∈ R2 by a plot Q of X, such that Q(0, 0) = 0 ∈ R ⊂ X. Conclude that ∥ · ∥, which is by construction a subduction, is not a local subduction at the point 0 ∈ R ⊂ X.
✎ EXERCISE 62 (A powerset diffeology). Let X be a diffeological space, and let D
be its diffeology. Let P(X) be the powerset of X, that is, P(X) = {A  A ⊂ X}. We have seen in Exercise 32, p. 38, a diffeology on this set, which induces on every quotient of X the quotient diffeology. But this diffeology is too weak to be a good diffeology. For example, consider the set of the affine lines in R2 , and choose the
76
2. LOCALITY AND DIFFEOLOGIES
parametrization which associates with each rational number the xaxis, and with each irrational number the yaxis. This parametrization is a plot for this weak diffeology, since we can lift it into the point (0, 0) which belongs to each of these lines for any number. This is indeed not satisfactory, since the line jumps from the xaxis to the yaxis, when the parameter crosses each number. This is not a behavior we want to regard as smooth. The point that we miss with this diffeology is that we cannot follow smoothly the plots of the line, defined by a value of the parameter, when the parameter moves smoothly in its domain. It is why we shall try to fix this diffeology in the following way. Let us recall, first of all, that the diffeology D is itself a diffeological space, and thus, we know what a smooth family of plots of X is (art. 1.63). 1) Show that the parametrizations P : U → P(X) defined by the following condition form a diffeology. We shall call it the powerset diffeology. (♣) For every r0 ∈ U and for every Q0 ∈ D such that val(Q0 ) ⊂ P(r0 ), there exist an open neighborhood V of r0 and a smooth family of plots Q : V → D, such that Q(r0 ) = Q0 and val(Q(r)) ⊂ P(r), for all r ∈ V. 2) Give a more conceptual definition involving local subductions. Compare with being a smooth map between diffeological spaces. 3) Check that the map j : x 7→ {x}, from X to P(X), is an induction. 4) Show that the TzimTzum, the parametrization T defined by T (t) = {x ∈ R2  ∥x∥ > t}, for all t ∈ R, is a plot of the powerset diffeology of P(R2 ). Notice how the topology of the subset T (t) changes when t passes through 0. NOTE. This powerset diffeology avoids the phenomenon described at the beginning. The next exercise shows that it induces, on the set of lines of an affine space, a diffeology of manifold, the one we are used to, which is satisfactory. Also note that this construction is presented as an exercise and not as an independent section because, as it is an attempt to bring out the right concept of a diffeology on P(X), it may not be in its final shape.
✎ EXERCISE 63 (The powerset diffeology of the set of lines). Let us denote by Lines(Rn ) the set of all the (affine) lines of Rn . Let us recall that an affine line D is a part of Rn for which there exists a nonzero vector v ∈ Rn such that for any two points r and r ′ of D there exists t ∈ R such that r ′ = r + t v. Let TSn−1 ⊂ Rn × Rn be the tangent space of the (n − 1)sphere defined by TSn−1 = {(u, x) ∈ Rn × Rn  ∥u∥ = 1 and u · x = 0},
THE DIMENSION MAP OF DIFFEOLOGICAL SPACES
77
where the dot denotes the usual scalar product on Rn . Let P(Rn ) be the powerset of Rn . Let j : TSn−1 → Lines(Rn ) ⊂ P(Rn ), with j(u, x) = {x + tu  t ∈ R}. Equip TSn−1 with the subset diffeology of Rn × Rn and Lines(Rn ) ⊂ P(Rn ) with the subset diffeology of the powerset diffeology defined in Exercise 62, p. 75. Show that j is a subduction onto its image. Check that the pullback of a line D ∈ Lines(Rn ) by j is just the pair (±u, x), such that D = {x + tu  t ∈ R}. Deduce that the set Lines(Rn ), equipped with the powerset diffeology, is diffeomorphic to the quotient TSn−1 / {±1}.
The Dimension Map of Diffeological Spaces Because diffeological spaces are not necessarily homogeneous or transitive (art. 2.25), it is necessary to refine the notion of (global) dimension of a diffeological space (art. 1.78) by the dimension map (art. 2.22), which gives the dimension of a diffeological space at each of its points. 2.19. Pointed plots and germs of a diffeological space. Let X be a diffeological space, let D be its diffeology, and let x ∈ X. Let P : U → X be a plot. We say that P is centered at x if 0 ∈ U and P(0) = x. We shall agree that the set of germs (art. 2.4) of the centered plots of X at x represents the germ of the diffeology at this point, and we shall denote it by D x . 2.20. Local generating families. Let X be a diffeological space, and let x be some point of X. We shall call local generating family at x any family F of plots of X such that the following conditions are satisfied: 1. Every element P of F is centered at x, that is, 0 ∈ def(P) and P(0) = x. 2. For every plot P : U → X centered at x, there exist an open neighborhood V of 0 ∈ U, a parametrization F : W → X belonging to F and a smooth parametrization Q : V → W, centered at 0 ∈ W, such that F ◦ Q = P ↾ V. We shall also say that F generates the germ D x of the diffeology D of X at the point x (art. 2.19). We denote, by analogy with (art. 1.66), D x = 〈F 〉. Note that for all x ∈ X, the set of local generating families at x is not empty, since it contains the set of all the plots centered at x, and this set contains the constant parametrizations with value x (art. 1.5). 2.21. Union of local generating families. Let X be a diffeological space. Let us choose, for every x ∈ X, a local generating family F x at x. The union F of all
78
2. LOCALITY AND DIFFEOLOGIES
these local generating families, F=
[
Fx ,
x∈X
is a generating family of the diffeology of X. PROOF. Let P : U → X be a plot, and let r ∈ U and x = P(r). Let Tr be the translation Tr (r ′ ) = r ′ + r. Let P′ = P ◦ Tr be defined on U′ = Tr−1 (U). Since the translations are smooth, the parametrization P′ is a plot of X. Moreover, P′ is centered at x, thus P′ (0) = P ◦ Tr (0) = P(r) = x. By definition of a local generating family (art. 2.20), there exist an element F : W → X of F x , an open neighborhood V′ of 0 ∈ U′ and a smooth parametrization Q′ : V′ → W, centered at 0, such that P′ ↾ V′ = F ◦ Q′ . Thus, P ◦ Tr ↾ V′ = F ◦ Q′ , that is, P ↾ V = F ◦ Q, where V = Tr (V′ ) and Q = Q′ ◦ Tr−1 . Hence, P lifts locally, at every point of its domain, along an element of F . Thus, F is a generating family (art. 1.66) of the diffeology of X. □ 2.22. The dimension map. Let X be a diffeological space and x be a point of X. By analogy with the global dimension of X (art. 1.78), we define the dimension of X at the point x by dim x (X) = inf{dim(F )  〈F 〉 = D x }, where the dimension of a family of parametrizations has been defined in (art. 1.77). The map x 7→ dim x (X), with values in N ∪ {∞}, will be called the dimension map of the space X. 2.23. Global dimension and dimension map. Let X be a diffeological space. The global dimension of X (art. 1.78) is the supremum of the dimension map just defined in (art. 2.22), dim(X) = sup {dim x (X)} x∈X . PROOF. Let D be the diffeology of X. Let us prove first that for every x ∈ X, dim x (X) ≤ dim(X), which implies sup {dim x (X)} x∈X ≤ dim(X). For that we shall prove that for all x ∈ X and every generating family F of D, dim x (X) ≤ dim(F ). Then, since dim(X) = inf{dim(F )  F ∈ D and 〈F 〉 = D}, we shall get dim x (X) ≤ dim(X). Consider a generating family F of D. For every plot P : U → X, centered at x, let us choose an element F of F such that there exist an open neighborhood V of 0 ∈ U and a smooth parametrization Q : V → def(F) such that F ◦ Q = P ↾ V. Then, let r = Q(0) and Tr be the translation Tr (r ′ ) = r ′ + r. Let F′ = F ◦ Tr be defined on Tr−1 (def(F)). Thus, F′ (0) = x, and F′ is a plot of X, centered at x, such that dim(F′ ) = dim(F). Now, Q′ = Tr−1 ◦ Q is smooth and P ↾ V = F′ ◦ Q′ . Hence, the set F x′ of all these plots F′ , associated with the plots centered at x, is a generating family of D x , and for each of them dim(F′ ) = dim(F) ≤ dim(F ). Therefore,
THE DIMENSION MAP OF DIFFEOLOGICAL SPACES
79
dim(F x′ ) ≤ dim(F ). But dim x (X) ≤ dim(F x′ ), thus dim x (X) ≤ dim(F ). We conclude then that dim x (X) ≤ dim(X), for all x ∈ X, and thus sup {dim x (X)} x∈X ≤ dim(X). Now, let us prove that dim(X) ≤ sup {dim x (X)} x∈X . We shall assume that sup {dim x (X)} x∈X is finite. Otherwise, according to the previous part, we have sup {dim x (X)} x∈X ≤ dim(X), and then dim(X) is infinite and sup {dim x (X)} x∈X = dim(X). So, since the sequence of the dimensions of the generating families of the D x is lower bounded, there exists for every x a generating family F x such that dim x (X) = dim(F x ). Then, for every x in X let us choose one of these families. Now, let us define Fm as the union of all these families we have chosen. Thanks to (art. 2.21), Fm is a generating family of D. Hence, dim(X) ≤ dim(Fm ). But, dim(Fm ) = sup{dim(F)}F∈Fm = sup{sup{dim(F)}F∈F x } x∈X = sup{dim(F x )} x∈X = sup{dim x (X)} x∈X . Therefore, dim(X) ≤ sup{dim x (X)} x∈X . We can conclude, from the two parts above, that dim(X) = sup{dim x (X)} x∈X . □ 2.24. The dimension map is a local invariant. Let X and X′ be two diffeological spaces. If x ∈ X and x ′ ∈ X′ are two points related by a local diffeomorphism (art. 2.5), then dim x (X) = dim x ′ (X′ ). In other words, local diffeomorphisms (a fortiori global diffeomorphisms) can only exchange points where the spaces have the same dimension. In particular, for X = X′ , the dimension map is invariant under the local diffeomorphisms of X, that is, constant on the orbits of the germs of local diffeomorphisms (art. 2.5). PROOF. This proposition is a slight adaptation of (art. 1.79). Let f : X ⊃ A → X′ be a local diffeomorphism mapping x to x ′ . Let F be a local generating family at x ∈ X (art. 2.20). Clearly, f ◦ F = { f ◦ F  F ∈ F } is a generating family at x ′ = f (x) ∈ X′ . Conversely, let F ′ be a generating family at x ′ ∈ X′ , then f −1 ◦ F ′ is a generating family at x ∈ X. There is a onetoone correspondence between the local generating families at x ∈ X and the local generating families at x ′ ∈ X′ , therefore, dim x (X) = dim x ′ (X′ ). □ 2.25. Transitive and locally transitive spaces. We shall say that a diffeological space X is transitive if for any two points x and x ′ there exists a diffeomorphism F (art. 1.17) such that F(x) = x ′ . We shall say that the space is locally transitive if for any two points x and x ′ there exists a local diffeomorphism f (art. 2.5) defined on some superset of x such that f (x) = x ′ . If the space X is transitive, it is a fortiori locally transitive. As a direct consequence of (art. 2.24), if a diffeological space X is locally transitive, then the dimension map (art. 2.22) is constant, a fortiori if the space X is transitive. 2.26. Local subduction and dimension. Let X and X′ be two diffeological spaces, and let π : X → X′ be a smooth surjection. Let x be a point of X and x ′ = π (x). If π is a local subduction at the point x ∈ X (art. 2.16), then dim x ′ (X′ ) ≤ dim x (X).
80
2. LOCALITY AND DIFFEOLOGIES
PROOF. Let D x and D x′ ′ be the germs of the diffeologies of X at the point x and X′ at the point x ′ = π (x). Let Gen(D x ) and Gen(D x′ ′ ) denote the sets of all the generating families of D x and D x′ ′ . We know that for every generating family F of D x , π ◦ F is a generating family of D x′ ′ , that is, π ◦ Gen(D x ) ⊂ Gen(D x′ ′ ). Now, for the same reasons as in (art. 1.82), we get dim x ′ (X′ ) ≤ dim x (X). □ Exercise
✎ EXERCISE 64 (The diffeomorphisms of the halfline). This exercise illustrates how the invariance of the dimension map (art. 2.22), under diffeomorphisms (art. 2.24), can be used to characterize the diffeomorphisms of the halfline [0, ∞[⊂ R. Show that a permutation of the halfline, that is, a bijection f : [0, ∞[ → [0, ∞[, is a diffeomorphism for the subset diffeology induced by R, if and only if the three following conditions are fulfilled: 1) The origin is fixed, f (0) = 0. 2) The restriction of f to the open halfline is an increasing diffeomorphism of the open halfline, f ↾ ]0, ∞[ ∈ Diff+ (]0, ∞[). 3) The map f is infinitely differentiable at the origin and its first derivative f ′ (0) does not vanish. Hint: For the first question use the result of Exercise 51, p. 61, and the invariance of the dimension map by diffeomorphisms (art. 2.24). For the second question use the fact that the open interval ]0, ∞[ is an orbit of Diff([0, ∞[). For the third question use the following Whitney theorem: THEOREM [Whi43]. An even function f (x) = f (−x), defined on a neighborhood of the origin, may be written as g(x 2 ). If f is smooth, g may be made smooth.
CHAPTER 3
Diffeological Vector Spaces Some geometrical objects involve infinite vector spaces, for example the construction of the infinite Hilbert sphere (art. 4.9) or the associated infinite projective space (art. 4.11). These constructions are perfect examples of how diffeology handles infinite dimensional objects. But, in order to describe precisely these structures, we need to specialize the notion of vector space according to the diffeological framework. However, this chapter is not devoted to exploring all the connections between the notion of diffeological vector space and the various kinds of vector spaces we find in the literature. 1 In this chapter, we shall consider the field R of real numbers equipped with the smooth diffeology (art. 1.4). The field C of complex numbers is identified, as real vector space, with the product R × R by the real isomorphism fold : (x, y) 7→ z = x + i y. A plot of C is just a parametrization r 7→ Z(r) = P(r) + iQ(r) where P and Q are some real smooth parametrizations. The letter K will denote R or C.
Basic Constructions and Definitions 3.1. Diffeological vector spaces. Let E be a vector space over K. We shall call vector space diffeology on E any diffeology of E such that the addition and the multiplication by a scalar are smooth, that is, [(u, v) 7→ u + v] ∈ C ∞ (E × E, E), and [(λ, u) 7→ λu] ∈ C ∞ (K × E, E), where the spaces E×E and K×E are equipped with the product diffeology (art. 1.55). Every vector space E over K, equipped with a vector space diffeology, is called a diffeological vector space over K, or a diffeological Kvector space. 3.2. Standard vector spaces. Every vector space Kn , equipped with the standard diffeology, is a diffeological vector space. But note that every vector space, equipped with the coarse diffeology, is also a diffeological vector space. 1At the time of the first edition it was only a program for future work. Since then, this program has started; see for example [CW19] and [WZ22]. 81
82
3. DIFFEOLOGICAL VECTOR SPACES
3.3. Smooth linear maps. Let E and F be two diffeological Kvector spaces. We denote by L∞ (E, F) the space of smooth linear maps from E to F, L∞ (E, F) = L(E, F) ∩ C ∞ (E, F). The space L∞ (E, F) is a Kvector subspace of L(E, F). Since the composite of linear maps is linear and the composite of two smooth maps is smooth, diffeological vector spaces, together with smooth linear maps, form a category which we may denote by {DLinear}. The isomorphisms of this category are the linear isomorphisms, smooth as well as their inverses. PROOF. Let A and B belong to L∞ (E, F). For any plot P : U → E, (A + B) ◦ P = A ◦ P + B ◦ P, but PA = A ◦ P and PB = B ◦ P are plots of F. So, [r 7→ (A + B) ◦ P(r) = PA (r) + PB (r)] = [r 7→ (PA (r), PB (r)) 7→ PA (r) + PB (r)] is the composite of two smooth maps. Therefore A + B is smooth. Let now λ ∈ K, the map (λA) ◦ P splits into (λA) ◦ P = [r 7→ (λ, PA (r)) 7→ λ × PA (r)]. Thus, the addition of two smooth linear maps, as well as the multiplication of a smooth linear map by a scalar, are smooth linear maps. Therefore, L∞ (E, F) is a Kvector subspace of L(E, F). □ 3.4. Products of diffeological vector spaces. Let {E i }i∈I be some family of Q diffeological vector spaces. Let E = i∈I E i be the product of the family. The product E is naturally a vector space, for all v, v ′ ∈ E , for all λ ∈ K, (v + v ′ )(i) = v(i) + v ′ (i), and (λv)(i) = λ × v(i). The space E, equipped with the product diffeology (art. 1.55), is a diffeological vector space. PROOF. Let us check that the addition and the multiplication by a scalar are smooth. Let P : r 7→ vr and P′ : r 7→ vr′ be two plots of E. Thus, for all i ∈ I the parametrizations r 7→ vr (i) and r 7→ vr′ (i) are two plots of E i . Then, r 7→ (vr + vr′ )(i) = vr (i) + vr′ (i) is a plot of E i , since the addition is smooth in E i . As well, (λ, r) 7→ (λvr )(i) = λ × vr (i) is a plot of E i . Therefore, E is a diffeological vector space. □ 3.5. Diffeological vector subspaces. Any vector subspace F of a diffeological vector space E, equipped with the subset diffeology, is a diffeological vector space. PROOF. Let r 7→ vr and r 7→ vr′ be two plots of F for the subset diffeology, and defined on the same domain, that is, two plots of E with values in F. Thus, the sum r 7→ vr + vr′ is a plot of E, and since F is a vector subspace of E, vr + vr′ belongs to F for all r. Hence, r 7→ vr + vr′ is a plot of F for the subset diffeology. Therefore, the sum is smooth. For analogous reasons, (λ, r) 7→ λ × vr is a plot of F, and the
FINE DIFFEOLOGY ON VECTOR SPACES
83
multiplication by a scalar is smooth. Finally, equipped with the subset diffeology F is a diffeological vector space. □ 3.6. Quotient of diffeological vector spaces. Let E be a diffeological vector space, and let F ⊂ E be a vector subspace. The quotient vector space E/F is a diffeological vector space for the quotient diffeology (art. 1.50). NOTE. Considering R as a diffeological vector space over Q, R/Q is still a diffeological Qvector space of dimension 1, not Hausdorff but however not trivial. An interesting case study. PROOF. Let E′ = E/F and r 7→ vr be a plot of the quotient diffeology. Then, locally, vr = [e r ], where r 7→ e r is a plot of E, and [e] ∈ E′ means the class of e ∈ E. Now, let r 7→ vr and r 7→ vr′ be two plots of E′ defined on the same domain U. Thus, for any r0 ∈ U there exist an open neighborhood O of r0 and two plots r 7→ e r and r 7→ e′r defined on O such that vr = [e r ] and e′r = [vr′ ]. Hence, vr + vr′ = [e r ] + [e′r ] = [e r + e′r ], and then r 7→ e r + e′r is a local lift of r 7→ vr + vr′ . And, by definition of the quotient diffeology, the addition on E′ is smooth. As well, (λ, r) 7→ λ × e r lifts (λ, r) 7→ λ × vr , where λ ∈ K. Therefore, E′ is a diffeological vector space for the quotient diffeology. □ Exercise
✎ EXERCISE 65 (Vector space of maps into Kn ). Let X be a diffeological space. Let
E = C ∞ (X, Kn ) be the space of smooth maps from X to Kn . The set E is a Kvector space for the pointwise addition and multiplication by a scalar. Precisely, for all f , f ′ in E and λ in R, f + f ′ = [x 7→ f (x) + f ′ (x)] and λ f = [x 7→ λ × f (x)]. Check that E, equipped with the functional diffeology, is a diffeological Kvector space.
Fine Diffeology on Vector Spaces Every Kvector space equipped with the coarse diffeology is obviously a diffeological vector space, what is not really interesting. But every vector space has a finest vector space diffeology, which we shall call the fine diffeology. In this section we study some aspects of this fine diffeology. 3.7. The fine diffeology of vector spaces. There exists, on every Kvector space E, a finest diffeology of vector space. We shall call it the fine diffeology. This diffeology is generated (art. 1.66) by the family of parametrizations defined by X P : r 7→ λ α (r)v α , (♥) α∈A
84
3. DIFFEOLOGICAL VECTOR SPACES
where A is a finite set of indices, the λ α are smooth Kparametrizations defined on the domain of P, and v α are vectors of E. More precisely, the plots of the fine diffeology are the parametrizations P : U → E such that, for all r0 ∈ U there exist an open neighborhood V of r0 , a family of smooth parametrizations λ α : V → K, and a family of vectors v α ∈ E, both indexed by the same finite set of indices A, such that X (P ↾ V) : r 7→ λ α (r)v α . (♦) α∈A α
A finite family (λ α , v )α∈A , defined on some domain V, and satisfying (♦) with λ α ∈ C ∞ (V, K) and v α ∈ E, will be called a local family for the plot P. We shall agree that plot properties satisfied only locally, over some nonspecified domains, will be denoted with the subscript “loc”, for example =loc etc. PROOF. Let us prove that the set of parametrizations described by (♦) is the finest vector space diffeology. 1. (Diffeology) The condition (♦) is clearly the specialization, for the family defined in (♥), of the criterion (art. 1.68) for generating families. 2. (Diffeology of vector space) Let r 7→ (P(r), Q(r)) be a plot of the product E × E. Let (λ α , uα )α∈A and (µβ , v β )β∈B be two local families such that X X P(r) =loc λ α (r)uα , and Q(r) =loc µβ (r)v β . α∈A
β∈B
The addition P + Q writes P + Qloc : r 7→
X α∈A
λ α (r)uα +
X β∈B
µβ (r)v β =
X
νσ (r)wσ ,
σ ∈C
where C is just the adjunction of the two sets of indices A and B, and the family (νσ , wσ )σ ∈C the adjunction of the local families (λ α , uα )α∈A and (µβ , v β )β∈B . Hence, the addition is smooth. On the other hand, since the multiplication by a scalar is smooth in K, the multiplication by a scalar in E also is smooth. Therefore, this diffeology is a vector space diffeology. 3. (Fineness) Let us consider E, equipped with some other vector space diffeology D. Since the multiplication by a scalar is smooth, for any smooth parametrization λ of K and any vector u ∈ E, the parametrization r 7→ λ(r)u is smooth. Now, since the addition is smooth, for any finite local family (λ α , uα )α∈A , the parametrization P r 7→ α∈A λ α (r)uα is smooth, that is, a plot of the diffeology D. Thus, the diffeology D is coarser than the fine diffeology defined above. Hence, the fine diffeology is the finest vector space diffeology of E. □ 3.8. Generating the fine diffeology. Let E be a vector space on K, and let L(Kn , E) be the set of all the linear maps from Kn into E. Let L⋆ (Kn , E) be the set of all the
FINE DIFFEOLOGY ON VECTOR SPACES
85
injective linear maps from Kn into E, L⋆ (Kn , E) = { j ∈ L(Kn , E)  ker( j) = {0}}. The following two families both generate the fine diffeology of E. [ [ F= L(Kn , E), and F ⋆ = L⋆ (Kn , E). n∈N
n∈N
NOTE. A parametrization P : U → E is a plot for the diffeology generated by F if and only if, for all r0 ∈ U there exist an open neighborhood V of r0 in U, an integer n, a smooth parametrization ϕ : V → Kn , and a linear map j : Kn → E such that P ↾ V = j ◦ ϕ. In other words, locally, P takes its values in a constant finite dimensional subspace F ⊂ E, such that the coordinates of P, for some basis of F, are smooth. For the plots generated by F ⋆ , j is injective. PROOF. Let us prove that F , as well as F ⋆ , generates the fine diffeology. Let P : U → E be a plot of the diffeology generated by F , or by F ⋆ . Pick a point r0 in U. By definition, there exist an open neighborhood V of r0 , an integer n, a smooth parametrization ϕ : V → Kn , and a linear map j : Kn → E such that P ↾ V = j ◦ ϕ. Pn Thus, for all r in V, ϕ(r) = k=1 ϕk (r)ek , where (e1 , . . . , en ) is the canonical basis Pn Pn of Kn , and ϕk ∈ C ∞ (V, K). Now, P(r) = j( k=1 ϕk (r)ek ) = k=1 ϕk (r) j(ek ) = Pn k=1 ϕk (r)fk , where fk = j(ek ). Therefore, P is a plot of the fine diffeology of E, and (ϕk , fk )nk=1 is a local family of the plot P. Note that j can be chosen to be injective. Conversely, let P : U → E be a plot of the fine diffeology, and let r0 be a point of U. There exist an open neighborhood V of r0 in U, an integer N, a local family PN (λ α , v α )αN=1 , with λ α ∈ C ∞ (V, K), v α ∈ E, and such that P ↾ V = α=1 λ α (r)v α . Let F be the vector space generated by the v α , and let f = (f1 , . . . , fn ) be a basis Pn of F. Let us split the vectors v α on the basis f, v α = k=1 vkα fk . Now, P ↾ V = PN Pn Pn PN α α α=1 k=1 λ α (r)vk fk = k=1 ϕk (r)fk , where ϕk (r) = α=1 λ α (r)vk . The ϕk are n smooth maps defined on V with values in K. Now, let j : K → E be the linear map defined by j(ek ) = fk and ϕ : V → Kn defined by ϕ = (ϕ1 , . . . , ϕn ). Hence, P ↾ V = j ◦ ϕ, where j is an injective linear map from Kn to E and ϕ belongs to C ∞ (V, Kn ). Therefore, P is a plot of the diffeology generated by F ⋆ , a fortiori by F . Hence, the fine diffeology of E is generated by the set of linear maps, or injective linear maps, from Kn into E, when n runs over the integers. □ 3.9. Linear maps and fine diffeology. Let E and F be two diffeological vector spaces over K. Let E be equipped with the fine diffeology. Every linear map from E to F is smooth. In other words, if E is fine, L∞ (E, F) = L(E, F). In particular, if both E to F are fine vector spaces, every linear isomorphism from E to F is a smooth linear isomorphism.
86
3. DIFFEOLOGICAL VECTOR SPACES
PN PROOF. Let (P ↾ V)(r) = α=1 λ α (r)vα be a local expression of some plot P of E. PN Let A ∈ L(E, F), thus we have (A ◦ P ↾ V)(r) = α=1 λ α (r)A(vα ). Since A(vα ) ∈ F for each α, P is a plot of the fine diffeology of F, thus a plot of any vector space diffeology. Hence, the linear map A is smooth, and L(E, F) ⊂ L∞ (E, F). The converse inclusion is a part of the definition. □ 3.10. The fine linear category. Thanks to (art. 3.9) the fine diffeological spaces define a subcategory of the linear diffeological category (art. 3.3), let us denote it by {FineLinear}. The objects of this category are all vector spaces, for the field K. According to the above proposition (art. 3.9), the morphisms of this category are just the linear maps. Hence, the fine linear category coincides with the usual linear category over K. In other words, the functor from {Linear} to {FineLinear}, which associates with every vector space the same space equipped with the fine diffeology, is full and faithful. 3.11. Injections of fine diffeological vector spaces. Let E and E′ be two Kvector spaces equipped with the fine diffeology. Every linear injection f : E 7→ E′ is an induction. In particular, every subspace F ⊂ E, where E is a fine diffeological vector space, inherits from E the fine diffeology. PROOF. The injection f : E → E′ is linear, thus it is smooth (art. 3.9). Let us check now that if a parametrization P : U → E is such that f ◦ P is a plot of E′ , then P is a plot of E (art. 1.29). Let r0 ∈ U be some point, there exist an open neighborhood V of r0 , an injection j : Kn → E′ , and a smooth parametrization ϕ : V → Kn such that f ◦ P ↾ V = j ◦ ϕ (art. 3.8). Since f ◦ P ↾ V takes its values in f (E), j(val(ϕ)) ⊂ f (E). Let us denote by H ⊂ Kn the vector space spanned by val(ϕ), that is, the smallest vector subspace of Kn containing val(ϕ). Since j is linear, j(val(ϕ)) ⊂ f (E) implies j(H) ⊂ f (E). Now, let B : Km → H be a linear isomorphism (a basis of H), let ϕ′ = B −1 ◦ ϕ and j ′ = j ◦ B. Thus, f ◦ P ↾ V = j ′ ◦ ϕ′ , where ϕ′ is a smooth parametrization in Km and j ′ is a linear injection from Km in f (E). Since f is injective and val( j ′ ) ⊂ f (E), j ′′ = f −1 ◦ j ′ is an injection from Km into E. Thus, f ◦ P ↾ V = j ′ ◦ ϕ′ implies P ↾ V = j ′′ ◦ ϕ′ . Hence, P is a plot of the fine diffeology of E. Therefore, f is an induction. □ 3.12. Functional diffeology between fine spaces. Let E and E′ be two fine vector spaces over K. The functional diffeology (art. 1.57) of the space of linear maps L∞ (E, E′ ) = L(E, E′ ) is characterized as follows. (♣) If E and F are finite dimensional spaces, dim(E) = n and dim(F) = m, a parametrization P : U → L(E, F) is a plot of the functional diffeology if and only if the coefficients Pi, j of the matrix associated with P, for some basis E = {ei }ni=1 of E
FINE DIFFEOLOGY ON VECTOR SPACES
87
∞ and F = {f j }m (U, K), j=1 of F, are smooth parametrizations of K. Briefly, Pi, j ∈ C for all i = 1 · · · n and j = 1 · · · m.
(♠) More generally, for two spaces E and F of any dimensions, a parametrization P : U → L(E, E′ ) is a plot for the functional diffeology if and only if, for all r0 ∈ U and for all vector subspaces F ⊂ E of finite dimension, there exist an open neighborhood V of r0 , and a vector subspace of finite dimension F′ ⊂ E′ such that the two following conditions are satisfied: 1. For all r ∈ V, the linear map P(r) ↾ F belongs to L(F, F′ ). 2. The parametrization r 7→ P(r) ↾ F, restricted to V, is a plot of L(F, F′ ). NOTE. Thanks to (♣), considering the second condition of (♠), the parametrization r 7→ P(r) ↾ F is a plot of L(F, F′ ) if and only if each coefficient of the associated matrix is a smooth parametrization in K, for some bases of F and F′ . PROOF. (♣) Every basis of a finite dimensional fine vector space is a smooth isomorphism; see Exercise 67, p. 89. Hence, the question is reduced to the functional diffeology of L(Kn , Km ), where Kn and Km are equipped with the smooth diffeology. Let P : U → L(Kn , Km ) be a plot of the functional diffeology. By definition, for any vector ei , i = 1 · · · n, of the canonical basis of Kn , the parametrization r 7→ Pn P(r)(ei ) = j=1 Pi, j (r)f j , where f j is the jth vector of the canonical basis of Km , is smooth. But the parametrization Pi, j is the composite of r 7→ P(r)(ei ) with the jth projection from Km to K, which is smooth, by definition of the smooth diffeology of Km . Hence, the parametrizations Pi, j are smooth. Conversely, let P : U → L(Kn , Km ) be a parametrization such that all the components Pi, j of P, for the canonical basis of Kn and Km , are smooth. Let Q : V → Kn be a plot Pn of Kn . By definition of the smooth diffeology, Q : s 7→ i=1 ϕi (s)ei , where the ϕi are smooth. Thus, for all (r, s) ∈ U × V: P(r)(Q(s))
= = =
Pn P(r)( i=1 ϕi (s)ei ) Pn Pm i=1 ϕi (s) j=1 Pi, j (r)f j Pm j=1 ψ j (r, s)f j
= = &
Pn
i=1 ϕi (s)P(r)(ei ) Pm Pn j=1 i=1 ϕi (s)Pi, j (r)f j Pn ψ j (r, s) = i=1 ϕi (s)Pi, j (r).
Since the ψ j are smooth, the parametrization (r, s) 7→ P(r)(Q(s)) is a plot of Km . Therefore P is smooth. Let us now consider (♠). Let P : U → L(E, E′ ) be a plot for the functional diffeology. Let us show that it satisfies the condition of the proposition. Let F ⊂ E be a vector subspace of finite dimension. Let (u1 , . . . , um ) be a basis of F. Let r0 ∈ U, by definition of the functional diffeology, for every integer k = 1 · · · m, the map r 7→ P(r)(uk ) is a plot of E′ . So, there exist an open neighborhood Vk of r0 , a finite
88
3. DIFFEOLOGICAL VECTOR SPACES
set of indices A k , a family (λ k,α )α∈A k of smooth parametrizations of K, a family (w k,α )α∈A k of vectors of E, such that, for all r ∈ Vk , X P(r)(uk ) = λ k,α (r)w k,α . α∈A k
Tm where ck ∈ Km , for all r ∈ V = k=1 Vk , we have X X m m m X X P(r)(u) = P(r) ck uk = ck P(r)(uk ) = ck λ k,α (r)w k,α .
Hence, for all u =
Pm
k=1 ck uk ,
k=1
k=1 α∈A k
k=1
Sm Let F be the subspace of E spanned by the vectors k=1 {w k,α }α∈A k . Hence, for every u ∈ F, P(r)(u) ∈ F′ , that is, P(r)(F) ⊂ F′ , for all r ∈ V. The first condition of (♠) is checked. Now, let (v1 , . . . , vn ) be a basis of F′ , such that for every integer Pn j k = 1 · · · m and every α ∈ A k , w k,α = j=1 w k,α v j . Replacing w k,α by this expression, we get X X m m X n X j P(r) ck uk = ck λ k,α (r) w k,α v j ′
′
k=1 α∈A k
k=1
=
n X m X X j=1
k=1 α∈A k
j=1
j ck λ k,α (r)w k,α v j .
Hence, defining
ϕ j (r) =
m X X k=1 α∈A k
j
ck λ k,α (r)w k,α , we get P(r)(u) =
n X
ϕ j (r)v j ,
j=1
where the (ϕ j )nj=1 are a family of smooth parametrizations of K defined on V. This expression of P(r) clearly shows that r 7→ P(r) ↾ F is a plot of the functional diffeology of L(F, F′ ). Indeed, choosing for u successively each vector of a basis of F, the last expression shows that the components of P(r) ↾ F are smooth parametrizations of K, which is the condition, for finite dimensional fine spaces, to be a plot of the functional diffeology. Hence, we proved the direct way of the proposition. Conversely, let us assume that the parametrization P satisfies the conditions 1 and 2 of (♠), and let us show that P is a plot for the functional diffeology. Let us consider a plot Q : V → E. By definition of the fine diffeology, for all s0 ∈ V there exist an open neighborhood W of s0 , a finite set of indices A, a family (λ α )α∈A of smooth parametrizations of K defined on V, and a family (vα )α∈A of vectors of E, such that P for every s ∈ V, Q(s) = α∈A λ α (s)vα . Let F ⊂ E be the vector subspace spanned by the vectors vα . Hence, for all r0 ∈ U, there exist an open neighborhood U′ of r0 and a vector subspace F′ ⊂ E′ such that P(r)(F) ⊂ F′ , for all r ∈ U′ . Thus, for P P ′ all (r, s) ∈ U′ × W, P(r)(Q(s)) = P(r) α∈A λ α (s)vα = α∈A λ α (s)P(r)(vα ) ∈ F . Then, since the parametrization r 7→ P(r) ↾ F is a plot of the functional diffeology, the parametrization P · Q : (r, s) 7→ P(r)(Q(s)) is a smooth parametrization in
EUCLIDEAN AND HERMITIAN DIFFEOLOGICAL VECTOR SPACES
89
F′ ⊂ E′ . Thus, P · Q is a smooth parametrization in E′ , because any finite subspace is embedded in E′ . Therefore, P is a plot of the functional diffeology of L(E, E′ ). This completes the proof of the proposition. □ Exercises
✎ EXERCISE 66 (Smooth is fine diffeology). Check that the smooth diffeology of Kn is the fine diffeology. ✎ EXERCISE 67 (Finite dimensional fine spaces). Let E be a Kvector space of di
mension n, equipped with the fine diffeology. Let B = {ei }ni=1 be a basis of E. Show Pn that every plot P : U → E writes P : r 7→ i=1 ϕi (r)ei , for some ϕi ∈ C ∞ (U, K). So, Pn a basis B, regarded as the isomorphism B : (u1 , . . . , un ) 7→ i=1 ui ei , from Kn to E, where Kn is equipped with the standard diffeology, is a smooth isomorphism. Any fine vector space of dimension n is isomorphic to the standard Kn .
✎ EXERCISE 68 (The fine topology). Let E be a fine diffeological vector space.
Show that a subset Ω ⊂ E is Dopen (art. 2.8) if and only if its intersection with any finite dimensional vector space F ⊂ E is open in F. This topology is the socalled finite topology, introduced in functional analysis by Andrei Tychonoff [Tyc35].
Euclidean and Hermitian Diffeological Vector Spaces The notions of Euclidean or Hermitian structures on diffeological vector spaces are natural extensions of the standard definitions. They are used in particular in the diffeological descriptions of the infinite sphere (art. 4.9) and the infinite projective space (art. 4.11). 3.13. Euclidean diffeological vector spaces. Let E be a real diffeological vector space, and let (X, Y) 7→ X · Y be an Euclidean product, that is, a map from E × E to R which is Symmetric Bilinear Positive Nondegenerate
: : : :
X · Y = Y · X, X · (αY + α′ Y′ ) = αX · Y + α′ X · Y′ , X · X ≥ 0, X · X = 0 ⇔ X = 0,
where X, Y and Y′ are vectors, and α and α′ are real numbers. If the Euclidean product is smooth, the pair (E, ·) is an Euclidean diffeological vector space. 3.14. Hermitian diffeological vector spaces. Let H be a complex diffeological vector space, and let (X, Y) 7→ X · Y be a Hermitian product, that is, a map from
90
3. DIFFEOLOGICAL VECTOR SPACES
H × H to C which is Sesquilinear Bilinear Positive Nondegenerate
: : : :
X · Y = (Y · X)∗ , X · (αY + α′ Y′ ) = αX · Y + α′ X · Y′ , X · X ≥ 0, X · X = 0 ⇔ X = 0,
where X, Y and Y′ are vectors, α, α′ are complex numbers, and the star ∗ denotes the complex conjugation. The Hermitian product is also denoted sometimes by 〈X  Y〉 = X · Y. If the Hermitian product is smooth, then (H, ·) is a Hermitian diffeological vector space. 3.15. The fine standard Hilbert space. The purpose of this paragraph is to introduce the fine diffeology on the standard Hilbert space, and some related constructions which will be used further for the study of a few diffeological infinite dimensional manifolds. Let HR be the real vector space of squaresummable real sequences, ª § ∞ X ∞ 2 HR = X = (X k )k=1 X k ∈ R, k = 1, . . . , ∞, and Xk < ∞ . k=1
The space of real numbers is naturally equipped with the smooth diffeology, and the space HR is equipped with the fine diffeology (art. 3.7). The usual Euclidean product is defined on HR by X · X′ =
∞ X
X k X′k , for all X, X′ ∈ HR .
k=1
Hence, the pair (HR , ·) is a fine Euclidean diffeological vector space (see Exercise 69, p. 92). We shall denote as usual, by ∥ · ∥, the norm associated with the Euclidean product, that is, p ∥X∥ = X · X, for all X ∈ HR . We shall denote by prℓ the ℓth projection from HR to R, prℓ (X) = X ℓ ∈ R, ℓ = 1, . . . , ∞, for all X = (X k )∞ k=1 ∈ HR . Since R and HR are fine vector spaces and prℓ is linear, prℓ is smooth (art. 3.9). We shall denote by eℓ the only vector of HR defined by prℓ (eℓ ) = 1, and prℓ (ek ) = 0 if k ̸= ℓ. We shall call the family {ek }∞ k=1 the canonical basis of HR . Also note that ¯ℓ : X 7→ eℓ · X. prℓ = e
EUCLIDEAN AND HERMITIAN DIFFEOLOGICAL VECTOR SPACES
91
Now, what has been said for R can be transposed to C. Let HC be the set of squaresummable complex sequences, § ª ∞ X ∞ ∗ HC = Z = (Z k )k=1 Z k ∈ C, k = 1, . . . , ∞, and Zk Zk < ∞ , k=1
where z ∗ denotes the complex conjugate of the complex number z. The space of complex numbers C is naturally equipped with the standard diffeology, and the space HC is equipped with the fine diffeology (art. 3.7). The usual sesquilinear product is defined on HC by Z · Z′ =
∞ X
Z∗k Z′k , for all Z, Z′ ∈ HC .
k=1
The sesquilinear map (Z, Z′ ) 7→ Z · Z′ is a Hermitian product. Thus, the pair (H , ·) is a fine Hermitian diffeological vector space over C (see Exercise 69, p. 92). The norm associated with the Hermitian product is defined by p ∥Z∥ = Z · Z, for all Z ∈ H . We preserve the notation prℓ for the ℓth projection from HC to C, prℓ (Z) = Zℓ ∈ C, ℓ = 1, . . . , ∞, for all Z = (Z k )∞ k=1 ∈ H . We also preserve the notation eℓ for the only vector of HC defined by prℓ (eℓ ) = 1 and prk (eℓ ) = 0 if k ̸= ℓ. Note that prℓ (Z) = eℓ · Z, but Z · eℓ = Z∗ℓ . These definitions and constructions satisfy the following: 1. The diffeological vector space HC , regarded as a R vector space, is still a fine diffeological vector space. 2 The map fold from HR to HC , defined by ∞ fold : (X k )∞ k=1 7→ (Z k )k=1 , with Z k = X 2k−1 + iX 2k , k = 1, . . . , ∞,
is a smooth Risomorphism, where HC is regarded as a Rvector space. Its inverse unfold is given by ¨ X 2k−1 = ℜ(Z k ), ∞ ∞ unfold : (Z k )k=1 7→ (X k )k=1 with X 2k = ℑ(Z k ), where ℜ and ℑ denote the real and imaginary parts. Moreover, the map fold is an isometry, that is, ∥ fold(X)∥2 = ∥X∥2 , for all X ∈ HR . 3. The natural injection j : HR → HC , defined by the inclusion X k 7→ Z k = X k + i × 0 of R into C, is an embedding.
92
3. DIFFEOLOGICAL VECTOR SPACES
PROOF. 1. Let P : U → HC be a plot of the fine diffeology, that is, P(r) =loc P α α α∈A λ α (r)Z , where A is a finite set of indices; the Z belong to HC , and the λ α are smooth parametrizations in C. Defining aα and bα by λ α (r) = aα (r) + i bα (r), we P P get P(r) =loc α∈A aα (r)Zα + α∈A bα (r) × (iZα ). Since the iZα are still in HC , the P plot P writes locally P(r) =loc β∈B ϕβ (r)Z′β , where B is a finite family of indices, the Z′β belong to HC and the ϕβ are smooth parametrizations in R. Therefore, as a real vector space, HC is still a fine diffeological vector space. 2. Since HC is fine, regarded as a real vector space, any linear isomorphism is a smooth isomorphism (art. 3.10). Then, it is a simple verification to check that fold and unfold are inverse linear isomorphisms one of each other, and are isometries. 3. Let us check that the injection j : HR → HC is an embedding. First of all, since j is a linear injection it is an induction (art. 3.11). Now, let ℜ : HC → HR be the map Z 7→ X = ℜ(Z) defined by ℜ(Z)k = ℜ(Z k ). Note that the subspace HR is just the pointwise ℜfixed points set: HR = {Z ∈ HC  ℜ(Z) = Z}. Now, ℜ is Rlinear, thus smooth (art. 3.9), thus Dcontinuous (art. 2.9). Moreover, ℜ is surjective over HR , so, for any Dopen A ∈ HR , A′ = ℜ−1 (A) is Dopen, and since Z′ ∈ HR means ℜ(Z′ ) = Z′ , A′ ∩ H = {Z′ ∈ HR  ℜ(Z′ ) ∈ A} = A. □ Exercises
✎ EXERCISE 69 (Fine Hermitian vector spaces). Show that every real (or complex) fine diffeological vector space E (art. 3.7), equipped with any Euclidean (or Hermitian) product, is an Euclidean (or Hermitian) diffeological vector space. ✎ EXERCISE 70 (Finite dimensional Hermitian spaces). Show that there exists one and only one structure of Euclidean (or Hermitian) diffeological vector space of finite dimension, that is, the fine structure. Compare with the remark of (art. 3.2).
✎ EXERCISE 71 (Topology of the norm and Dtopology). The topology of the norm of a Hermitian diffeological space E does not coincide necessarily with the Dtopology. Show that the topology of the norm is finer than the Dtopology.
✎ EXERCISE 72 (Banach’s diffeology). Let E be a Banach space, that is, a complete vector space for a given norm ∥ · ∥. Let us recall that a continuous map ϕ : Ω → E, defined on an ndomain, is said to be of class C 1 if there exists a continuous linear map D( f ) : Ω → L(Rn , E), such that: D( f )(x)(v) = lim
t →0
f (x + t v) − f (x) , for all v ∈ Rn . t
The map f is said to be of class C k , k > 1, if f is of class C 1 and if D( f ) is of class C k−1 . The map f is said to be of class C ∞ if it is of class C k for all k ∈ N; see
EUCLIDEAN AND HERMITIAN DIFFEOLOGICAL VECTOR SPACES
93
[Die70a]. Check that the set of parametrizations in E which are of class C ∞ for the norm is a diffeology. We shall call it the Banach diffeology of (E, ∥ · ∥). 1) Show that, for the Banach diffeology, E is a diffeological vector space. 2) Verify that the category of Banach spaces, with morphisms the smooth maps for the Frechet derivative (Banach smooth maps), is a full subcategory of diffeological vector spaces. Use the following theorem due to Richard Hain (see also [Fro81]). THEOREM [Hai79]. For any two Banach spaces E and F, a map f : E → F is Banachsmooth if and only if it takes smooth kpaths in E to kpaths in F.
✎ EXERCISE 73 (HC is isomorphic to HR × HR ). With the notations of (art. 3.15), check that the map ψ : HR × HR 7→ HC defined by ψ(X, Y) = X + iY is a smooth isometry, that is, a smooth isomorphism such that ∥ψ(X, Y)∥2 = ∥X∥2 + ∥Y∥2 .
CHAPTER 4
Modeling Spaces, Manifolds, etc. Manifolds are the main objects of differential geometry as we know it. It is not necessary to develop the whole theory of diffeological spaces just to introduce or study manifolds. However, manifolds can be found again as a full subcategory of the category {Diffeology}, which is reassuring. Roughly speaking, manifolds are diffeological spaces which look like locally real vector spaces. Diffeology gives another insight into this respectable domain: manifolds are not any more regarded as sets equipped with a manifold structure, but rather as diffeological spaces whose diffeology satisfies the special property to be generated by local diffeomorphisms with a given vector space. This rediscovery of manifolds, through diffeology, suggests some generalizations. First of all, we can replace, in the definition of a manifold, real vector spaces by any diffeological vector space (art. 3.1), and we get a larger category of manifolds which contains not only the usual ones, but also infinite dimensional manifolds, which find, that way, a formal framework for their study. If this generalization brings some satisfaction — many infinite dimensional spaces become then manifolds, for example the infinite projective space (art. 4.11), but not only — it also raises new questions. For example, if we have a notion of orientability for diffeological spaces of finite dimension (art. 6.44), what about orientability of infinite dimensional diffeological manifolds? This is not the only question, and it may not be the most relevant. With infinite dimension spaces things are more subtle, and the usual concepts need to be revisited with care if we want to preserve their relevance. On the other hand, this conception suggests the notion of locally modeled spaces, I mean, diffeological spaces which are locally diffeomorphic to some members of a family of diffeological models. For manifolds, the family of modeling spaces is usually reduced to a single given diffeological vector space, but diffeological orbifolds (art. 4.17) are defined as diffeological spaces, modeled on the family of the quotients of real spaces by a finite subgroup of its diffeomorphisms.
95
96
4. MODELING SPACES, MANIFOLDS, ETC.
Standard Manifolds, the Diffeological Way We should begin with the general definition of diffeological manifolds (art. 4.7), but, to preserve the intuition of the geometer, I chose to begin with an presentation on usual manifolds — which are regarded as special cases of diffeological spaces — and then to introduce the more general concept of manifolds modeled on general diffeological vector spaces. 4.1. Manifolds as diffeologies. Let M be a diffeological space, M is said to be a manifold of dimension n, or an nmanifold if and only if M is locally diffeomorphic at each point to Rn . This means precisely that, for each point m ∈ M, there exist a local diffeomorphism F : Rn ⊃ U → M (art. 2.5), and a point r ∈ U such that F(r) = m. Such local diffeomorphisms are called charts of M. The set of all the charts of M is called the saturated atlas of M. Speaking in terms of diffeologies, we shall also say that the diffeology D of M is a manifold diffeology. Manifolds form the subcategory {Manifolds} of the category {Diffeology}. 4.2. Local modeling of manifolds. The previous definition of manifolds (art. 4.1) can be formulated again in terms of generating family (art. 1.66). Let M be a diffeological space. 1. A family A of local diffeomorphisms (art. 2.5), from Rn to M, such that [ val(F) = M F∈A
is a generating family of the diffeology of M. 2. The diffeological space M is an nmanifold (art. 4.1) if and only if there exists a generating family A of M, made of local diffeomorphisms from Rn to M. NOTE 1. If M is a manifold, any generating family A , made of local diffeomorphisms of M, is called an atlas of M. The elements of A are called the charts of the atlas. Obviously, if M is a manifold, the set of all local diffeomorphisms from Rn to M is a generating family of the diffeology of M. This set is the saturated atlas of the manifold M (art. 4.1). NOTE 2. An nmanifold is a diffeological space of constant dimension n, since local diffeomorphisms preserve the dimension (art. 2.22). Conversely, if the dimension of a manifold is n (art. 1.78), then it is an nmanifold. This is why we sometimes use the wording ndimensional manifold in place of nmanifold. PROOF. 1. Let us assume that A is a family of local diffeomorphisms from Rn S to M such that F∈A val(F) = M. Thus, M is locally diffeomorphic to Rn at each point, since each point m of M is in the set of values of a local diffeomorphism. Let us choose, for each point m ∈ M, a local diffeomorphism F : U → M such that
STANDARD MANIFOLDS, THE DIFFEOLOGICAL WAY
97
F(0) = m, where U is an open neighborhood of 0 ∈ Rn . Such local diffeomorphisms exist since we have just to compose any local diffeomorphism F which maps r to m with the translation mapping 0 to r. Now, let A be the set of all these chosen local diffeomorphisms, where m runs over M. Let us check that they form a generating family of the diffeology of M. Let P : V → M be a plot and r ∈ V, and let m = P(r) and F ∈ A such that F : U → M, F(0) = m. Let Q = F−1 ◦ P ↾ W, where W = P−1 (F(U)). Since F is a local diffeomorphism, F(U) is Dopen (art. 2.10), and because P is Dcontinuous (art. 2.9), W is a domain. Thus, Q is a smooth local lift of P along F. Hence, any plot of M can be lifted along a member of the family A , and this is the criterion for a generating family (art. 1.68). Hence, the diffeology of M is generated by A . 2. Let us assume that the diffeology of M is generated by a family A of local diffeomorphisms with Rn . Let m ∈ M be any point, the constant 0parametrization m : 0 7→ m is a plot. Thus, by definition of generating families (art. 1.66), there exist an element F : U → M of A and a point r ∈ U such that m = F ◦ r, where r(0) = r. Hence, there exist a local diffeomorphism F : Rn ⊃ U → M and a point r ∈ U such that F(r) = m. Therefore, M is a manifold (art. 4.1). The converse is a consequence of 1. If M is an nmanifold, it is locally diffeomorphic at each point to Rn . So, there exists a family A of local diffeomorphisms from Rn to M such that S F∈A val(F) = M. Therefore, A is a generating family of the diffeology of M. Now, since nmanifolds are locally diffeomorphic to Rn , their dimension, at every point, is the same dimension as an ndomain (art. 2.24). But the dimension of an ndomain is constant and equal to n (art. 1.80). Hence, the dimension of an nmanifold is constant and equal to n. Conversely, the dimension map of a manifold is constant and equal to the dimension of the domains of its charts, as a direct consequence of the definition. Since dim(Rn ) = dim(Rm ) if and only if n = m, a manifold has dimension n if and only if it is an nmanifold. □ 4.3. Manifolds, the classical way. A full presentation on manifolds, in classical differential geometry context, can be found in every book of differential geometry; see for example [Bou82], [BeGo72], [Die70c], [Doc76], [DNF82]. Let us just summarize the basic definitions. We choose here the Bourbaki definition [Bou82], but we make the inverse convention, made also by some other authors, to regard charts defined from real domains to a manifold M, rather than from subsets of M into real domains. (♣) Let M be a nonempty set. A chart of M is a bijection F defined on an ndomain U to a subset of M. The dimension n is a part of the data. Let F : U → M and F′ : U′ → M be two charts of M. The charts F and F′ are said to be compatible if and only if the following conditions are fulfilled:
98
4. MODELING SPACES, MANIFOLDS, ETC.
(a) The sets F−1 (F′ (U′ )) and F′−1 (F(U)) are open. (b) The two maps, each one the inverse of the other, F′−1 ◦ F : F−1 (F′ (U′ )) → F′−1 (F(U)) and F−1 ◦ F′ : F′−1 (F(U)) → F−1 (F′ (U′ )), are either empty or smooth. They are called transition maps. An atlas is a set of charts, compatible twobytwo, such that the union of the values is the whole M. Two atlases are said to be compatible if their union is still an atlas. This relation is an equivalence relation. A structure of manifold on M is the choice of an equivalence class of atlases or, which is equivalent, the choice of a saturated atlas. Once a structure of manifold is chosen for M, every compatible chart is called a chart of the manifold. (♥) The simplest example of a classical manifold is a real domain U, with the structure of a manifold given by the atlas reduced to the identity {1U }. (♦) Let M and M′ be two classical manifolds. A map f : M → M′ is said to be infinitely differentiable, or of class C ∞ , or smooth, if and only if, for every pair of charts F : U → M and F′ : U′ → M′ , the following conditions are fulfilled: (a) The set ( f ◦ F)−1 (F′ (U′ )) is open. (b) The parametrization F′−1 ◦ f ◦ F : ( f ◦ F)−1 (F′ (U′ )) → U′ is either empty or smooth. The composition of smooth maps between classical manifolds is again a smooth map. Classical manifolds, together with smooth maps, form a category whose isomorphisms are called diffeomorphisms. A diffeomorphism f from a manifold to another is a smooth bijection such that f −1 is smooth. That was for the classical way. Now, manifolds are naturally embedded in the category of diffeological spaces, thanks to the functor defined as follows. (A) Let M be a classical manifold. Let D be the set of all the parametrizations P : U → M which are smooth according to (♦), where U is regarded as the manifold described by (♥). Then, D is a manifold diffeology for which any atlas of M, according to (♣), is a generating family (art. 4.1). This diffeology is the canonical diffeology associated with M. (B) Conversely, let M be a manifold and let A be any atlas generating the diffeology D of M, according to the definitions of (art. 4.1). Then, A is an atlas, according to (♣), for M. The atlas A gives to M the canonical structure of classical manifold, associated with D. (C) The constructions (A) and (B) are the inverse of each other. They define a full faithful functor from the classical category of manifolds to the category {Diffeology}. The image of this functor is the category {Manifolds} defined in (art. 4.1).
STANDARD MANIFOLDS, THE DIFFEOLOGICAL WAY
99
F
U q
q
f M
FIGURE 4.1. A smooth map between manifolds. Therefore, there is no need to distinguish between these two classes of objects. We shall regard finite dimensional real manifolds, always, as defined by (art. 4.1). One can say then, that diffeology is a generalization of the notion of manifolds, but reducing diffeology to be just a generalization of manifolds would be misleading. PROOF. (A) Let M be a classical manifold, and let A be an atlas of M according to (♣). Let D be the set of all the smooth parametrizations of M, according to (♦). The domains of these parametrizations are regarded as manifolds, according to (♥). Let us prove the three axioms of diffeology: D1. Let m ∈ M and m : r → m be a constant parametrization. Let F be a chart of A such that F(x) = m. Since F is injective, m lifts along F by the constant parametrization r 7→ x. Since constant parametrizations of domains are smooth, D contains the constant parametrizations of M. D2. Let P : V → M be a parametrization which satisfies locally the condition (♦). For all r ∈ V there exists an open neighborhood W of r such that P ↾ W is a smooth parametrization, according to (♦). In other words, for every chart ϕ of W, for every chart F : U → M, (P ◦ ϕ)−1 (F(U)) is open, and F−1 ◦ P ◦ ϕ : (P ◦ ϕ)−1 (F(U)) → U is smooth. But charts of domains are just local diffeomorphisms (art. 2.5), thus ϕ can be simply replaced by the inclusion jW : W ,→ V. These conditions reduce then to the following one: there exists an open neighborhood W of r such that
100
4. MODELING SPACES, MANIFOLDS, ETC.
(P ↾ W)−1 (F(U)) is open and F−1 ◦ (P ↾ W) : (P ↾ W)−1 (F(U)) → U is either empty or smooth. But this is clearly a local condition. Therefore, if P belongs locally to D, then it belongs to D. D3. Let P : V → M be a parametrization. We have seen just above that P belongs to D if only if, for any chart F : U → M, P−1 (F(U)) is open and F−1 ◦ P : P−1 (F(U)) → U is either empty or smooth. Now, let Q : W → V be a smooth parametrization. Let F : U → M be a chart. Since Q is a smooth parametrization and P−1 (F(U)) is open, Q−1 (P−1 (F(U))) is open, that is, (P ◦ Q)−1 (F(U)) is open. Then, since Q is smooth and F−1 ◦ P : P−1 (F(U)) → U is either empty or smooth, F−1 ◦ P ◦ Q : (P ◦ Q)−1 (F(U)) → U is either empty or smooth. Therefore, if P belongs to D and Q is a smooth parametrization in the domain of P, then P ◦ Q belongs to D. In order to complete the first point, it remains to check that any atlas A of M is a generating family of D. Let P : U → M be a plot of M, that is, P ∈ D. Let r ∈ U, there exist a chart F of M and a point x ∈ def(F) such that F(x) = P(r), let U′ = P−1 (val(F)). Since P belongs to D, U′ is an open neighborhood of r, and P′ = P ↾ U′ is still a plot of M. But val(P′ ) ⊂ val(F) implies that Q = F−1 ◦ P′ ∈ C ∞ (U′ , def(F)). Thus, Q is a smooth parametrization in def(F) and F ◦ Q = P ↾ U′ . This is the condition to be a generating family of the diffeology D. (B) Let M be a manifold, and let A be any atlas generating the diffeology D of M, according to the definitions of (art. 4.1). Since every element F of A is a local diffeomorphism (art. 2.5), F is an injection defined on a domain. Since compositions of local diffeomorphisms are either empty or local diffeomorphisms, the transition maps associated with the charts of the atlas A are smooth. Therefore, A defines on M a structure of classical manifold. (C) Let M be a set, A and A ′ two maximal atlases according to (♣), defining the same diffeology D. Every chart F ∈ A is a local diffeomorphism for D, as well as every chart F′ ∈ A ′ . Since the composite of two local diffeomorphisms for a given diffeology is either empty or again a local diffeomorphism (art. 2.5), F′−1 ◦ F, defined on F−1 (val(F′ )), is either empty or a local diffeomorphism between real domains, necessarily of the same dimension. But this is the condition for F and F′ to be compatible. Since A and A ′ are maximal, A = A ′ , and the two classical manifold structures are equal. Thus, the map defined in (A) is injective, and clearly surjective, thanks to (B). Therefore, it defines a onetoone correspondence between the objects of the category of classical manifolds and the objects of the category {Manifolds} defined in (art. 4.1). Then, according to (A) and (B) the saturated atlas of a given classical ndimensional manifold M is the set of local diffeomorphisms from Rn to M, regarded as a diffeological space. Therefore, (A) and (B) are the inverse of each other.
STANDARD MANIFOLDS, THE DIFFEOLOGICAL WAY
!
t
101
S
j
y = t3
0
x = t2
FIGURE 4.2. The semicubic y 2 = x 3 . Finally, let us check that, given two classical manifolds M and M′ , the smooth maps from M to M′ , according to (♦), are exactly the smooth maps with M and M′ regarded as diffeological spaces. In fact, since the charts for a given classical ndimensional manifold are just local diffeomorphisms with Rn , with respect to the associated diffeology, and since the associated diffeology is precisely generated by these local diffeomorphisms, this proposition is a direct application of the criterion (art. 1.73); see also Figure 4.1. Therefore, the functor, mapping a classical manifold to its associated diffeology, is a full faithful functor to {Manifolds}. □ 4.4. Submanifolds of a diffeological space. The definition of submanifolds follows immediately the definition of manifolds (art. 4.1). Let X be a diffeological space and let M be a subset of X. If M, equipped with the subset diffeology (art. 1.33), is a manifold, we shall say that M is a submanifold of X. NOTE 1. The vocabulary used here “M is a submanifold of X”, can lead to confusion since X itself is not necessarily a manifold (like in the example below). But we have no real choice. We could say “M is a manifold in X” but this is longer, it is not compatible with the standard vocabulary when X is itself a manifold, and it attenuates the fact that M is regarded as equipped with the subset diffeology. So, we choose to say “submanifold” even if the ambient space is not itself a manifold. We have just to be aware of that, and cautious. NOTE 2. By definition, a submanifold is always induced, M is a subspace of X, the inclusion M ,→ X is an induction. It can also be embedded — if the inclusion of M into X is moreover an embedding (art. 2.13).
102
4. MODELING SPACES, MANIFOLDS, ETC.
EXAMPLE 1. The sphere (Exercise 18, p. 24) is an example of a embedded submanifold, while the irrational solenoid (Exercise 58, p. 71) is again an example of submanifold, but not embedded. In Exercise 57, p. 71, we have seen that the group GL(n, R) is embedded in Diff(Rn ), equipped with the functional diffeology. Since the group GL(n, R) is a manifold for the subset diffeology, equivalent to the open subset of the n × n matrices with nonzero determinant, GL(n, R) is an embedded submanifold of Diff(Rn ). EXAMPLE 2. The semicubic y 2 = x 3 in R2 (Figure 4.2) is a counterintuitive example of a diffeological submanifold. 1 This is a corollary of the Joris theorem [Jor82] that states, in particular, that if a map t 7→ f (t) is such that f (t)2 and f (t)3 are smooth, then f is smooth. Therefore, the smooth injection j : t 7→ (t 2 , t 3 ) is an induction from R into R2 . Its image S, the semicubic, is then a submanifold of R2 diffeomorphic to R, in spite of the cusp at 0. Moreover, j is an embedding (art. 2.13): S, equipped with the subset diffeology, is an embedded submanifold in R2 , but not smoothly embedded (art. 2.13, Note 2). The nature of the singularity of the cusp does not lie in the induction itself but in its relationship with the ambient space: a local diffeomorphism of R2 preserving the semicubic S would fix the cusp, while a local diffeomorphism of S would send the cusp anyywhere; see [PIZ22c]. PROOF. That concerns only the semicubic example. Clearly j : t 7→ (x = t 2 , y = t 3 ) p is smooth, and injective: t = 3 y. Let r 7→ P(r) = (x(r), y(r)) be a plot in R2 with value in S. Then, j −1 ◦ P(r) = t(r) such that r 7→ t(r)2 and r 7→ t(r)3 are smooth. To apply Joris theorem we need to come back to a map from R to R. We can use Boman’s theorem that states that r 7→ t(r) is smooth at a point r0 if and only if, the composite s 7→ r(s) 7→ t(r(s)) is smooth for any smooth path s 7→ r(s), passing through r0 at s0 [Bom67]; see (art. 1.4). But, for each such smooth path, the composite s 7→ t(r(s)) is smooth, thanks indeed to Joris theorem. Thus, r 7→ P(r) is smooth. Now, assume that the embedding is smooth and let φ : t 7→ t + 1 regarded as a local diffeomorphism of R mapping 0 to 1. Suppose that there exists a local difffeomorphism ϕ of R2 that fix S and maps j(0) = (0, 0) to j(1) = (1, 1); so, ϕ ◦ j =loc j ◦ φ . The tangent linear map at t = 0 gives D(ϕ)( j(0)) ◦ D( j)(0) = D( j)(φ (0)) ◦ D(φ )(0), that is D(ϕ)(0, 0) ◦ D( j)(0) = D( j)(1) ◦ D(φ )(0), and then 0 = 1, which is absurd. □ 4.5. Immersed submanifolds are not submanifolds? Let N and M be two manifolds, and let j : N → M be an immersion, see Exercise 12, p. 21. Then, the image j(N) is not necessarily a submanifold, because an immersion is not necessarily an induction; see Exercise 59, p. 72. Therefore, if there is a well defined concept of immersion, the concept of “immersed submanifold” is more ambiguous. Immersions 1This was still unknown to me for the first edition. I had to leave this question open.
STANDARD MANIFOLDS, THE DIFFEOLOGICAL WAY
103
do not always have submanifolds as images, and we even know now that a smooth injection can have a submanifold as an image without being an immersion, as proved by the semicubic example. 4.6. Quotients of manifolds. This question is often asked in differential geometry: When is the quotient of a manifold — or more generally, the quotient of a diffeological space — by an equivalence relation, a manifold? There is no simple answer to this question because it depends too much on the nature of the diffeological space and of the equivalence relation. But, in some circumstances, the following characterization can be useful. Let X be a diffeological space, and let ∼ be an equivalence relation defined on X. Let M = X/∼ be the diffeological quotient (art. 1.50). Let π : X → M be the associated projection. The quotient space M is a manifold of dimension n if and only if there exists a family of nplots {ϕi : Ui → X}i∈I , where I is any set of indices, such that the following conditions are fulfilled: 1. For every i ∈ I , the map ϕi : Ui → X is an induction such that π ◦ ϕi is injective. Equivalently, the image of Ui by the induction ϕi cuts each class of the relation ∼ in one point, at most. S 2. The projections of the values of the inductions ϕi cover M = i∈I π ◦ ϕi (Ui ). 3. For every ri ∈ Ui and r j ∈ U j such that π (ϕi (ri )) = π (ϕ j (r j )), there exists a local diffeomorphism ψ, defined on some open neighborhood V of ri to U j , mapping ri to r j , and such that π ◦ ϕ j ◦ ψ = π ◦ (ϕi ↾ V). 4. For every plot P : W → X, for every r ∈ W, there exist an open neighborhood V ⊂ W of r, some index i ∈ I and a plot Q : V → ϕi (Ui ) ⊂ X such that π ◦ P ↾ V = π ◦ Q. If these conditions are satisfied, each map Fi = π ◦ ϕi , with i ∈ I , is a chart of M, and the set A = {Fi }i∈I is an atlas of M. NOTE. The diffeology of the quotient M is well defined as the quotient diffeology of X, there is no choice here. This condition, stated above, answers only this question: Is the quotient diffeology a manifold diffeology? It may be the case, or not. PROOF. Let us assume that the quotient M is a manifold of dimension n. Then there exists a family of local diffeomorphisms from Rn to M which generates the diffeology of M (art. 4.2). Let F : U → M be such a diffeomorphism, and let r ∈ U. Then, since π : X → M is a subduction, there exists a local lift ϕ : V → X such that ϕ ∈ D(V) and π ◦ ϕ = F ↾ V. Let us check that ϕ is an induction, using the criterion (art. 1.31). First of all ϕ is smooth. Since π ◦ ϕ is injective, so is ϕ. Now, let Q : W → ϕ(V) be a plot in X, then π ◦ Q ∈ C (W). Since F is a chart of M, that is, a local diffeomorphism, the composite F−1 ◦ π ◦ Q, restricted to its domain, is smooth. But, π ◦ ϕ = F ↾ V ⇒ ϕ−1 = F−1 ◦ π , where F−1 is restricted to π (ϕ(V)),
104
4. MODELING SPACES, MANIFOLDS, ETC.
i
V
U
P Q
s j
X
i
M
X M
FIGURE 4.3. The quotient is a manifold. thus F−1 ◦ π ◦ Q = ϕ−1 ◦ Q. Hence, ϕ−1 ◦ Q is smooth, and ϕ is an induction. Now, since π ◦ ϕ = F ↾ V, π ◦ ϕ is injective, which means that if ϕ(r) and ϕ(r ′ ) belong to the same equivalence class, then r = r ′ . Then, since for every point m ∈ M there exist a chart F : U → M and a point r ∈ U such that F(r) = m, there exists a family of such local lifts ϕ whose projections π ◦ ϕ cover M. We proved the first and second points. Let us prove the third one. Let us consider such a family {ϕi : Ui → X}i∈I of inductions made of local lifts of charts of M. Let ri ∈ Ui and r j ∈ U j such that ϕi (ri ) = ϕ j (r j ) = m. Let Fi and Fj be two charts of M such that Fi = π ◦ ϕi and Fj = π ◦ ϕ j . Then, Fi (ri ) = Fj (r j ) = m and there exists a local diffeomorphism ψ defined on an open neighborhood of ri such that ψ(ri ) = r j and Fj ◦ ψ = Fi . Hence, π ◦ ϕ j ◦ ψ = π ◦ ϕi , and this is the third point. Finally, let us consider a plot P : W → X, thus π ◦ P is a plot of M. Let r ∈ W and m = π ◦ P(r), there exist a chart Fi : Ui → M, an open neighborhood V ⊂ W of r and a plot P′ : V → Ui such that Fi ◦ P′ = π ◦ P ↾ V. Now, Fi = π ◦ ϕi , then π ◦ ϕi ◦ P′ = π ◦ P ↾ V, denoting by Q = P′ ◦ ϕi : V → ϕi (Ui ) we get π ◦ Q = π ◦ P ↾ V. The fourth point is proved. Thus, we proved that the four points of the proposition are satisfied if the quotient M is a manifold; see Figure 4.3. Let us prove now that if these four points are satisfied, then M is a manifold. Let us define Fi = π ◦ ϕi , Fi is injective and smooth. Let us show that Fi is a local diffeomorphism (art. 2.5). Let P : O → M be a plot, and let r ∈ O such that m = P(r) ∈ Fi (Ui ). Then, there exists a local lift P′ : W → X such that π ◦ P′ = P ↾ W and r ∈ W. Thanks to the fourth point of the proposition, there exist an index j ∈ J , a subset V ⊂ W, and a plot Q : V → ϕ j (U j ) of X such that π ◦P′ ↾ V = π ◦Q. Hence, π ◦Q = P ↾ V and Q(V) ⊂ ϕ j (U j ). Let r j = ϕ−1 j (Q(r)) ∈ U j and ri ∈ Ui such that Fi (ri ) = m. We have m = π ◦ ϕi (ri ) = π ◦ ϕ j (r j ), and thanks to the third condition of the proposition, there exists a local diffeomorphism ψ defined on an open neighborhood of r j , mapping r j to ri and such that π ◦ ϕi ◦ ψ = π ◦ ϕ j , restricted to this neighborhood. Thus, Fi−1 ◦ π ↾ Q(V) = ψ ◦ ϕ−1 j ↾ Q(V), hence Fi−1 ◦ P ↾ V = Fi−1 ◦ π ◦ Q ↾ V = ψ ◦ ϕ−1 ◦ Q. But, ϕ being an induction, ϕ−1 j j j ◦ Q is
DIFFEOLOGICAL MANIFOLDS
105
−1 −1 smooth, and so is ψ ◦ ϕ−1 j ◦Q. Thus, Fi ◦P ↾ V is smooth. Therefore, Fi ◦P is smooth, that is, Fi−1 is smooth. Therefore, Fi is a local diffeomorphism. In conclusion, the set A = {Fi }i∈I is an atlas of M, where Fi = π ◦ ϕi , and M is a nmanifold. □
Exercises
✎ EXERCISE 74 (The irrational torus is not a manifold). Using the criterion (art. 4.6), show that the irrational torus Tα of Exercise 4, p. 10, is not a manifold. ✎ EXERCISE 75 (The sphere as paragon). Let us come back to the sphere Sn of Exercise 18, p. 24. The sphere is an important example which deserves to be watched under several points of view. Let us consider Rn+1 equipped with the standard diffeology, the sphere Sn is the subspace defined by : Sn = {x ∈ Rn+1  ∥x∥ = 1}, where ∥ · ∥ denotes the usual Euclidean norm associated with the scalar product, denoted by (u, v) 7→ u · v. Let us recall that a plot of Sn is a plot of Rn+1 with values in Sn (art. 1.33). With every x ∈ Sn , let us associate E x ⊂ Rn+1 , defined as the subspace orthogonal to x; see Figure 4.4. E x = {v ∈ Rn+1  x · v = 0}. Let Fx be the map defined by Fx : E x → Sn , with v 7→ u = 2
v+x − x. 1 + ∥v∥2
The map Fx is called the stereographic projection with respect to x. 1) Show that Fx is a local diffeomorphism from E x to Sn . 2) Deduce that Sn is a manifold of dimension n. 3) Show that the pair {FN , F−N }, where N = (0n , 1) ∈ Sn is the North Pole, is also a generating family for Sn , that is, an atlas of Sn . Diffeological Manifolds The construction of manifolds (art. 4.1) on the one hand, and the existence of diffeological vector spaces (art. 3.1) on the other hand, suggest the introduction of a new diffeological category: the diffeological manifolds, which are diffeological spaces modeled on diffeological vector spaces. Since finite dimensional vector spaces are diffeological vector spaces, the traditional manifolds then become a special case (or a subcategory) of diffeological manifolds. The goal of this section is to give the general definition of these new objects, and to express some of their properties. We shall
106
4. MODELING SPACES, MANIFOLDS, ETC.
x
Ex
v
u Sn x FIGURE 4.4. The stereographic projection.
illustrate these definitions by two examples: the infinite sphere of the fine standard Hilbert space (art. 3.15), and the associated infinite projective space. We shall have the opportunity, through these examples, to see how diffeology works with infinite dimensional manifolds. 4.7. Diffeological Manifolds. Let E be a diffeological vector space (art. 3.1). Let X be a diffeological space. We shall say that X is a diffeological manifold modeled on E if X is locally diffeomorphic to E at any point. That is, if for every x ∈ X there exists a local diffeomorphism (art. 2.5) F : E ⊃ U → X such that x ∈ F(U). Such a local diffeomorphism will be called a chart of X. Diffeological manifolds form a subcategory of {Diffeology} still denoted by {Manifolds}. The basic examples of diffeological manifolds are diffeological vector spaces and ordinary manifolds modeled on Rn (art. 4.1), but also manifolds modeled on a Banach space; see Exercise 72, p. 92. NOTE 1. In practice, it happens that the space X is, relatively obviously, locally diffeomorphic to an element of a family E = {E i }i∈I of isomorphic diffeological vector spaces; the set of indices I often being X itself. This is an elementary case of modeling diffeological spaces (see (art. 4.19)). We encountered this situation, in particular, with the sphere in Exercise 75, p. 105. NOTE 2. Some definitions of manifolds, in differential geometry, allow the model vector space to change its type from one point to another, resulting in variable dimensional manifolds for the different connected components. I does not seem necessary to introduce this subtlety here, but it is always possible. . .
DIFFEOLOGICAL MANIFOLDS
107
4.8. Generating diffeological manifolds. The proposition (art. 4.2) adapts itself to the case of diffeological manifolds. Let X be a diffeological space. Let E be a diffeological vector space. Every family A of local diffeomorphisms (art. 2.5), from E to X, such that [ val(F) = X F∈A
generates the diffeology of X in the following meaning: for every plot P : U → X, for every point r ∈ U, there exist an open neighborhood V of r, an element F of A , and a plot Q : V → E, such that P ↾ V = F ◦ Q. If there exists such a family A of local diffeomorphisms, from E to X, A will be called an Eatlas, or simply an atlas, of X, and the elements of A will be called the charts of the atlas. Thus, a diffeological space X is a manifold modeled on E (art. 4.7) if and only if there exists an atlas A of X made of local diffeomorphisms from E to X. Note that, in this case, there exists an atlas made up with all the local diffeomorphisms from E to X, this atlas is called the saturated atlas of X. PROOF. Let P : U → X be a plot and r ∈ U. Let x = P(r) and F ∈ A such that x ∈ val(F). Such an F exists by hypothesis. Now, let V = P−1 (val(F)) and Q = F−1 ◦ (P ↾ V), that is, P ↾ V = F ◦ Q. Now, since F is a local diffeomorphism, val(F) is Dopen (art. 2.10), and since P is Dcontinuous (art. 2.9), V is a domain. Moreover, since F is a local diffeomorphism, Q is a plot of E. Therefore, every plot of X can be smoothly lifted, locally, along some element of the family A , as it is claimed by the proposition. Now, let X be generated by a family A of local diffeomorphisms from E to X. Pick any point x ∈ X, and let P : {0} → X be the constant plot such that P(0) = x. By hypothesis, there exist a chart F ∈ A and a lift Q : {0} → E such that P = F ◦ Q. Hence, F is a local diffeomorphism from E to X, such that x ∈ val(F). Therefore, X is a diffeological manifold modeled on E. □ 4.9. The infinite sphere. Let HR be the real Hilbert space of square summable real sequences, equipped with the fine diffeology (art. 3.15). The unit sphere SR of the Hilbert space HR is defined as usual by § ª ∞ X 2 SR = X ∈ HR X · X = Xk = 1 . k=1
The sphere SR will be called the infinite sphere in the following, and it will be equipped with the subset diffeology (art. 1.33) of the fine diffeology (art. 3.7) of HR . Let us recall that a plot of HR for the fine diffeology is a parametrization such that, for all r0 ∈ U, there exist an open neighborhood V of r0 and a finite local family (λ α , X α )α∈A , defined on V, such that X P ↾ V : r 7→ λ α (r)X α . α∈A
108
4. MODELING SPACES, MANIFOLDS, ETC.
Let us recall that to be a finite local family defined on V means that the set of indices A is finite, and for every α ∈ A, λ α ∈ C ∞ (V, R), and X α ∈ HR . Now, the plot P is a plot of the sphere SR if moreover it takes its values in SR , that is, if P P α∈A α′ ∈A λ α (r)λ α′ (r) X α · X α′ = 1 for all r ∈ V. Let us then define the following stereographic maps: 1 ∥ξ ∥ 2 − 1 , F+ : HR → SR , with F+ : ξ 7→ X = 2ξ ∥ ξ ∥2 + 1 1 1 − ∥ ξ ∥2 F− : HR → SR , with F− : ξ 7→ X = , 2ξ 1 + ∥ ξ ∥2 where the matrix notation denotes the corresponding sequences, belonging to the vector space HR defined by a = (a, ξ 1 , ξ 2 , . . .) , where a ∈ R and ξ = (ξ 1 , ξ 2 , . . .) ∈ HR . ξ Let us use the notation of (art. 3.15), where ek is the vector whose kth coordinate is 1 and the others are zero. The images of F+ and F− are F+ (HR ) = SR − {e1 }, and F− (HR ) = SR − {−e1 }. Let us denote now, for every X ∈ HR X = (X 1 , X + ), with X 1 = pr1 (X), and X + = (X 2 , X 3 , . . .) ∈ HR , where prk denotes the kth projection on R, notations of (art. 3.15). The stereographic maps are injective and their inverses are given by F+−1 : SR − {e1 } → HR , with F+−1 : X 7→ ξ =
X+ , 1 − X1
X+ . 1 + X1 Now, the stereographic maps are local diffeomorphisms. Since their images cover the whole sphere SR , the sphere SR is a diffeological manifold modeled on HR (art. 4.8). Moreover, the sphere SR is embedded in HR (art. 2.14). F−−1 : SR − {−e1 } → HR , with F−−1 : X 7→ ξ =
PROOF. Let us show that the stereographic maps are local diffeomorphisms from HR to SR . We shall just consider F+ , since the case F− is completely analogous. The fact that the map F+ is injective is a simple verification. Its domain is HR which is, of course, Dopen in HR . We shall prove that SR − {e1 }, the image of F+ , is Dopen in SR . Then, we shall prove that F+ is smooth as well as F+−1 , defined on S − {e1 }, equipped with the subset diffeology. Finally, applying the criterion (art. 2.10), it will follow that F+ is a local diffeomorphism. (a) The map F+ is injective: We already exhibited F+−1 .
DIFFEOLOGICAL MANIFOLDS
109
(b) The map F+ is smooth: Let us consider a parametrization P : U → HR . For every r0 ∈ U there exist an open neighborhood V of r0 in U and a local family (λ α , X α )α∈A , defined on V, such that X P ↾ V : r 7→ λ α (r)X α . α∈A
Thus,
ε(r) α∈A µα (r)X α
P F+ ◦ (P ↾ V) : r → 7
with P 2λ α (r) ∥ α∈A λ α (r)X α ∥2 − 1 ε(r) = P , and µα (r) = P . 2 ∥ α∈A λ α (r)X α ∥ + 1 ∥ β∈A λ β (r)X β ∥2 + 1 The denominator of ε and µα never vanishes. Hence, the functions ε and µα belong to C ∞ (V, R). Now F+ ◦ (P ↾ V) rewrites X 1 0 F+ ◦ (P ↾ V)(r) = ε(r) + µα (r) . 0 X α α∈A This exhibits the map F+ ◦ (P ↾ V) as a finite linear combination of vectors of HR with smooth parametrizations of R as coefficients. Therefore, F+ ◦ P is a plot of HR . Since F+ ◦ P takes its values in SR , it is a plot of the subset diffeology of SR ⊂ HR , where HR is equipped with the fine diffeology. Hence, F+ is smooth. (c) The map F+−1 is smooth: Let P : U → SR − {e1 } be a plot. For any r0 ∈ U, there exist an open neighborhood V of r0 in U and a local family (λ α , X α )α∈A , defined on V, such that X P ↾ V : r 7→ λ α (r)X α , α∈A
then, F+−1 ◦ (P ↾ V) : r 7→
X α∈A
µα (r)X α,+ , with µα (r) =
1−
λ α (r) . β∈A λ β (r)X β,1
P
Now, the X β,1 form a finite set of constant numbers, thus the parametrization P r 7→ β∈A λ β (r)X β,1 is smooth and is never equal to 1 since P takes its values in SR − {e1 }. Thus, for each α ∈ A, µα (r) is a smooth parametrization in R. The parametrization F+−1 ◦ (P ↾ V) is clearly a finite linear combination of vectors of HR , with smooth parametrizations of R as coefficients. Hence, F+−1 ◦ (P ↾ V) is a plot for the fine diffeology of HR . Now, F+−1 ◦ P is locally, at each point of U, a plot of HR , so it is a plot of HR . Therefore, F+−1 is a smooth map from SR − {e1 } to HR . (d) The subset SR − {e1 } is open for the Dtopology: Let us recall that a set is Dopen if and only if its preimage by every plot is open (art. 2.8). Let P : U → SR be a plot,
110
4. MODELING SPACES, MANIFOLDS, ETC.
for every r0 ∈ U there exist an open neighborhood V of r0 in U and a local family (λ α , X α )α∈A , defined on V, such that X P ↾ V : r 7→ λ α (r)X α . α∈A
Hence, (P ↾ V)−1 (SR − {e1 }) = {r ∈ V 
X
λ α (r)X α,1 ̸= 1}.
α∈A
P But, the real parametrization PV : r 7→ α∈A λ α (r)X α,1 is smooth, a fortiori continuous. So, the preimage of R − {1} is open. Thus, P−1 (SR − {e1 }) is a union of subdomains of U, and therefore a domain. Hence, P−1 (SR − {e1 }) is open for any plot P, that is, SR − {e1 } is Dopen. In conclusion, the diffeology of the real infinite sphere SR is generated by F+ and F− . Therefore, SR is a diffeological manifold, modeled on HR (art. 4.8). Now, let us prove that SR is embedded in HR (art. 2.14). Let Ω be Dopen in SR . Let us consider the projection prS : HR − {0} → SR , defined by prS (X) =
X . ∥X∥
Since ∥X∥ never vanishes on HR − {0}, the projection prS is smooth, thus Dcontinuous (art. 2.9). Hence, the set § ª ˜ = pr−1 (Ω) = X ∈ HR − {0} X ∈ Ω Ω S ∥X∥ is Dopen in HR − {0}. But HR − {0} is itself Dopen in HR , since HR − {0} is the ˜ is Dopen in HR . pullback of the domain ]0, ∞[ by the smooth map ∥ · ∥. Hence, Ω ˜ Now, Ω = Ω ∩ SR . Therefore, SR is embedded. □ 4.10. The infinite sphere is contractible. The infinite Hilbert sphere SR , defined in (art. 4.9), is smoothly contractible, that is, there exists
ρ ∈ C ∞ (R, C ∞ (SR )), such that ρ(0) = eˆ1 , and ρ(1) = 1S , ˆ1 is the constant map X 7→ e1 , with e1 = (1, 0, 0, . . .), and 1S is the identity where e of SR . The path ρ, connecting the identity to the constant map, is called a smooth retraction (art. 5.13). Under ρ, the image ρ(t)(SR ) retracts smoothly, when t passes from 1 to 0, from the sphere SR to the point e1 . NOTE. This strange property, for a sphere, has been proved for the topological structure of SR by S. Kakutani in 1943 [Kak43], and we see that it still persists in diffeology, here for the fine diffeology of the sphere. PROOF. The proof of this proposition uses the following two preliminary constructions:
DIFFEOLOGICAL MANIFOLDS
111
1. The shift operator. It is defined as the linear map Shift : HR → HR , with Shift(X) = (0, X) = (0, X 1 , X 2 , . . .). Since the shift operator is linear, it is smooth for the fine diffeology (art. 3.9). It is injective and preserves the scalar product. It injects strictly the infinite sphere into an equator. 2. Connecting points. Let X be some diffeological space, we say that a path γ connects x 0 and x 1 if γ (0) = x 0 and γ (1) = x 1 . We also say that x 0 and x 1 are homotopic, and that γ is a homotopy between x 0 and x 1 (art. 5.6). Now, if there exist a smooth path γ connecting x 0 to x 1 and a smooth path γ ′ connecting x 1 to x 2 , then the path γ ′′ defined by ( γ (λ(2t)) if t ≤ 1/2, ′′ γ = γ ′ (λ(2t − 1)) if t ≥ 1/2, connects x 0 to x 2 , where λ is the smashing function defined in (art. 5.5), and described in Figure 5.1. Now, we prove the contractibility of the infinite sphere in two steps, first we shall ˆ1 is homotopic to the shift operator, and then, that show that the constant map e the shift operator is homotopic to the identity 1S . If we want, we can apply the smashing function to this pair of homotopies to get a smooth path connecting the constant map to the identity. ˆ1 and Shift. Let us consider the 1parameter family of (a) Homotopy between e deformations, πt πt e1 + sin Shift(X), for all t ∈ R, and all X ∈ SR . ρ t (X) = cos 2 2 For all t ∈ R, ρ t (X) ∈ SR . Since addition and multiplication by a smooth function are smooth, the map (t, X) 7→ ρ t (X) is smooth. Thus, the map t 7→ ρ t is a path in ˆ1 and Shift, precisely, C ∞ (SR ) connecting e
ρ0 = eˆ1 , and ρ1 = Shift. (b) Homotopy between Shift and 1S . Let us consider the following 1parameter family of deformations,
σ t (X) = tX + (1 − t)Shift(X), for all t ∈ R, and all X ∈ HR . Note that ker(σ t ) = 0. This is clear for t = 0, and for nonzero t it follows inductively by observing that the condition σ t (X) = 0 writes (X 1 , X 2 , X 3 , . . .) =
t −1 (0, X 1 , X 2 , . . .). t
112
4. MODELING SPACES, MANIFOLDS, ETC.
In particular, σ t is nowhere zero on the sphere, we can define ρ t : SR → SR
ρ t (X) =
σ t (X) . ∥σ t (X)∥
Let us check that (t, X) 7→ ρ t (X) is smooth. First of all, (t, X) 7→ σ t (X) is clearly smooth. Since the scalar product is smooth, it follows that (t, X) 7→ ∥σ t (X)∥2 is smooth, and because this map takes its values in ]0, ∞[, its square root is smooth. In conclusion, t 7→ ρ t is a path in C ∞ (SR ), and
ρ0 = Shift, and ρ1 = 1S . We proved, with (a) and (b) above, that SR is contractible.
□
4.11. The infinite complex projective space. Let us recall some settheoretic constructions, nowadays classical. Let us introduce C⋆ = C − {0}, and HC⋆ = HC − {0}, where the Hilbert space HC has been described in (art. 3.15). Then, let us consider the multiplicative action of the group C⋆ on HC⋆ , defined by (z, Z) 7→ zZ ∈ HC⋆ , for all (z, Z) ∈ C⋆ × HC⋆ . The quotient of HC⋆ by this action of C⋆ is called the infinite complex projective space, or simply the infinite projective space. We will denote it by PC = HC⋆ /C⋆ . Now, let us consider the space HC equipped with the fine diffeology (art. 3.7), the space HC⋆ equipped with the subset diffeology (art. 1.33), and the infinite projective space PC equipped with the quotient diffeology (art. 1.50). Let us denote by π : HC⋆ → PC the canonical projection. Next, for every k = 1, . . . , ∞, let us define the injection jk : HC → HC⋆ by j1 (Z) = (1, Z), and jk (Z) = (Z1 , . . . , Z k−1 , 1, Z k , . . .), for k > 1. Let the maps Fk be defined by Fk : HC → PC , with Fk = π ◦ jk , k = 1, . . . , ∞. 1. For every k = 1, . . . , ∞, jk is an induction from HC into HC⋆ . 2. For every k = 1, . . . , ∞, Fk is a local diffeomorphism from HC to PC . Moreover, their values cover PC , ∞ [ val(Fk ) = PC . k=1
Thus, PC is a diffeological manifold modeled on HC , for which the family {Fk }∞ k=1 is an atlas (art. 4.8).
DIFFEOLOGICAL MANIFOLDS
113
3. The pullback π −1 (val(Fk )) ⊂ HC⋆ is isomorphic to the product HC × C⋆ , where the action of C⋆ on HC⋆ is transmuted into the trivial action on the factor HC and the multiplicative action on the factor C⋆ . We say that the projection π is a locally trivial C⋆ principal fibration; see (art. 8.8) and (art. 8.11). PROOF. 1. Let us prove first that the maps jk are inductions from HC to HC⋆ . Let Hk = jk (HC ), that is, Hk = {Z ∈ H  Z k = 1}. Now, let us consider a plot P of HC with values in Hk . By definition of the fine diffeology, we have X X P(r) =loc λ α (r)Zα and Pk (r) =loc λ α (r)Zα,k = 1, with Pk = prk ◦ P. α∈A
α∈A
The prk are the kprojections from HC to C, notations of (art. 3.15). Let us now define ζα by
ζα = (Zα,1 , . . . , Zα,k−1 , 1, Zα,k+1 , . . .). For each α in A, ζα belongs to Hk . Let ek be defined by prk (ek ) = 1 and pr j (ek ) = 0 for j ̸= k, notations of (art. 3.15). From the condition above, we have X X X P(r) =loc λ α (r)ζα − λ α (r)ek + λ α (r)Zα,k ek α∈A
=loc
X
α∈A
α∈A
X λ α (r)ζα + 1 − λ α (r) ek .
α∈A
α∈A
Now, since the vectors ζα and ek belong to Hk , the plot jk−1 ◦ P writes jk−1 ◦ P(r) =loc
X α∈A
X λ α (r) jk−1 (ζα ) + 1 − λ α (r) jk−1 (ek ), α∈A
but jk (0) = ek implies jk−1 (ek ) = 0, hence X jk−1 ◦ P(r) =loc λ α (r) j −1 (ζα ). α∈A
This exhibits the parametrization jk−1 ◦ P as a plot of H , hence jk is an induction. 2. Let us prove now that the Fk are local diffeomorphisms. (a) Fk is injective: First of all, the maps Fk are clearly smooth. Now, since Z ∈ Hk implies Z k = 1, the space Hk intersects the orbits of the group C⋆ in at most one point. The orbits which do not intersect Hk are those such that Z k = 0. Hence, Fk is injective.
114
4. MODELING SPACES, MANIFOLDS, ETC.
(b) The images of the Fk cover PC : The orbit of any point Z ∈ HC⋆ intersects some Hk , in other words, ∞ [ k=1
C⋆ Hk = HC⋆ , or π
[ ∞
∞ [ Hk = P , or val(Fk ) = PC .
k=1
k=1
(c) The Fk are inductions: Let Q : U → PC be a plot with values in Fk (HC ), and let r0 ∈ U. By definition of the quotient diffeology, there exist an open neighborhood V of r0 and a plot P : V → HC⋆ such that Q ↾ V = π ◦ P. By hypothesis, for each r ∈ V, Pk (r) ̸= 0, where Pk = prk ◦ P, therefore P′ : V → HC⋆ , defined by P′ (r) = P(r)/Pk (r), takes its values in Hk . Since Pk is smooth, P′ is smooth and Q ↾ V = π ◦ P′ . The plot P′ takes its values in Hk , and jk is an induction, thus the composite jk−1 ◦ P′ is a plot of HC . But, by construction, jk−1 ◦ P′ = Fk−1 ◦ Q, thus Fk−1 ◦ Q is a plot of HC and Fk−1 is smooth. Therefore, Fk is an induction. (d) The image of each Fk is Dopen: Since the Dtopology of the quotient diffeology is the quotient topology of the Dtopology (art. 2.12), it is sufficient to prove that the pullback by π of the Fk (HC ) is Dopen in HC⋆ . We saw that π −1 (Fk (HC )) is the set of all Z ∈ HC such that Z k ̸= 0, i.e., pr−1 (C⋆ ). But prk is linear, hence smooth, k ⋆ hence continuous. Since C is open it follows that π −1 (Fk (HC )) is open. Thus, by application of (art. 2.9), we proved that the Fk are local diffeomorphisms. Since their images cover PC , the space PC is a diffeological manifold modeled on HC (art. 4.8). 3. Let us prove now that π is a locally trivial C⋆ principal fibration. Let
Φk : HC × C⋆ → HC⋆ , defined by Φk (Z, z) = z jk (Z). (a) The Φk are local diffeomorphisms. Indeed, let Φk (Z, z) = Φk (Z′ , z ′ ), that is, z jk (Z) = z ′ jk (Z′ ). Thus, prk (z jk (Z)) = prk (z ′ jk (Z′ )), that is, z = z ′ . Hence, Z = Z′ . Thus, the Φk are injective. They are obviously smooth. Their inverses are Z Φk−1 (Z) = , Z k , for all Z ∈ val(Φk ) = C⋆ Hk . Zk Since Z k never vanishes, Φk−1 also is smooth. Moreover val(Φk ) is Dopen since it is the pullback π −1 (val(Fk )), and we have seen that val(Fk ) is Dopen. Therefore, the Φk are local diffeomorphisms. (b) The Φk commute obviously with the action of C⋆ defined above. Therefore, ⋆ ⋆ {Φk }∞ k=1 is a family of local diffeomorphisms from HC × C to HC such that
Φk (z ′ (Z, z)) = z ′ Φk (Z, z), and
∞ [ k=1
val(Φk ) = HC⋆ ,
DIFFEOLOGICAL MANIFOLDS
115
where z ′ (Z, z) = (Z, z ′ z) is just the action of C⋆ on the second factor. This atlas gives the structure of a locally trivial C⋆ principal bundle to the triple (HC⋆ , PC , π ) for the given action of C⋆ (art. 8.9, Note 2). □ Exercises
✎ EXERCISE 76 (The space of lines in C ∞ (R, R)). Consider E = C ∞ (R, R), equipped with the functional diffeology. A line of E is a subset L ⊂ E for which there exist f , g ∈ E , with g ̸= 0, such that L = { f + sg  s ∈ R}. The space of lines, denoted by Lines(E ), will be regarded as the quotient of E × (E − {0}) by the equivalence relation ( f , g) ∼ ( f + λg, µ g) where λ ∈ R and µ ∈ R − {0}. For all r ∈ R, let E r0 = {α ∈ C ∞ (R, R)  α(r) = 0}, and E r1 = {β ∈ C ∞ (R, R)  β(r) = 1}. Let Fr : E r0 × E r1 → Lines(E ) be defined by Fr : (α, β) 7→ {α + sβ  s ∈ R}. 1) Describe the image of Fr and show that Fr is a local diffeomorphism. 2) Show that the images of the Fr , when r ∈ R, cover Lines(E ). Deduce that Lines(E ) is a manifold modeled on E00 × E00 . 3) Adapt this construction to Lines(R2 ), where R2 is regarded as C ∞ ({1, 2}, R). Deduce that this gives an atlas for the Möbius strip; Exercise 41, p. 49, question 4.
✎ EXERCISE 77 (The Hopf S1 bundle). Check that the quotient of the unit sphere
SC = {Z ∈ HC  Z · Z = 1} by the multiplicative action of the group U(1) of complex numbers with modulus 1, U(1) = {z ∈ C  z ∗ z = 1} , is naturally diffeomorphic to PC . Transpose this identification to the product HR × HR ≃ HC ; see Exercise 73, p. 93.
✎ EXERCISE 78 (U(1) as subgroup of diffeomorphisms). Let GL(HC ) be the group of Clinear isomorphisms of HC . Let U(HC ) be the unitary group of HC , that is, the subgroup of the elements of GL(HC ) which preserves the Hermitian form, U(HC ) = {A ∈ GL(HC )  for all Z, Z′ ∈ HC , (AZ) · (AZ′ ) = Z · Z′ }. The group U(HC ) is equipped with the functional diffeology associated with the fine diffeology of HC (art. 3.12). Let U(1) be the group of complex numbers with modulus 1; see Exercise 77, p. 115. Let j : U(1) → GL(HC ) be the map j(z) : Z 7→ z × Z, with Z ∈ HC .
116
4. MODELING SPACES, MANIFOLDS, ETC.
Show that j is a monomorphic induction from U(1) to GL(HC ), and thus a monomorphic induction into U(HC ). Modeling Diffeologies We have seen, in this chapter, how diffeology offers a new approach for usual objects in classical differential geometry. Manifolds are not regarded anymore as a special class of structure, needing a lot of preparatory material, but as diffeological spaces which satisfy a given property: they are modeled on finite dimensional real vector spaces. The notion of local diffeomorphism and generating family in diffeology simplify their description. Thanks to this point of view, we have been able to generalize the notion of classical manifolds to diffeological manifolds, simply by changing the model, from finite dimensional real vector spaces to general diffeological vector spaces. We have also been able to begin the exploration of this way with two important examples: the Hilbert sphere (art. 4.9) and the projective space of the Hilbert space (art. 4.11). Modeling diffeological spaces gives us a simple mechanism to understand and present a variety of geometrical objects, which we shall illustrate with two more examples. The first one, manifold with boundary, involves usually a not so simple definition (art. 4.15). Thanks to the natural subset diffeology of halfspaces (art. 4.12), a manifold with boundary becomes simply a diffeological space modeled on a halfspace (art. 4.16); and manifolds with boundary and corners follow by being diffeological spaces modeled on corners. The second example concerns orbifolds. They have become, since Satake’s first original definition [Sat56], [Sat57], ordinary objects in mathematics. 2 But the concept remained problematic, and different authors give different definitions. Roughly speaking, an orbifold is a topological space which looks like, locally, a quotient Rn /Γ , where Γ is a finite subgroup of linear transformations, for some kind of additional structure. Apart from the variety of definitions, what is strange is that orbifolds, or Vmanifolds, come to us alone, without being included in a well defined category, as it is usual for mathematical objects. In one of his papers, Satake even quoted: “The notion of C ∞ map thus defined is inconvenient in the point that a composite of two C ∞ maps defined in a different choice of defining families is not always C ∞ map.” The relative complexity and incompleteness of these different definitions, their conceptual obstacles as well as the endless technical discussions they generate, led us to test diffeology on the subject and introduce orbifolds in the category {Diffeology}, following on the path opened by manifolds (art. 4.1): an orbifold is defined as a diffeological space which is locally diffeomorphic, at each point, to some quotient Rn /Γ , 2Originally, orbifolds were introduced by Ichiro Satake as Vmanifolds. Later in a series of lectures on the subject, Thurston changed the name from Vmanifolds to orbifolds.
MODELING DIFFEOLOGIES
117
where Γ is a finite subgroup of linear transformations. Then, orbifolds become just a subcategory of diffeological spaces. In this way, orbifolds take advantage of the whole theory of diffeology. In particular, smooth maps between orbifolds are well defined and compose correctly. Fiber bundles will be just a specialization of the notion of diffeological bundles, 3 differential forms, covering, etc. We state in (art. 4.17) and (art. 4.18) two main results which show that diffeological orbifolds completely fulfill the conditions of Satake’s definition and make it a legitimate category in this regard. We shall not detail the proofs, the complete comparison between this definition and the original Satake’s work was published in [IKZ10]. It is worth adding that since then two directions on diffeological orbifols have been explored: their relation to C∗ algebra [IZL18] and the complete description of their Klein stratification [GIZ22]. 4.12. Halfspaces. We denote by Hn the standard halfspace of Rn , that is, the set of points x = (r, t) ∈ Rn such that r ∈ Rn−1 and t ∈ [0, +∞[, and we denote by ∂ Hn its boundary Rn−1 × {0}. The subset diffeology of Hn , inherited from Rn , is made of all the smooth parametrizations P : U → Rn such that Pn (r) ≥ 0 for all r ∈ U, Pn (r) being the nth coordinate of P(r). The Dtopology of Hn is the usual topology defined by its inclusion into Rn . 4.13. Smooth real maps from halfspaces. A map f : Hn → R p is smooth for the subset diffeology of Hn if and only if there exists an ordinary smooth map F, defined on an open neighborhood of Hn , such that f = F ↾ Hn . Actually, there exists such an F defined on the whole Rn . NOTE. As an immediate corollary, any map f defined on C × [0, ε[ to R p , where C is an open cube of ∂ Hn , centered at some point (r, 0), smooth for the subset diffeology, is the restriction of a smooth map F : C ×] − ε, +ε[→ R p . PROOF. First of all, if f is the restriction of a smooth map F : Rn → R p , it is obvious that for every smooth parametrization P : U → Hn , f ◦P = F◦P is smooth. Conversely, let f i be a coordinate of f . Let x = (r, t) denote a point of Rn , where r ∈ Rn−1 and t ∈ R. If f i is smooth for the subset diffeology, then ϕi : (r, t) 7→ f i (r, t 2 ), defined on Rn , is smooth. Now, ϕi is even in the variable t, ϕi (r, t) = ϕi (r, −t). Thus, according to Hassler Whitney [Whi43, Theorem 1 and final remark] there exists a smooth map Fi : Rn → R such that ϕi (r, t) = Fi (r, t 2 ). Hence, f i (r, t) = Fi (r, t) for all r ∈ Rn−1 and all t ∈ [0, +∞[. □ 4.14. Local diffeomorphisms of halfspaces. A map f : A → Hn , with A ⊂ Hn , is a local diffeomorphism for the subset diffeology of Rn if and only if A is open in Hn , 3The notion of orbibundle does not seem to coincide with the notion of diffeological bundle (art. 8.8) over an orbifold. It looks like an intertwining of two orbifolds; see for example the definition in [BoGa07]. The notion of orbibundle, if relevant, needs to be included properly later in the diffeological framework.
118
4. MODELING SPACES, MANIFOLDS, ETC.
f is injective, f (A ∩ ∂ Hn ) ⊂ ∂ Hn , and for all x ∈ A there exist an open ball B ⊂ Rn centered at x and a local diffeomorphism F : B → Rn such that f and F coincide on B ∩ Hn . NOTE. This implies, in particular, that there exist an open neighborhood U of A and an étale application g : U → Rn such that f and g coincide on A. PROOF. Let us assume that f is a local diffeomorphism for the subset diffeology. Since f is a local diffeomorphism for the Dtopology, f is a local homeomorphism, and A is open in Hn . In particular, f maps the boundary ∂ A = A ∩ ∂ Hn into ∂ Hn . As well, f maps the complementary A − ∂ A into Hn − ∂ Hn . Now, since A is open in Hn , A−∂ A is open in Hn −∂ Hn , thus the restriction f ↾ A−∂ A is a local diffeomorphism to Hn − ∂ Hn . Therefore, for every x ∈ A − ∂ A there exists an open ball B ⊂ A − ∂ A, centered at x, such that F = f ↾ B is a local diffeomorphism. Now, let (r, 0) ∈ ∂ A. Since A is open in Hn , ∂ A is open in ∂ Hn . Therefore, there exist an open cube C ⊂ ∂ A centered at (r, 0), and ε > 0, such that C × [0, +ε[⊂ A. The restriction of f to C × [0, +ε[ is a local diffeomorphism, for the subset diffeology, to Hn . Thanks to (art. 4.13), there exists a smooth map F defined on C ×] − ε, +ε[ to Rn , such that f and F coincide on C × [0, +ε[. Since f is a diffeomorphism, f maps C × [0, +ε[ to some open set A′ ⊂ Hn and maps C to some open subset of ∂ Hn . We have then (r ′ , 0) = f (r, 0) ∈ ∂ A′ = A′ ∩ ∂ Hn . Considering now f −1 , for the same reason, there exists an open cube C ′ ⊂ ∂ A′ centered at (r ′ , 0), there exist ε′ > 0 such that C ′ × [0, +ε′ [⊂ A′ , and a smooth map G defined on C ′ ×] − ε′ , +ε′ [ to Rn such that f −1 and G coincide on C ′ × [0, +ε′ [. Now, let O = F−1 (C ′ ×] − ε′ , +ε′ [), and O ′ = G−1 (C ×] − ε, +ε[), O and O ′ are open subsets of Rn , with (r, 0) ∈ O and (r ′ , 0) ∈ O ′ . For every t ≥ 0 such that (r, t) ∈ O , we have D(G ◦ F)(r, t) = D( f −1 ◦ f )(r, t) = 1n+1 . Thus, since F and G are smooth parametrizations, we have on the one hand lim t → 0+ D(G ◦ F)(r, t) = 1n+1 , and on the other hand lim t → 0+ D(G ◦ F)(r, t) = D(G)(r ′ , 0) ◦ D(F)(r, 0). So, D(G)(r ′ , 0) ◦ D(F)(r, 0) = 1n+1 , and thus D(F)(r, 0) is nondegenerate. Therefore, thanks to the implicit function theorem, there exists an open ball B centered at x = (r, 0) such that F ↾ B is a local diffeomorphism to Rn , and such that f and F coincide on B ∩ Hn . Conversely, let us assume that A is open in Hn , f : A → Hn is injective, and for each x ∈ A there exist an open ball B of Rn centered at x, and a local diffeomorphism F : B → Rn such that f and F coincide on B. Let us prove that f is a local smooth map for the subset diffeology. Let P : U → Rn be a smooth parametrization taking its values in Hn . Since A is open in Hn and P is continuous, for the Dtopology, P−1 (A) is open. Now let r ∈ P−1 (A) and x = P(r). Since P is continuous, P−1 (B) is open, and since F is a local diffeomorphism from B to Rn , f ◦ P ↾ P−1 (B) = F ◦ P ↾ P−1 (B) is a smooth parametrization. Thus f ◦ P is locally smooth at every point, thus P
MODELING DIFFEOLOGIES
119
is smooth, and therefore f is smooth. For the smoothness of f −1 , we need only check that f (A) is open, and the rest will follow the same way as for f . So, let x ∈ A. If x ∈ A − ∂ A, the ball B can be chosen small enough to fit into A − ∂ A. Now, by hypothesis ∂ A is mapped into ∂ Hn and f is injective, thus f maps the complementary A−∂ A into Hn −∂ Hn . Then, since f ↾ B is a local diffeomorphism to Rn , f (B) ⊂ f (A) is an open subset of Hn − ∂ Hn . Next, let x ∈ ∂ A, then f (x) ∈ ∂ Hn and f (x) ∈ f (B ∩ Hn ) = F(B) ∩ Hn ⊂ f (A). Since F is a local diffeomorphism from B to Rn , F(B) is open in Rn , and F(B) ∩ Hn is an open subset of Hn . Finally, for every x ∈ A, f (x) is contained in some open subset O of Hn with O ⊂ f (A). Therefore f (A) is a union of open subsets of Hn , that is, an open subset of Hn . □ 4.15. Classical manifolds with boundary. Smooth manifolds with boundary have been precisely defined in [GuPo74]. We use here a more recent definition except that, for our subject, the charts have been inverted. DEFINITION. [Lee06]. A smooth nmanifold with boundary is a topological space M, together with a family of local homeomorphisms Fi defined on some open sets Ui of the halfspace Hn to M, such that the values of the Fi cover M and, for any two elements Fi and Fj of the family, the transition homeomorphism Fi−1 ◦ Fj , defined on Fi−1 (Fi (Ui ) ∩ Fj (U j )) to Fj−1 (Fi (Ui ) ∩ Fj (U j )), is the restriction of some smooth map defined on an open neighborhood of Fi−1 (Fi (Ui ) ∩ Fj (U j )). The boundary ∂ M is the union of the Fi (Ui ∩ ∂ Hn ). Such a family F of homeomorphisms is called an atlas of M, and its elements are called charts. There exists a maximal atlas A containing F , made of all the local homeomorphisms from Hn to M such that the transition homeomorphisms with every element of F satisfy the condition given just above. We say that A gives to M its structure of manifold with boundary. 4.16. Diffeology of manifolds with boundary. Let M be a smooth nmanifold with boundary. Let us recall that a parametrization P : U → M is smooth if for every r ∈ U there exist an open neighborhood V of r, a chart F : Ω → M of M, and a smooth parametrization, Q : V → Ω such that P ↾ V = F ◦ Q. The set of smooth parametrizations of M is then a natural diffeology. Regarded as a diffeological space, M is modeled on Hn (art. 4.12). Conversely, every diffeological space modeled on Hn is naturally a manifold with boundary. Moreover, the smooth maps form a manifold with boundary to another, for the category {Smooth Manifolds with Boundary} or for the category {Diffeology} coincide. NOTE. Nothing now prevents us from defining directly the manifolds with corners as the diffeological spaces modeled on corners Kn = {x = (x 1 , . . . , x n ) ∈ Rn  x i ≥ 0, i = 1, . . . , n}. Indeed, the following proposition, shows already that C ∞ (Kn , Rm ) is made of the restrictions to Kn of smooth maps defined on an open superset.
120
4. MODELING SPACES, MANIFOLDS, ETC.
PROPOSITION. A map f : Kn → R is smooth for the subset diffeology of Kn if and only if there exist an open superset W of Kn and a smooth map F : W → R, such that F ↾ Kn = f . This result, extended to local diffeomorphisms of Kn as was done for halfspaces (art. 4.14), leads to a perfect correspondence between diffeological manifolds with corners and the usual notion found in the literature; see [GIZ19]. PROOF. We denote by D the set of smooth parametrizations of M. Now, let us prove that any chart F : U → M is a local diffeomorphism from Hn to M, where Hn is equipped with the subset diffeology, and M is equipped with D. Since for any plot P of Hn , F ◦ P — defined on P−1 (U) which is open — belongs obviously to D, so F is smooth. Then, let us prove now that F−1 is smooth. Let P : U → M be an element of D, let r ∈ U, let V, Q and F′ be as above, such that P ↾ V = F′ ◦ Q. Thus, F−1 ◦ P ↾ V = F−1 ◦ F′ ◦ Q. But since F and F′ are charts of M, F−1 ◦ F′ is the restriction of some ordinary smooth map defined on some open neighborhood of F−1 (F(U) ∩ F′ (U′ )), therefore F−1 ◦ F′ ◦ Q is a smooth parametrization in Hn , that is, F−1 ◦ P ↾ V. Now, since P−1 (F(U)) is open, and since the parametrization P ◦ F−1 is locally smooth everywhere on P−1 (F(U)), F−1 ◦ P is smooth. Thus, F−1 is a local smooth map. Therefore, F is a local diffeomorphism. This proves that, for the diffeology D, M is modeled on Hn . Conversely, let us assume that M is a diffeological space modeled on Hn . Let A be the set of all local diffeomorphisms from Hn to M, and let us equip M with the Dtopology. So, the elements of A are local homeomorphisms. Let F : U → M and F′ : U′ → M be two elements of A . Let us assume that F(U) ∩ F′ (U′ ), which is open, is not empty. Thus F−1 (F(U) ∩ F′ (U′ )) and F′−1 (F(U) ∩ F′ (U′ )) are open. But F′−1 ◦ F ↾ F−1 (F(U) ∩ F′ (U′ )) and F−1 ◦ F′ ↾ F′−1 (F(U) ∩ F′ (U′ )) are local diffeomorphisms for the subset diffeology of Hn , and according to (art. 4.14) they are the restrictions of ordinary smooth maps. Therefore, the set A gives to M a structure of smooth manifold with boundary. It is clear that these two operations just described are inverse one of each other. Now, thanks to (art. 4.14) and (art. 4.13), it is clear that to be a smooth map for the category of smooth manifolds with boundary or to be smooth for the natural diffeology associated is identical. Let us give now a proof of the proposition in the note. First of all, if f : Kn → R is the restriction of a smooth map F : Rn → R, then it is clear that f is smooth. Conversely, let f : Kn → R be a smooth map for the subset diffeology. Then, the map ϕ : (x 1 , x 2 , . . . , x n ) 7→ f (x 12 , x 22 , . . . , x n2 ), defined on Rn , is smooth and is even in every variable. Consider the first variable, thanks to Hassler Whitney [Whi43, Theorem 1 and final remark], there exists a smooth map F1 (x 1 , x 2 , . . . , x n ), defined on Rn , such that ϕ(x 1 , x 2 , . . . , x n ) = F1 (x 12 , x 2 , . . . , x n ), that is, f (x 12 , x 22 , . . . , x n2 ) = F1 (x 12 , x 2 , . . . , x n ). Next, since F1 (x 12 , x 2 , . . . , x n ) = F1 (x 12 , −x 2 , . . . , x n ), for the same reason, there exists a smooth map F2 , defined on Rn , such that F1 (x 12 , x 2 , . . . , x n ) =
MODELING DIFFEOLOGIES
121
F2 (x 12 , x 22 , . . . , x n ), that is, f (x 12 , x 22 , . . . , x n2 ) = F2 (x 12 , x 22 , . . . , x n ). By recursion, there exists a smooth map F = Fn , also defined on Rn , such that f (x 12 , x 22 , . . . , x n2 ) = Fn (x 12 , x 22 , . . . , x n2 ). Therefore: f (x 1 , x 2 , . . . , x n ) = F(x 1 , x 2 , . . . , x n ), for all x i ≥ 0, i = 1, . . . n, where F is a smooth map from Rn to R. □ 4.17. Orbifolds as diffeologies. A diffeological space M is said to be an orbifold of dimension n, or a norbifold, if M is locally diffeomorphic at every point to Rn /Γ , where Γ ⊂ GL(Rn ) is finite, and Rn /Γ is equipped with the quotient diffeology. The group Γ may change from one point to another. Note that n is the dimension, in the diffeological sense (art. 2.22), of the orbifold at each point. We could say this in other words: an orbifold is a diffeological space modeled by the family M = {Rn /Γ  Γ ⊂ GL(n, R) and #Γ < ∞}. The elements of M can be called the models of the category {Orbifolds}, see Figure 4.5. NOTE. There is an approach on orbifolds through groupoids, developed the last decades around Ieke Moerdijk; see [Mor02]. Orbifolds are not defined anymore by their geometry but by a superstructure defined as a groupoid which may contain some noneffective action of the structures groups Γ . There exists, however, a correspondance from these orbifolds groupoids to the diffeological orbifolds. The relationship between the two approaches was recently discussed by Yael Karshon and David Miyamoto [KaMi22]. 4.18. Structure group of orbifolds. Let M be an orbifold of dimension n and x ∈ M. There exist always a finite linear group Γ ⊂ GL(Rn ), unique up to conjugation, and a local diffeomorphism ψ : Rn /Γ ⊃ O → M mapping 0 to x, that is, 0 ∈ O and ψ(0) = x. The conjugacy class of the group Γ is called the structure group of M at the point x. The point x is said to be regular if Γ is trivial, singular otherwise. 4 Note that an orbifold with no singular point is just a manifold. For a comprehensive presentation, see [IKZ10]. NOTE 1. Recently the definition of structure groups of an orbifold has been extended to a structure groupoid. It is defined as the groupoid of the germs of local diffeomorphisms of the nebula of an atlas of the orbifold (actually the strict generating family associated), which project on the identity along the evaluation map; see [IZL18]. The structure groups are the isotropies of the structure groupoid. NOTE 2. The category of orbifolds had been extended by the concept of quasifold, isolated by Elisa Prato in [Pra01] and recently included in a precise way as a 4This corresponds to the diffeological notion of singularity, since a local diffeomorphism can only exchange points with the same structure group.
122
4. MODELING SPACES, MANIFOLDS, ETC.
s
Real level U! !Rn
U
Local model level A! !Rn/K
A
a
a
j
F
Orbifold level
V
FIGURE 4.5. The three levels of an orbifold structure. subcategory of {Diffeology} in [IZP21]. A quasifold is built on the model of orbifolds where the finitude of the Γ is relaxed to allow countable subgroups of the affine group. The irrational torus [DI83] is the model par excellence of quasifold. 4.19. In conclusion on modeling. The examples, described in this section, suggest a precise concept of modeling of diffeological spaces, close to the notion of generating family introduced in (art. 1.66), but stronger. We can say formally that a diffeological space X is modeled on a family of diffeological spaces M , if X is locally diffeomorphic to some member of M , everywhere. That is, for any x ∈ X there exists A ∈ M and a local diffeomorphis ϕ from A to X, such that x ∈ val(ϕ). Precisely, for every plot P : U → X and for every r ∈ U, there exist an open neighborhood V ⊂ U of r, a plot Q : V → A and a local diffeomorphism ϕ from A to X, such that ϕ ◦ Q = P ↾ V. In this case, x = P(r). This definition
MODELING DIFFEOLOGIES
123
covers the various examples we already looked at: the ndimensional manifolds for which the family is reduced to M = {Rn }, the diffeological manifolds modeled on some diffeological vector space E, or a family M = {E i }i∈I of diffeological vector spaces; the nmanifolds with boundary and corners, modeled on Kn , or the orbifolds/quasifolds where M is the family of quotients {Rn /Γ }n∈N , where the Γ are the finite, or countable, subgroups of Aff(Rn ).
Exercises
✎ EXERCISE 79 (Reflexive diffeologies). Let X be any set and F be any subset of Maps(X, R). 1) Describe the coarsest diffeology D on X such that F ⊂ D(X, R). What about the finest one? We say that the diffeology D is subordinated to F . We shall say that a diffeology D of X is reflexive Diffeology!reflexive diffeology if the diffeology D ′ subordinated to F = D(X, R) coincides with D. 2) Why is the diffeology subordinated to any F ⊂ Maps(X, R) reflexive? 3) Show that the finite dimensional manifolds (art. 4.1) are reflexive. 4) Show that the irrational tori (Exercise 4, p. 10) are not reflexive. Reflexive spaces form a full subcategory of the category {Diffeology}, extending the ordinary full subcategory {Manifolds}.
✎ EXERCISE 80 (Frölicher spaces). Let X be a set, a Frölicher structure on X is
defined by a pair of sets: F ⊂ Maps(X, R) and C ⊂ Maps(R, X) such that C = C(F ) and F = F(C ), where
C(F ) = {c ∈ Maps(R, X)  F ◦ c ⊂ C ∞ (R, R)}, F(C ) = { f ∈ Maps(X, R)  f ◦ C ⊂ C ∞ (R, R)}. Said differently, C = C(F ) and F = F(C ) are what we call the Frölicher condition. Thanks to the second question of Exercise 79, p. 123, we know that the diffeology subordinated to F is reflexive. We shall admit this version of Boman’s theorem. THEOREM [Bom67]. If F ∈ Maps(Rn , R) is such that, for all γ ∈ C ∞ (R, Rn ), F ◦ γ ∈ C ∞ (R, R), then F ∈ C ∞ (Rn , R). Show that, for every reflexive diffeological space X, C = C ∞ (R, X) and F = C ∞ (X, R) satisfy the Frölicher condition.
124
4. MODELING SPACES, MANIFOLDS, ETC.
NOTE. Actually it follows from these statements that there exists an equivalence between the category of Frölicher spaces and the strict subcategory of reflexive diffeological spaces. 5 Note that, as reflexive diffeological spaces, all the diffeological constructions developed in this textbook (homotopy, differential calculus, fiber bundles, etc.) apply in particular to Frölicher spaces. We cannot expect however the same results for Frölicher spaces as for general diffeological spaces. One of many examples: the diffeological construction of the integration bundle of a closed 2form (art. 8.42) does not exist in this subcategory, except for the very special case of an integral form. Indeed, the group of periods of a closed 2form is, in general, dense in R and the torus of periods, which is a fundamental ingredient of the integration bundle, is then trivial as a Frölisher space.
5These results have been established collectively in a seminar in Toronto, during the fall of 2010, together with Augustin Batubenge, Yael Karshon and Jordan Watts.
CHAPTER 5
Homotopy of Diffeological Spaces This chapter introduces the elementary constructions and definitions of the theory of homotopy in diffeology. We shall see, in particular, the definitions of connectedness, connected components, homotopic invariants, the construction of the Poincaré groupoid, the fundamental group and the higher homotopy groups, the relative homotopy, and the exact sequence of the homotopy of a pair. Thanks to the functional diffeology on the space of paths of a diffeological space, we define the higher homotopy groups by considering simply the iteration of its space of loops. A loop of a diffeological space being defined as a smooth path having the same ends, that is, a path taking the same values for 0 and 1. This chapter is a rewriting of my thesis Fibrations difféologiques et homotopie [Igl85], where I first introduced these constructions. Connectedness and Homotopy Category In this section we split the diffeological spaces into connected components. This decomposition, applied to the spaces of smooth maps between diffeological spaces, introduces the homotopy category, homotopic equivalences, and homotopic invariants in diffeology. 5.1. The space of Paths of a diffeological space. Let X be a diffeological space. We call a smooth path of X, or simply a path of X, any smooth map from R to X. The set of all the paths in X will be denoted by Paths(X), that is, Paths(X) = C ∞ ( R, X). This set will be equipped with the functional diffeology (art. 1.57). For every path γ , we call the initial point or beginning, or starting point or simply start, of γ , the point γ (0), and we call the final point, or ending point or simply end, of γ , the point γ (1). We call the ends of γ the pair (γ (0), γ (1)). We denote these end maps by ˆ : γ 7→ γ (0), 1 ˆ : γ 7→ γ (1), and ends : γ 7→ (γ (0), γ (1)). 0 As a direct consequence of the definition of the functional diffeology, these three maps are smooth. 125
126
5. HOMOTOPY OF DIFFEOLOGICAL SPACES
Precisely: ˆ 1 ˆ ∈ C ∞ (Paths(X), X), ends ∈ C ∞ (Paths(X), X × X). 0, ˆ γ ) = x and 1( ˆ γ ) = x ′ . Let A and B be We say that a path γ connects x to x ′ if 0( ˆ γ ) ∈ A and ends in two subspaces of X. We say that a path γ of X starts in A if 0( ˆ B if 1(γ ) ∈ B. We also say that the path γ connects A to B. We shall denote by Paths(X, A, B) the subspace of paths γ ∈ Paths(X) which connect A to B, that is, Paths(X, A, B) = ends−1 (A × B). For the sake of simplicity, we may replace A (or B), in Paths(X, A, B), by a star ⋆ if A (or B) is equal to X. We may also replace A (or B) just by x if A (or B) is the singleton {x}. For example, for A = {x} and B = X, Paths(X, x, ⋆) denotes the subspace of paths which start at x, that is, Paths(X, {x} , X). For A = X and B = {x ′ }, Paths(X, ⋆, x ′ ) denotes the subspace of paths which end at x ′ , that is, Paths(X, X, {x ′ }). For A = {x} and B = {x ′ }, Paths(X, x, x ′ ) denotes the subspace of paths which start at x and end at x ′ , that is, Paths(X, {x} , {x ′ }). In the special case where A = B = {x}, an element of Paths(X, x, x) is called a loop, based at x. The space Paths(X, x, x) of all the loops based at x is denoted by Loops(X, x) = ends−1 (x, x). The subspace of all the loops in X, independently of the basepoint, is denoted by ˆ ˆ Loops(X) = ℓ ∈ Paths(X)  0(ℓ) = 1(ℓ) . In other words, Loops(X) is the pullback by ends of the diagonal X in X × X. 5.2. Concatenation of paths. Let X be a diffeological space. We say that two ˆ γ ) = 0( ˆ γ ′ ) and if there exists paths γ and γ ′ are concatenable, or juxtaposable, if 1( a path γ ∨ γ ′ such that ( γ (2t) if t ≤ 12 , ′ γ ∨ γ (t) = γ ′ (2t − 1) if 12 ≤ t. The path γ ∨ γ ′ is called the concatenation of γ and γ ′ . 5.3. Reversing paths. Let X be a diffeological space. Let γ be a path in X, let ˆ γ ) and x ′ = 1( ˆ γ ). The path x = 0(
γ¯ : t 7→ γ (1 − t) ˆ γ ) = 1( ˆ γ ) and 1(¯ ˆ γ ) = 0( ˆ γ ). The will be called the reverse path of γ . It satisfies 0(¯ map rev : γ 7→ γ¯ is obviously smooth, it is an involution of Paths(X). If γ and γ ′ are juxtaposable, then rev(γ ′ ) and rev(γ ) are juxtaposable, and rev(γ ′ ) ∨ rev(γ ) = rev(γ ∨ γ ′ ).
CONNECTEDNESS AND HOMOTOPY CATEGORY
127
ˆ ˆ γ ′ ) = 1( ˆ γ ) = 0(rev( ˆ PROOF. First of all, 1(rev( γ ′ )) = 0( γ )). Now let t ∈ R, and let ′ us express rev(γ ) ∨ rev(γ )(t), rev(γ ) ∨ rev(γ )(t) ′
= =
if t ≤ 12 , if 12 ≤ t,
rev(γ ′ )(2t) rev(γ )(2t − 1)
γ ′ (1 − 2t) γ (1 − (2t − 1)) = γ (2 − 2t)
if t ≤ 12 , if 12 ≤ t.
Now let us express rev(γ ∨ γ ′ )(t), rev(γ ∨ γ ′ )(t)
= = =
γ ∨ γ ′ (1 − t) γ (2(1 − t)) = γ (2 − 2t) γ ′ (2(1 − t) − 1) = γ ′ (1 − 2t) ′ γ (1 − 2t) if t ≤ 12 , γ (2 − 2t) if 12 ≤ t.
if 1 − t ≤ 12 , if 12 ≤ 1 − t,
That was what we had to check.
□
5.4. Stationary paths. Let X be a diffeological space. We say that a path γ is endsstationary, or simply stationary, if there exist an open neighborhood of ] − ∞, 0] and an open neighborhood of [+1, +∞[, where γ is constant. Formally, the path γ is stationary if there exists ε > 0 such that
γ ↾ ]−∞, +ε[ = [t 7→ γ (0)], and γ ↾ ]1 − ε, +∞[ = [t 7→ γ (1)].
(♣)
The set of stationary paths in X will be denoted by stPaths(X). The prefix st will be used to denote everything stationary. The paths satisfying (♣) will be also called εstationary. Let stPathsε (X) be the space of εstationary paths in X. ˆ γ ) = 0( ˆ γ ′ ). 1. Two stationary paths γ and γ ′ are juxtaposable iff 1( 2. Let Jε be the space of juxtaposable εstationary pairs of paths in X, ˆ γ ) = 0( ˆ γ ′) . Jε = (γ , γ ′ ) ∈ stPathsε (X) × stPathsε (X)  1( The concatenation ∨ : Jε → stPaths(X), defined by ∨(γ , γ ′ ) = γ ∨ γ ′ , is smooth and takes its values in stPathsε/2 (X). NOTE. The concatenation of stationary paths is not associative, if γ , γ ′ and γ ′′ are ˆ γ ) = 0( ˆ γ ′ ) and 1( ˆ γ ′ ) = 0( ˆ γ ′′ ), then γ ∨ (γ ′ ∨ γ ′′ ) three stationary paths such that 1( ′ ′′ is a priori different from (γ ∨ γ ) ∨ γ . For a finite family of stationary paths (γk )nk=1 ˆ γk ) = 0( ˆ γk+1 ), with 1 ≤ k < n, we should prefer, for reason of symmetry, such that 1(
128
5. HOMOTOPY OF DIFFEOLOGICAL SPACES
the multiple concatenation defined by γ1 (nt − 1 + 1) ··· γk (nt − k + 1) γ1 ∨ γ2 ∨ · · · ∨ γn : t 7→ ··· γn (nt − n + 1)
t ≤ 1n , k−1 n
≤ t ≤ nk ,
n−1 n
≤ t,
ˆ γ1 ) to 1( ˆ γn ). which is still a stationary path, connecting 0( PROOF. For the first proposition. Let us assume that γ and γ ′ are two stationary ˆ γ ) = 0( ˆ γ ′ ). We can assume that γ and γ ′ satisfy (♣) for the paths in X such that 1( same ε > 0. Let γ−′′ and γ+′′ be the two 1parametrizations in X defined by 1 ε γ−′′ : −∞, + → X with γ−′′ (t) = γ (2t), 2 2 1 ε γ+′′ : − , +∞ → X with γ−′′ (t) = γ ′ (2t − 1). 2 2 Now, on the intersection of their domains def(γ−′′ ) ∩ def(γ+′′ )
1 ε 1 ε , = − , + 2 2 2 2
γ−′′ and γ+′′ coincide: γ−′′ ↾ def(γ−′′ ) ∩ def(γ+′′ ) = γ+′′ ↾ def(γ−′′ ) ∩ def(γ+′′ ) = [t 7→ γ (1) = γ ′ (0)]. By application of the axiom of locality of diffeology (see Exercise 2, p. 8), the supremum of {γ−′′ , γ+′′ }, which is exactly γ ∨ γ ′ , is a plot of X. Thus, γ and γ ′ are juxtaposable. Let us now prove the second proposition. Let r 7→ (P(r), P′ (r)) ∈ Jε be a plot defined on a domain U. Precisely, P : U → stPathsε and P′ : U → stPathsε are two plots such that, for all r ∈ U, P(r)(1) = P(r)(0). Then, let us consider the parametrization Q : U × R → X defined by ( P(r)(2t) if t ≤ 12 , ′ Q : (r, t) 7→ (P(r) ∨ P (r))(t) = P′ (r)(2t − 1) if 21 ≤ t. Let
1 ε 1 ε V− = U × −∞, + , and V+ = U × − ,∞ . 2 2 2 2
We have then V− ∪ V+ = U × R, and V− ∩ V+ = U ×
1 ε 1 ε − , + . 2 2 2 2
Let Q− : V− → X be defined by Q− (r, t) = P(r)(2t), and Q+ : V+ → X be defined by Q+ (r, t) = P′ (r)(2t − 1). Since Q− ↾ V− ∩ V+ = Q+ ↾ V− ∩ V+ = [(r, t) 7→ P(r)(1) =
CONNECTEDNESS AND HOMOTOPY CATEGORY
129
1
!
0 "
1
FIGURE 5.1. The smashing function λ. P′ (r)(0)], Q = sup{Q− , Q+ } is a plot of X (see above). Therefore, r 7→ P(r) ∨ P′ (r) is a plot of Paths(X), and the concatenation is a smooth map from Jε to Paths(X). Then, it is clear that P(r) ∨ P′ (r) is in Jε/2 , for every r ∈ U. □ 5.5. Homotopy of paths. Let X be a diffeological space. Because Paths(X) is itself a diffeological space, it makes sense to say that a path s 7→ γs in Paths(X) connects γ and γ ′ , that is, [s 7→ γs ] ∈ Paths(Paths(X)) = C ∞ (R, Paths(X)), with γ0 = γ and γ1 = γ ′ . • Freeends homotopy. Such a path γ 7→ γs is called a freeends homotopy, connecting γ to γ ′ , or from γ to γ ′ . • Fixedends homotopy. Now, let Paths(X, x, x ′ ) be the set of paths in X connecting x to x ′ , equipped with the subset diffeology of Paths(X) (art. 1.33). A path [s 7→ γs ] ∈ Paths(Paths(X, x, x ′ )) = C ∞ (R, Paths(X, x, x ′ )) is called a fixedends homotopy from γ to γ ′ . But note that, by definition of the subset diffeology, [s 7→ γs ] is a fixedends homotopy if and only if [s 7→ γs ] ∈ Paths(Paths(X)) and for every s ∈ R, γs (0) = x and γs (1) = x ′ . A crucial property of homotopy in diffeology is that every path γ is fixedends homotopic to a stationary path. Let us consider the smashing function λ described by in Figure 5.1, where ε is some strictly positive real number, 0 < ε ≪ 1. The real function λ satisfies essentially the following conditions, and we can choose it increasing,
λ ∈ C ∞ (R, R), λ ↾ ]−∞, ε[ = 0, λ ↾ ]1 − ε, +∞[ = 1. Let γ ∈ Paths(X). We have the following properties:
130
5. HOMOTOPY OF DIFFEOLOGICAL SPACES
(a) The path γ ⋆ = γ ◦ λ is stationary with the same ends as γ . (b) The path γ is fixedends homotopic to γ ⋆ . ˆ γ ) = 0( ˆ γ ′ ) are NOTE. As we know, not any two paths γ , γ ′ ∈ Paths(X) such that 1( juxtaposable, but we can always force the concatenation by smashing them first. Hereafter, we shall use often this smashed concatenation, denoted and defined by
γ ⋆ γ ′ = γ ⋆ ∨ γ ′⋆ . As a consequence of the point (b), if γ and γ ′ are juxtaposable, then γ ⋆ γ ′ is homotopic to γ ∨ γ ′ . PROOF. Since λ(0) = 0 and λ(1) = 1, γ ⋆ has the same ends as γ . Moreover, γ ⋆ ↾ ]−∞, ε[ = [t 7→ γ (0)] and γ ⋆ ↾ ]1 − ε, +∞[ = [t 7→ γ (1)]. Therefore, γ ⋆ is stationary, and part (a) is proved. Now, consider the following map: [s 7→ λ s = [t 7→ sλ(t) + (1 − s)t]] ∈ Paths(C ∞ (R)). We have then,
λ 0 = 1R , λ 1 = λ, and λ s (0) = 0, λ s (1) = 1 for all s ∈ R. Thus, [s 7→ γs = γ ◦ λ s ] is a path in Paths(X, x, x ′ ), where x = γ (0) and x ′ = γ (1), connecting γ = γ0 to γ ⋆ = γ1 . □ 5.6. Pathwise connectedness. Let X be a diffeological space. We say that two points x and x ′ of X are pathwise connected, or simply connected, or homotopic, if ˆ γ ) = γ (0) = x and 1( ˆ γ ) = γ (1) = there exists a path γ connecting x to x ′ , that is, 0( ′ x . We say that X is pathwise connected, or simply connected, if any two points x and x ′ of X can be connected by a path. In other words, X is connected if the map ends (art. 5.1) is surjective. Moreover, (♦) If X is connected, then ends : Paths(X) → X × X is a subduction, and ˆ ↾ Paths(X, x, ⋆) conversely. This implies, in particular, that the end maps 1 ˆ ↾ Paths(X, ⋆, x ′ ) are two subductions onto X. and 0 ˆ↾ (♥) If X is connected, then the restrictions ends ↾ stPaths(X) → X × X, 1 ′ ˆ ↾ stPaths(X, ⋆, x ) → X are three subductions, stPaths(X, x, ⋆) → X and 0 where stPaths(X) is equipped with the subset diffeology. NOTE. If ends is surjective, we can give a more precise statement: for every plot P : U → X × X, for every r0 ∈ U, there exists a smooth lift Q : V → Paths(X) of P defined on every starshaped domain V, centered at r0 . Actually, this lift takes its values in the space stPaths(X). PROOF. Let us prove that if ends is surjective, then it is a subduction. The converse is just a part of the definition. Let us assume ends : Paths(X) → X × X surjective, let
CONNECTEDNESS AND HOMOTOPY CATEGORY
131
r 7→ (P(r), P′ (r)) be a plot of X × X defined on a domain U. Let r0 ∈ U, x 0 = P(r0 ) and x 0′ = P′ (r0 ). Let V ⊂ U be a starshaped open domain centered at r0 , that is, for every r ∈ V the segment {t r0 + (1 − t)r  t ∈ [0, 1]} is contained in V. We can think of V as an open ball, for example. Let λ be the smashing function defined in (art. 5.5), then: (a) According to (art. 5.4), there exists a stationary path c ∈ stPathsε (X), connecting x 0 to x 0′ , that is, c(0) = x 0 and c(1) = x 0′ . (b) For every point r of V, {λ(t)r0 + (1 − λ(t))r  t ∈ R} is contained in V, thus γr : t 7→ P(λ(t)r0 + (1 − λ(t))r) is well defined and is an εstationary path in X connecting P(r) to x 0 . The parametrization r 7→ γr is a plot of stPathsε (X, ⋆, x 0 ), defined on V. (c) For every point r of V, γr′ : t 7→ P′ (λ(t)r + (1 − λ(t))r0 ) is an εstationary path in X connecting x 0′ to P′ (r). The parametrization r 7→ γr′ is a plot of stPathsε (X, x 0′ , ⋆), defined on V. Now, according to (art. 5.4), the parametrization r 7→ γr ∨ c, defined on V, is a plot of stPaths(X). More precisely, r 7→ γr ∨ c is a plot of stPathsε/2 (X, ⋆, x 0′ ). Then, the parametrization Q : r 7→ (γr ∨ c) ∨ γr′ , defined on V, is a plot of stPaths(X). Again, since γr′ is εstationary, it is (ε/2)stationary, and since (γr ∨ c) is (ε/2)stationary, (γr ∨ c) ∨ γr′ is (ε/4)stationary. Thus, Q is a plot of stPathsε/4 (X). Finally, Q is a plot of Paths(X) such that, for every r ∈ V, Q(r)(0) = γr (0) = P(r) and Q(r)(1) = γr′ (1) = P′ (r). Hence, Q is a local lift along ends of the plot r 7→ (P(r), P′ (r)). Therefore, ends is a subduction (art. 1.48). □ 5.7. Connected components. Let X be a diffeological space. To be connected by a path is an equivalence relation on X. The classes of this relation are the pathwiseconnected components of X. Moreover, the pathwiseconnected components of X coincide with the connected components of the Dtopology (art. 2.8). There is no ambiguity in simply calling them connected components. The component of a point x ∈ X will be denoted by comp(x), comp(x) = x ′ ∈ X  ∃γ ∈ Paths(X) such that ends(γ ) = (x, x ′ ) . The set of the connected components of X, the values of the map comp : X → P(X), is usually denoted by π0 (X),
π0 (X) = {comp(x)  x ∈ X} . PROOF. Let us check the three properties of the equivalence relations for pathwiseconnectedness. Reflexivity. To be connected is of course reflexive: for each x ∈ X, the constant path [t 7→ x] connects x to x.
132
5. HOMOTOPY OF DIFFEOLOGICAL SPACES
Symmetry. For all x and x ′ in X, if γ connects x to x ′ , then the reverse path γ¯ = [t 7→ γ (1 − t)] (art. 5.3) connects x ′ to x. Transitivity. Let γ be a path connecting x to x ′ , and let γ ′ be a path connecting x ′ to x ′′ . We would like to use the concatenation γ ∨ γ ′ (art. 5.2) to connect x to x ′′ , but γ and γ ′ are perhaps not juxtaposable. It is why one needs to smash γ and γ ′ first. Let γ ⋆ = γ ◦ λ and γ ′⋆ = γ ′ ◦ λ, where λ is the smashing function defined in (art. 5.4); see Figure 5.1. These paths γ ⋆ and γ ′⋆ have, respectively, the same ends as γ and γ ′ , but they are juxtaposable (art. 5.4). Hence, their concatenation γ ⋆ γ ′ = γ ⋆ ∨ γ ′⋆ connects x to x ′′ . Now, let us consider X, equipped with the Dtopology. Let O be any pathwiseconnected component of X. Let us first check that the plots of X take locally their values in pathwiseconnected components of X. Then, let P : U → X be a plot. Let r0 ∈ U, x 0 = P(r0 ), and let X 0 be the pathwiseconnected component of x 0 . Let B ∈ U be a ball centered at r0 . For every point r ∈ B, t 7→ P(λ(t)r + (1 − λ(t))r0 ) is a path of X connecting x 0 to P(r). Thus, P(B) ⊂ X 0 and P ↾ B is a plot of X 0 . Hence, P takes locally its values in the pathwiseconnected components of X. Thus, S P−1 (O ) = {r ∈ U  P(r) ∈ O } is also equal to r∈P−1 (O ) Br , where Br is some ball centered at r and contained in U. Hence, as a union of open balls, P−1 (O ) is a domain. Therefore O is Dopen. Now, X is the union of its pathwiseconnected components, which are all Dopen. Since X − O is a union of pathwiseconnected components, X − O is Dopen, and O is Dclosed. Thus, O is at the same time open and closed for the Dtopology. Therefore, O is a union of Dconnected components [Bou61, 115]. Next, let us show that any pathwiseconnected component cannot be the union of two disjoint not empty Dconnected components. Let us assume that O = A ∪ B, where A and B are two different Dconnected components. Let x ′ ∈ A and x ′′ ∈ B. Since O is a pathwiseconnected component, there exists a path γ connecting x ′ to x ′′ . But, as a smooth map, γ is Dcontinuous (art. 2.9). Since continuous maps preserve Dconnectedness, and since R is connected, its image by γ is fully contained in one Dconnected component [Bou61, 112]. But this is in contradiction with the hypothesis. Thus, O is just one Dconnected component. □ 5.8. The sum of its components. Let X be a diffeological space. The space X is the sum (art. 1.39) of its connected components (art. 5.7). More precisely, if X is the sum of a family {X i }i∈I , then the connected components of the X i are the connected components of X. The decomposition of X into the sum of its connected components is the finest decomposition of X into a sum. It follows that the set of components π0 (X), equipped with the quotient diffeology of X by the relation connectedness, is discrete.
CONNECTEDNESS AND HOMOTOPY CATEGORY
133
PROOF. We have seen above (art. 5.7) that the plots of X take locally their values in the components of X. Therefore, X is the sum of its connected components (art. 1.39). Now, it is clear that if two points of some component X i are connected in X i , they are connected in X. Hence, every connected component of X i is a subset of a connected component of X. Conversely, let x and x ′ be two points of X connected by a path γ in X. Now, let τ : t 7→ i be the map which associates with every t ∈ R the index i ∈ I such that γ (t) ∈ X i . By definition of the sum of diffeological spaces, τ is locally constant, and thanks to Exercise 7, p. 16, τ is constant on the connected component of its domain. But τ is defined on R which is connected. Thus, τ is constant and x and x ′ are connected in some X i . Hence, every connected component of X i is a connected component of X and conversely, every connected component of any X i is a connected component of X. As a direct consequence of that proposition, the decomposition of X into connected components is the finest decomposition of X into a sum. Now, let us regard π0 (X) as the quotient space X/comp, notation (art. 1.54). Every plot of π0 (X) lifts locally along the projection X → π0 (X) into a plot of X (art. 1.50). But every plot of X takes locally its values into some component of X. Hence, every plot of π0 (X) is locally constant. Therefore, π0 (X), equipped with the quotient diffeology, is discrete (art. 1.20). □ 5.9. Smooth maps and connectedness. Let X be a diffeological space. We say that a subset A ⊂ X is connected if and only if A, equipped with the subset diffeology (art. 1.33), is connected. Note that every connected subset A ⊂ X is contained in a connected component of X. The connected component of a point x ∈ X is the greatest connected subset of X containing x, the union of all the connected subsets containing x. Let X′ be another diffeological space, and let f : X → X′ be a smooth map. The image by f , of any connected subset A ⊂ X, is connected. In particular, f projects to a map f# defined by f# : π0 (X) → π0 (X′ ), with f# ◦ compX = compX′ ◦ f . Moreover, for any triple of diffeological spaces X, X′ , X′′ and for any pair of smooth maps f : X → X′ and g : X′ → X′′ , we have (g ◦ f )# = g# ◦ f# . Now, C ∞ (X, X′ ) being itself a diffeological space, for the functional diffeology, two smooth maps f and f ′ from X to X′ are homotopic if there exists a smooth path φ ∈ Paths(C ∞ (X, X′ )) such that φ (0) = f and φ (1) = f ′ . If f and f ′ are homotopic, then they have the same projection in homotopy: f ′ ∈ comp( f ), implies f#′ = f# .
134
5. HOMOTOPY OF DIFFEOLOGICAL SPACES
We can then denote by comp( f )# the map f# , comp( f ) ∈ π0 (C ∞ (X, X′ )), and comp( f )# : π0 (X) → π0 (X′ ). Therefore, the decomposition of a diffeological space into the sum of its connected components defines π0 as a functor from the category {Diffeology} to the category {Set} (or to the subcategory of discrete diffeological spaces). It associates with every diffeological space X the set π0 (X) of its components, and to every smooth map f : X → X′ , the map comp( f )# : π0 (X) → π0 (X′ ). PROOF. Let A be a connected subset of X, and let f : X → X′ be a smooth map. Let x ′ and y ′ be two points of f (A), let x and y in X such that x ′ = f (x) and y ′ = f ( y). Since A is connected, there exists a path γ ∈ Paths(A) connecting x to y. Thus, the path f ◦ γ ∈ Paths( f (A)) connects x ′ to y ′ . Therefore f (A) is connected. Now, since connected components of X are connected, it makes sense to define f# (compX (x)) by compX′ ( f (x)), for all x ∈ X. The factorization property (g ◦ f )# = g# ◦ f# is just obvious. Now, let us consider a homotopy φ connecting f to f ′ , and let x ∈ X. The path t 7→ φ (t)(x) connects f (x) to f ′ (x). Thus, comp( f (x)) = comp( f (x ′ )), and the map comp# ( f ) is well defined from π0 (X) to π0 (X′ ). □ 5.10. The homotopy category. Let X, X′ , and X′′ be three diffeological spaces. Let f ∈ C ∞ (X, X′ ) and g ∈ C ∞ (X′ , X′′ ). If f ′ ∈ C ∞ (X, X′ ) is homotopic to f and g ′ ∈ C ∞ (X′ , X′′ ) is homotopic to g, then g ′ ◦ f ′ is homotopic to g ◦ f . Thus, it makes sense to define a new category {DHomotopy} whose objects are diffeological spaces and whose morphisms are the connected components of smooth maps: Obj{DHomotopy} = Obj{Diffeology}, MorDH (X, X′ ) = π0 (MorD (X, X′ )) = π0 (C ∞ (X, X′ )). Actually the category {DHomotopy} is a quotient of the category {Diffeology}, where the objects are untouched, but the arrows between two objects are packed by the homotopy relation. We then get a natural functor χ which associates, with every f ∈ C ∞ (X, X′ ), its component comp( f ) ∈ π0 (C ∞ (X, X′ )). {Diffeology} χ
{DHomotopy}
π0 π0
{Set}
The identity of an object X, in the new category, is the component comp(1X ) of the identity map of X. The isomorphisms of this category are called homotopic equivalences. Two diffeological spaces X and X′ are homotopy equivalent if and only if there exist a map f : X → X′ and a map g : X′ → X such that comp(g ◦ f ) = comp(1X ) and comp( f ◦ g) = comp(1X′ ).
CONNECTEDNESS AND HOMOTOPY CATEGORY
135
A homotopic invariant of the category {Diffeology} is any functor from the category {Diffeology} which factorizes through the functor χ , for example the functor connected components π0 , as shown in the above diagram. PROOF. Let φ be a homotopy connecting f to f ′ , and let ψ be a homotopy connecting g to g ′ . The 1parametrization t 7→ ψ(t) ◦ φ (t) splits into t 7→ (ψ(t), φ (t)) 7→ ψ(t) ◦ φ (t). But since the composition is smooth (art. 1.59), t 7→ ψ(t) ◦ φ (t) is the composite of two smooth maps. Thus, it is a path in C ∞ (X, X′′ ), connecting g ◦ f to g ′ ◦ f ′ . Therefore, the category {DHomotopy} is well defined. □ 5.11. Contractible diffeological spaces. Let X be a diffeological space. The final objects of the category {DHomotopy} are called contractible diffeological spaces. Let x 0 be any point of X, we have the following two propositions: 1. The space X is contractible if and only if there exists a smooth section σ : ˆ that is, σ ∈ C ∞ (X, Paths(X, x 0 , ⋆)) and X → Paths(X, x 0 , ⋆) of the target map 1, ˆ 1 ◦ σ = 1X . 2. The space X is contractible if and only if the constant map x 0 = [x 7→ x 0 ] is homotopic to the identity 1X . In other words, if and only if there exists a smooth path ρ ∈ Paths(C ∞ (X, X)) such that ρ(0) = x 0 and ρ(1) = 1X , where C ∞ (X, X) is equipped with the functional diffeology. We remark that if these properties are satisfied for some point x 0 , they are satisfied for every point of X. NOTE 1. A diffeological space is contractible if and only if it is homotopy equivalent to a point. NOTE 2. All the smooth maps from a diffeological space to a contractible diffeological space are homotopic. NOTE 3. All the smooth maps from a contractible diffeological space to a connected diffeological space are homotopic. ˆ if and only if PROOF. Let us prove first that there exists a smooth section σ of 1 the identity 1X is homotopic to the constant map x 0 . Let ρ ∈ Paths(C ∞ (X, X)) be a path such that ρ(0) = x 0 and ρ(1) = 1X . Let σ : x 7→ [t 7→ ρ(t)(x)]. Since the map (t, x) 7→ ρ(t)(x) is smooth, by the very definition of the functional diffeology, the map σ is smooth. Also, for every x ∈ X, σ (x)(0) = ρ(0)(x) = x 0 (x) = x 0 and ˆ ◦ σ = 1X . σ (x)(1) = ρ(1)(x) = 1X (x) = x. Hence, σ ∈ C ∞ (X, Paths(X, x 0 , ⋆)) and 1 ˆ Thus, σ is a smooth section of the map 1 : Paths(X, x 0 , ⋆) → X. Now, let σ be a ˆ : Paths(X, x 0 , ⋆) → X. Then, the map ρ : t 7→ [x 7→ smooth section of the map 1
136
5. HOMOTOPY OF DIFFEOLOGICAL SPACES
σ (x)(t)] is a smooth path in C ∞ (X, X) satisfying ρ(0)(x) = σ (x)(0) = x 0 and ρ(1)(x) = σ (x)(1) = x. Thus, ρ is a homotopy from x 0 to 1X . ˆ : Paths(X, x 0 , ⋆) → X, Let us remark that, if there exists a smooth section σ of 1 then the map σ ⋆ : x 7→ σ (x) ◦ λ, where λ is the smashing function described in ˆ with values in the subspace of stationary paths (art. 5.5), is a smooth section of 1 stPaths(X, x 0 , ⋆). Now, let γ be a stationary path connecting x 1 to x 0 , the map ˆ : Paths(X, x 1 , ⋆) → X. σ ′ : x 7→ γ ∨ σ ⋆ (x) is smooth (art. 5.4), and it is a section of 1 ˆ : Paths(X, x 0 , ⋆) → X for some Therefore, if there exists a smooth section σ of 1 ˆ : Paths(X, x, ⋆) → X for every point x point x 0 , then there exists a smooth section 1 of X. Hence, if there exists a homotopy from x 0 to the identity 1X , for some point x 0 , then there exists a homotopy from any constant map x to 1X . Now, let X′ be another diffeological space. Let ρ be a path, connecting the constant map x 0 to the identity 1X . Let f be a smooth map from X′ to X. So, t 7→ ρ(t) ◦ f is a homotopy connecting the constant map x ′ 7→ x 0 to f . Thus, every smooth map from X′ to X are homotopic, and homotopic to a constant map. Therefore, the propositions 1 and 2 are proved. For Note 1, let us denote by j the injection of {x 0 } into X. We have, on the one hand, comp(x 0 ) ◦ comp( j) = comp(x 0 ◦ j) = comp(1{x 0 } ), and on the other hand, comp( j) ◦ comp(x 0 ) = comp( j ◦ x 0 ) = comp(x 0 ) = comp(1X ). Thus, X and {x 0 } are homotopy equivalent. Note 2 is just the definition of a final object of the category {DHomotopy}. Let us recall that a final object of a category is an object X such that, for every other object X′ , there exists one and only one morphism from X′ to X [McL71]. Finally, let us consider a connected diffeological space X′ and a contractible diffeological space X. Let f : X → X′ be a smooth map. Let x 0 ∈ X and x 0′ = f (x 0 ) ∈ X′ . The path [t 7→ f t = f ◦ ρ(t)] connects the constant map x ′0 : x → x 0′ to f , where ρ is a homotopy from x 0 to 1X . Now, let g be another smooth map from X to X′ , then g is connected to the constant map x ′′0 : x 7→ x 0′′ = g(x 0 ). But since X′ is connected, there exists a path γ connecting x 0′ to x 0′′ . Let us denote by γ t the constant map x 7→ x t = γ (t). Thus, the path [t 7→ γ t ] connects x ′0 = γ 0 to x ′′0 = γ 1 . Therefore, f is connected to g, and the third note is proved. □ 5.12. Local contractibility. We say that a diffeological space X is locally contractible if for every point x of X, every Dopen (art. 2.8) neighborhood of x contains a contractible Dopen neighborhood of x. Note that every diffeological space, modeled on a locally contractible diffeological space (art. 4.19), is obviously locally contractible. The main example of locally contractible diffeological spaces is the category of finite dimensional manifolds.
CONNECTEDNESS AND HOMOTOPY CATEGORY
137
5.13. Retractions and deformation retracts. Let X be a diffeological space. We call retraction any idempotent smooth map ρ : X → X, that is, any ρ ∈ C ∞ (X, X) such that ρ ◦ ρ = ρ. The space A = val(ρ) is called a retract of X, and ρ is said to be a retraction from X to A. Note that ρ ↾ A = 1A . We say that ρ is a deformation retraction if, moreover, ρ is homotopic to the identity of X. Let ρ be a deformation retraction from X to A. Let t 7→ ρ t be a homotopy from ρ to 1X , we define σ by
σ (x) = [t 7→ ρ t (x)]. ˆ : Paths(X, A, ⋆) → X such that 0 ˆ ◦ σ ↾ A = 1A . Then, σ is a smooth section of 1 ˆ Conversely, let σ : X → Paths(X, A, ⋆) be a smooth section of 1 : Paths(X, A, ⋆) → X ˆ ◦ σ ↾ A = 1A . Then, ρ = 0 ˆ ◦ σ is a deformation retraction from X to A, such that 0 and t 7→ [x 7→ σ (x)(t)] is a homotopy from ρ to 1X . NOTE 1. A diffeological space is homotopy equivalent to any one of its deformation retracts. ¯ be a subduction, and let ρ be a smooth deformation retraction NOTE 2. Let π : X → X of X, compatible with π , that is, π (x) = π (x ′ ) implies π (ρ(x)) = π (ρ(x ′ )). Thus, ¯ such that π ◦ ρ = ρ ¯ of X ¯ ◦ π , with there exists a smooth deformation retraction ρ ¯ = π (A). Moreover, if s 7→ ρs is a deformation retraction of X such that ρs retract A ¯. ¯s is a deformation retraction of X is compatible with π for all s, then s 7→ ρ PROOF. First of all, as an immediate consequence of functional diffeology (art. 1.57), ˆ ◦ σ (x) = σ (x)(1) = ρ1 (x) = x. σ is smooth. Now, since ρ1 = 1X , for all x ∈ X, 1 ˆ : Paths(X) → X. Moreover, for all x ∈ X, 0 ˆ ◦ σ (x) = Thus, σ is a section of 1 ˆ σ (x)(0) = ρ0 (x) = ρ(x) ∈ A. Thus, σ is a section of 1 : Paths(X, A, ⋆) → X. Now, ˆ ◦ σ (x) = ρ(x) = x. Thus, 0 ˆ ◦ σ ↾ A = 1A . since ρ ↾ A = 1A , if x ∈ A, then 0 ˆ : Paths(X, A, ⋆) → X such that 0◦ ˆ σ ↾ A = 1A . Conversely, let σ be a smooth section of 1 ˆ Let us define ρ t by [x 7→ σ (x)(t)], and ρ by 0 ◦ σ , that is, ρ = ρ0 . So, t 7→ ρ t is smooth, and for every x ∈ A, ρ(x) = x. Thus ρ ◦ ρ = ρ. Now, since σ is a section of ˆ : Paths(X, A, ⋆) → X, ρ1 = 1X , and ρ is a deformation retraction from X to A. 1 Now, let us consider the injection jA : A → X. We have comp(ρ ◦ jA ) = comp(1A ), and comp( jA ◦ ρ) = comp(ρ) = comp(1X ). Therefore, comp(ρ) and comp( jA ) are the inverse of each other and A is homotopy equivalent to X. For the second note, ¯, uniquely defined by π ◦ ρ = ρ ¯ ◦ π , is smooth since π is a subduction, the map ρ (art. 1.51). Thus, if s 7→ ρs is smooth, that is, if (s, x) 7→ ρs (x) is smooth, then the ¯s (¯ factorization (s, x¯ ) 7→ ρ x ) is smooth for the same reason, because (s, x) 7→ (s, x¯ ) is a subduction. □
138
5. HOMOTOPY OF DIFFEOLOGICAL SPACES
Exercises
✎ EXERCISE 81 (Connecting points). Let X be a diffeological space. Show that π0 (X) ≃ π0 (C ∞ ({0} , X)), which justifies the wording “homotopic points” instead of “connected points”.
✎ EXERCISE 82 (Connecting segments). Let X be a diffeological space. Let x and
x ′ be any pair of points of X. Show that x and x ′ are connected if and only if there exists a 1parametrization σ : ]a′ , b′ [ → X such that σ (a) = x, σ (b) = x ′ and a′ < a < b < b′ . Deduce, in particular, that any open ball in Rn is connected.
✎ EXERCISE 83 (Contractible space of paths). Show that the space Paths(X, x, ⋆) of pointed paths (art. 5.1) is contractible. More generally, show that Paths(X, A, ⋆) is homotopy equivalent to A, for every A ⊂ X. ✎ EXERCISE 84 (Deformation onto stationary paths). Let X be a diffeological space. Show that γ 7→ γ ⋆ from Paths(X) to stPaths(X) (art. 5.5, (a)) is a homotopy equivalence respecting the projection ends, that is, a homotopy equivalence (art. 5.10), and a homotopy equivalence for the diffeology foliated by ends (art. 1.41).
✎ EXERCISE 85 (Contractible quotient). Consider the group of units of the complex plane acting by multiplication (ζ k , z) 7→ ζ k z, where (ζ k , z) ∈ Zm × C, ¦ © 2π k Zm = ζ k = e i m  k = 0, . . . , m − 1 .
Show that C/Zm , equipped with the quotient diffeology, is contractible.
✎ EXERCISE 86 (Locally contractible manifolds). Show that every finite dimensional manifold (art. 4.1) is locally contractible (art. 5.12). Poincaré Groupoid and Homotopy Groups The main homotopic invariants for a diffeological space are its Poincaré groupoid, and then its various homotopy groups. They are defined for any diffeological space by a recurrence on its spaces of loops. For the diffeological notion of groupoid, see (art. 8.2) and note that this section is closely related to the construction of the universal covering for diffeological spaces (art. 8.26). 5.14. Pointed spaces and spaces of components. The category of pointed diffeological spaces is a straightforward specialization of the category of pointed sets. The objects of this category are the pairs (X, x) where X is a diffeological space and x a point of X. A morphism from (X, x) to (X′ , x ′ ) is a smooth map f : X → X′ such that x ′ = f (x). We shall adopt the following conventions. For a diffeological space X and a point x ∈ X, we shall denote by π0 (X, x) the space π0 (X) pointed by
POINCARÉ GROUPOID AND HOMOTOPY GROUPS
139
π0 (X, x) = (π0 (X), comp(x)).
(♦)
the component of x,
Groups are naturally pointed by their identity, and there is a natural identification (actually a functor) which associates every group G with the pointed space (G, 1G ). So, we sometimes use one for the other, G ∼ (G, 1G ).
(♥)
Morphisms from a group G to a pointed space (X, x) are understood as morphisms of pointed space, that is, maps from G to X mapping 1G to x. 5.15. The Poincaré groupoid and fundamental group. Let X be a diffeological space. Let Π be the following equivalence relation on Paths(X), ¨ there exist x, x ′ ∈ X and ξ ∈ Paths(Paths(X, x, x ′ )) ′ γΠγ ⇔ (♠) such that ξ(0) = γ and ξ(1) = γ ′ . Said differently, γ and γ ′ belong to the same component of Paths(X, x, x ′ ), which implies in particular ends(γ ) = ends(γ ′ ) = (x, x ′ ). We shall denote by Π (X) the diffeological quotient (art. 1.50) of Paths(X) by the relation Π , and by class : Paths(X) → Π (X) = Paths(X)/Π the canonical projection. We shall denote again by ends the factorization of ends : Paths(X) → X × X on Π (X). Note that, if X is connected, then ends : Π (X) → X × X is a subduction, and class ↾ stPaths(X) → Π (X) is also a subduction, where stPaths(X) ⊂ Paths(X) is the subspace of stationary paths in X (art. 5.4), (art. 5.6). The Poincaré groupoid X (art. 8.2) is then defined by Obj(X) = X, and Mor(X) = Π (X), and for all x and x ′ in X, MorX (x, x ′ ) = Paths(X, x, x ′ )/Π = π0 (Paths(X, x, x ′ )) is the set of fixedends homotopy classes of the paths connecting x to x ′ . The composition in the groupoid is the projection of the concatenation of paths (art. 5.2), For all τ ∈ MorX (x, x ′ ) and τ ′ ∈ MorX (x ′ , x ′′ ),
τ · τ ′ = class(γ ∨ γ ′ ), where τ = class(γ ), and τ ′ = class(γ ′ ). The paths γ and γ ′ are chosen in stPaths(X), for the concatenation γ ∨ γ ′ to be well defined; see (art. 5.4).
140
5. HOMOTOPY OF DIFFEOLOGICAL SPACES
The construction of the Poincaré groupoid is summarized by the following diagram. Paths(X)
class
ends
Π (X) ends
X×X The isotropy groups X x = MorX (x, x) and the inverse of the elements of X(x, x ′ ) = MorX (x, x ′ ) are described by what follows: (a) For every point x of X, the isotropy group 1 x ∈ X x is the component class(x ), in Loops(X, x), of the constant path x : t 7→ x. (b) The inverse τ −1 of τ = class(γ ) ∈ MorX (x, x ′ ) is the component class(¯ γ) of the reverse path γ¯ = rev(γ ), defined in (art. 5.3). The structure group X x = MorX (x, x), where x ∈ X, is called the first homotopy group, or the fundamental group, of X at the point x. It is denoted by π1 (X, x),
π1 (X, x) = π0 (Loops(X, x)).
(♣)
If X is connected, then the fundamental groups at different points are isomorphic. They are precisely conjugate, if τ ∈ MorX (x, x ′ ), then
π1 (X, x) = τ · π1 (X, x ′ ) · τ −1 . In this case, the type of the homotopy groups π1 (X, x) is denoted by π1 (X). The space X is said to be simply connected if it is connected, π0 (X) = {X}, and if its fundamental group π1 (X) is trivial. Or, which is equivalent, ¨ π0 (X) = {X} , X simply connected ⇔ #MorX (x, x ′ ) = 1, for all x, x ′ . In this case, the map ends : Π (X) → X × X is a diffeomorphism. In other words, X is simply connected if and only if ends : Π (X) → X × X is a diffeomorphism. NOTE 1. In the following, π1 (X, x) will denote the fundamental group as it is defined above (♣), as well as the pointed space π1 (X, x) ∼ (π0 (Loops(X, x)), x ). NOTE 2. If X is not connected, then π1 (X, x) is also the fundamental group of the connected component of x, that is, π1 (X, x) = π1 (comp(x), x) = π1 (comp(x)), since there is one type of fundamental group by component. PROOF. Let us check that we have defined a groupoid, that is, a small category such that every morphism is invertible [McL75]. 1. The composition of arrows is associative. Let γ , γ ′ and γ ′′ be three stationary paths. For s belonging to a small open neighborhood of [0, 1], let us define
POINCARÉ GROUPOID AND HOMOTOPY GROUPS
σ (s) = t 7→
t≤
1 4−s ,
γ ′ (s × (3t − 1) + (1 − s) × (4t − 1))
1 4−s
≤t≤
γ ′′ (s × (3t − 2) + (1 − s) × (2t − 1))
1+s 4−s
≤ t.
γ (s × 3t + (1 − s) × 4t)
141
1+s 4−s ,
Since the paths γ , γ and γ are stationary, the 1parametrization σ (s) is smooth, this is similar to (art. 5.4). ′
′′
Then, σ (0) = (γ ∨ γ ′ ) ∨ γ ′′ , and
σ (1) = γ ∨ γ ′ ∨ γ ′′ : t 7→
γ (3t)
t ≤ 13 ,
γ ′ (3t − 1)
1 3
≤ t ≤ 23 ,
γ ′′ (3t − 2)
2 3
≤ t.
It is not difficult to find a homotopy of the same kind connecting σ (1) to γ ∨(γ ′ ∨ γ ′′ ). So, (γ ∨ γ ′ ) ∨ γ ′′ and γ ∨ (γ ′ ∨ γ ′′ ) are connected in Paths(X, γ (0), γ ′′ (1)). Now, let τ = class(γ ), τ ′ = class(γ ′ ) and τ ′′ = class(γ ′′ ), we have (τ · τ ′ ) · τ ′′ = τ · (τ ′ · τ ′′ ). Therefore, the concatenation of arrows in X is associative. 2. Let us check now that the component of the constant path x : t 7→ x is the identity of the object x. Let γ ∈ stPaths(X, x, ⋆). For s belonging to [− 12 ,+ 32 ], for example, let us define ( x if t ≤ 1−s 2−s , σ (s) = t 7→ (♦) γ (2t − 1 + s × (1 − t)) if t ≥ 1−s 2−s . We can check that σ (s)((1 − s)/(2 − s)) = γ (0) = x. Since γ is stationary, this concatenation is well defined. Now, σ (0) = x ∨ γ and σ (1) = γ . Since, σ (s)(0) = x and σ (s)(1) = γ (1), class(x ∨ γ ) = class(γ ) in Paths(X, x, ⋆), that is, class(x ) · class(γ ) = class(γ ). It is not difficult to find a homotopy of the same kind, connecting γ ′ to γ ′ ∨ x , with γ ′ ∈ stPaths(X, ⋆, x). Therefore, class(x ) is the identity of the object x. 3. Let us check now that class(¯ γ ) and class(γ ) are the inverse of each other. Let γ ∈ stPaths(X, x, x ′ ) be a stationary path such that γ and γ¯ are juxtaposable. Let us consider ( γ (s × λ(2t)) if t ≤ 21 , σ (s) = t 7→ γ (s × λ(2(1 − t))) if 12 ≤ t, where λ is the smashing function defined in (art. 5.5). For all s, σ (s) is stationary at t = 1/2, where σ (s)(1/2) = γ (s). Thus, σ (s) is a well defined path in X. We have, σ (s)(0) = x = σ (s)(1), and σ (0) = x . Now, since γ ◦ λ is fixedends homotopic to γ and γ¯ ◦ λ to γ¯ (art. 5.5), the path σ (1) = γ ◦ λ ∨ γ¯ ◦ λ is fixedends homotopic to γ ∨ γ¯ , that is, class(x ) = class(γ ∨ γ¯ ) = class(γ ) · class(¯ γ ). It is not difficult to find
142
5. HOMOTOPY OF DIFFEOLOGICAL SPACES
a homotopy of the same kind connecting x ′ to γ¯ ∨ γ . Thus class(γ ) and class(¯ γ) are the inverse of each other. 4. Let x and x ′ be two points of X. Since all the arrows of a groupoid are invertible, if X is connected, then for any τ ∈ MorX (x, x ′ ) the conjugation by τ is an isomorphism between π1 (X, x) = MorX (x, x) and π1 (X, x ′ ) = MorX (x ′ , x ′ ). 5. For every τ ∈ MorX (x, x ′ ) and every τ ′ ∈ MorX (x ′ , x), τ · τ ′ ∈ MorX (x, x). If π1 (X, x) = MorX (x, x) = {1 x }, then τ · τ ′ = 1 x , that is, τ = τ ′−1 . So, for τ1 and τ2 in MorX (x, x ′ ), τ1 = τ ′−1 = τ2 . Thus, there exists only one arrow between x and x ′ , #MorX (x, x ′ ) = 1. Conversely, if there exists only one arrow τ from x to x ′ , for every ν ∈ MorX (x, x), ν · τ = τ , and ν = 1 x , that is, π1 (X, x) = {1 x }. 6. Let us assume that X is simply connected. Since X is connected, ends is a subduction from Π (X) to X. But, ends−1 (x, x ′ ) = MorX (x, x ′ ), and we know that MorX (x, x ′ ) contains only one element. So, ends is injective. On the other hand, we know that injective subductions are diffeomorphisms (art. 1.49). Therefore, X is simply connected if and only if ends : Π (X) → X × X is a diffeomorphism. □ 5.16. Diffeological Hspaces. A diffeological Hspace is a pointed diffeological space (L, e) (art. 5.14), equipped with a smooth multiplication (ℓ, ℓ′ ) 7→ ℓ ∗ ℓ′ , which induces a group multiplication on the space of components π0 (L, e), that is, comp(ℓ) · comp(ℓ′ ) = comp(ℓ ∗ ℓ′ ), with comp(e) as identity. The main property of an Hspace (L, e) is that its first homotopy group π1 (L, e) (art. 5.15) is Abelian. The usual examples for Hspaces are the spaces Loops(X, x) of loops in a diffeological space X (art. 5.1), pointed by the constant loop x : t 7→ x, and equipped with the concatenation (art. 5.2). PROOF. The proof that π0 (L, e) is Abelian is a direct adaptation of the classical proof (see [Hu59] for example), applied to the subset of stationary paths, in the same vein as the previous paragraph. □ 5.17. Higher homotopy groups and functor Πn . Let X be a diffeological space, and x be a point of X. The higher homotopy groups of X, based at x, are defined recursively:
πn+1 (X, x) = πn (Loops(X, x), x ), with n ∈ N, and where the bold letter x denotes the constant loop t 7→ x. For n = 0 it gives π1 (X, x) = π0 (Loops(X, x), x ) = (π0 (Loops(X, x)), x ), which is the pointed space associated with the fundamental group; see (art. 5.15, Note 1). Now, let us define the recurrence: ¨ Loopsn+1 (X, x) = Loops(Loopsn (X, x), x n ), and x n+1 = [t 7→ x n ], initialized by: Loops0 (X, x) = X and x 0 = x.
POINCARÉ GROUPOID AND HOMOTOPY GROUPS
143
We get immediately
πn (X, x) = π0 (Loopsn (X, x), x n ), for all n ∈ N. For n ≥ 1, πn (X, x) = π1 (Loopsn−1 (X, x), x n−1 ), which shows that the higher homotopy groups of X are the fundamental groups of some loop spaces, and therefore inherit a group operation. For example, π2 (X, x) is the fundamental group of the connected component of the constant loop x in Loops(X, x) etc. Since loop spaces are Hspaces, the groups πn (X, x) are Abelian for n ≥ 2 (art. 5.16). Now, let X′ be another diffeological space, let f ∈ C ∞ (X, X′ ), and let x ′ = f (x). The map f induces naturally a family of smooth maps, on the iterated spaces of loops, f n : Loopsn (X, x) → Loopsn (X′ , x ′ ), defined, for all integers n, by recurrence: f n+1 (γ ) = f n ◦ γ , with f0 = f . Then, according to (art. 5.9), the map f n projects naturally on a map f n# , from the space of components π0 (Loopsn (X, x), x n ) = πn (X, x), to the space of components π0 (Loopsn (X′ , x ′ ), x ′n ) = πn (X′ , x ′ ). (♣) The map f n# : πn (X, x) → πn (X′ , x ′ ) is a group morphism for n > 0, and a morphism of pointed spaces for n = 0. Now that we have the general context, to make our notations a little bit shorter, let us introduce the following sequence of pointed spaces, L0 (X, x) = (X, x), and Ln (X, x) = (Loopsn (X, x), x n ), for all n ≥ 1. Then, the maps f n# can be regarded as morphisms of pointed spaces from Ln (X, x) to Ln (X′ , x ′ ) for all n ≥ 0, with f0 = f . This is represented by the following commutative diagram. Ln (X, x)
fn
comp
comp
πn (X, x)
Ln (X′ , x ′ )
f n#
πn (X′ , x ′ )
For all n ≥ 0, this whole construction defines a functor Πn , from the category of pointed diffeological spaces to the category of groups, or pointed spaces,
Πn (X, x) = πn (X, x), and Πn ( f ) = f n# . The main properties of f n# are the following: 1. If f is a homotopy equivalence (art. 5.10), then the f n# are isomorphisms.
144
5. HOMOTOPY OF DIFFEOLOGICAL SPACES
2. If ρ : X → A is a deformation retraction (art. 5.13), then the ρn# are isomorphisms from πn (X, x) to πn (A, x), where x ∈ A. 3. If X is contractible (art. 5.11), then πn (X, x) = {0} for all n ≥ 1. PROOF. According to the recursive definition of the higher homotopy groups, it is enough to check that f n# is a morphism for n = 0 and n = 1. For n = 0, it is stated in (art. 5.9). For n = 1, it is an immediate consequence of the fact that the image by f of the concatenation of two paths γ and γ ′ is the concatenation of f ◦ γ and f ◦ γ ′ . Now, let us prove the following lemma. LEMMA. If f : X → X′ is a homotopy equivalence, then f1 : Loops(X, x) → Loops(X′ , x ′ ), where x ′ = f (x), is a homotopy equivalence. By definition, the map f is a homotopy equivalence if there exists a smooth map g : X′ → X such that f and g are homotopic inverse one from each other, that is, g ◦ f is homotopic to 1X and f ◦ g is homotopic to 1X′ . So, let t 7→ ξ t be the homotopy from 1X to g ◦ f , that is,
ξ 0 = 1X , and ξ 1 = g ◦ f . Let y = g(x ′ ) = g ◦ f (x). If y = x, then the path s 7→ [ℓ 7→ ξ s ◦ ℓ] is obviously a homotopy from the identity of Loops(X, x) to g1 ◦ f1 = [ℓ 7→ g ◦ f ◦ ℓ], and similarly for f1 ◦ g1 . We should conclude that f1 and g1 are homotopic inverse from each other, but if y = ̸ x, we have to reconnect y to x. Now, let us recall that Loops(X, x) and stLoops(X, x) are homotopy equivalent; see Exercise 84, p. 138. So, we shall consider only stationary paths. Let c = [t 7→ ξ λ(t) (x)], where λ is the smashing function defined in (art. 5.5), c is a stationary path in X connecting x to y. Now, let us define, for all ℓ′ ∈ stLoops(X′ , x ′ ), g˜ : ℓ′ 7→ c ∨ (g ◦ ℓ′ ) ∨ ¯c . Since ℓ′ is stationary, g ◦ ℓ′ is stationary and g˜ (ℓ′ ) is a well defined loop in X, based at x. So, g˜ is a smooth map from stLoops(X′ , x ′ ) to stLoops(X, x). Now, for every stationary loop ℓ in X based at x, ξ s ◦ ℓ is a stationary loop based at ξ s (x). Let us define now the stationary path cs = [t 7→ ξ sλ(t) (x)], connecting x to ξ s (x). The map s 7→ cs is a path in stPaths(X), and satisfies cs (0) = x, cs (1) = ξ s (x), c0 = x = [t 7→ x], and c1 = c. Thus, for any s, for any ℓ ∈ Paths(X, x), cs , ξ s (ℓ) and ¯cs are juxtaposable, and their concatenation is a stationary path in X based at x. Then, let us define, for all ℓ ∈ stLoops(X, x),
Ξs (ℓ) = cs ∨ (ξ s ◦ ℓ) ∨ ¯cs .
RELATIVE HOMOTOPY
145
The map s 7→ Ξs is a path in C ∞ (stLoops(X, x), stLoops(X, x)) connecting
Ξ0 = [ℓ 7→ x ∨ ℓ ∨ x ] to Ξ1 = [ℓ 7→ c ∨ (g ◦ f ◦ ℓ) ∨ ¯c ] = g˜ ◦ f1 . Now, a slight adaptation of part 2 of the proof of (art. 5.15) shows that the map [ℓ 7→ x ∨ ℓ ∨ x ] is homotopic to the identity of st Loops(X, x). Hence, g˜ ◦ f1 is homotopic to the identity of st Loops(X, x). We could prove, in the same way, that f1 ◦ g˜ is homotopic to the identity of stPaths(X′ , x ′ ). Therefore, f1 is a homotopy equivalence and f1# is an isomorphism. By recurrence, we get that the f n# are all isomorphisms. Case 1 is proved; cases 2 and 3 are corollaries. □ Relative Homotopy This section describes the homotopy of a pair (X, A), where X is a diffeological space and A is a subspace of X. We establish the short and long exact sequences of the homotopy of the pair (X, A), pointed at a ∈ A, which is a key ingredient of the exact homotopy sequence of the diffeological fiber bundles (art. 8.21). 5.18. The short homotopy sequence of a pair. Let X be a diffeological space, let A be a subspace of X, and let a ∈ A. Let us recall (art. 5.1) that ˆ γ ) ∈ A and 1( ˆ γ) = a . Paths(X, A, a) = γ ∈ Paths(X)  0( Let γ and γ ′ be two paths belonging to Paths(X, A, a), a homotopy from γ to γ ′ , relative to A, pointed at a is a path in Paths(X, A, a), connecting γ to γ ′ . We shall also say an (A, a)relative homotopy from γ to γ ′ . In Figure 5.2 the paths γ and γ ′ belong to Paths(X, A, a), with A = A 1 ∪ A 2 . The path γ is (A, a)relatively homotopic ˆ : Paths(X, A, a) → A and the to a loop in X, but not γ ′ . Let us consider the map 0 injection i : A → X. They made up a twoterms sequence of smooth maps: ˆ 0 i Paths(X, A, a) −−→ A −−→ X, This sequence induces naturally the twoterms sequence of morphisms of pointed spaces, ˆ 0 i (Paths(X, A, a), a) −−→ (A, a) −−→ (X, a), where a = [t 7→ a]. Then, this sequence induces a twoterms sequence on the space of components (art. 5.9), ˆ# 0 i# π0 (Paths(X, A, a), a) −−→ π0 (A, a) −−→ π0 (X, a).
(♥)
1. ker(i# ) — The kernel of i# is the subset of components of A, contained in the component of X containing a. ˆ# ) — The values of 0 ˆ# are the components of A, containing the initial points 2. val(0 of the paths in X starting in A and ending at a. In other words, the subset of the
146
5. HOMOTOPY OF DIFFEOLOGICAL SPACES
A2 A1
a
a c a
l
X
FIGURE 5.2. Relative homotopy of a pair. components of A which can be connected, through X, to a. Now, it is clear that any component of A which can be connected to a by a path in X is included in the component of X containing a. Conversely, every component of A included in the component of X containing a can be connected to a by a path in X, starting in A. So, we get the equality, ˆ# ). ker(i# ) = val(0 Now, let us consider the inclusion of the triple (X, a, a) into (X, A, a). It induces an injection, denoted by j, on the space of paths, j Paths(X, a, a) = Loops(X, a) −−→ Paths(X, A, a). This injection projects, on the space of components, into a morphism of pointed spaces, j# π0 (Loops(X, a), a) −−→ π0 (Paths(X, A, a), a). (♦) Now, the concatenation of (♦) to the twoterms sequence (♥) gives a threeterms sequence of morphisms of pointed spaces, ˆ# j# 0 i# π0 (Loops(X, a), a) −−→ π0 (Paths(X, A, a), a)) −−→ π0 (A, a) −−→ π0 (X, a). (♠) Let us call, by abuse of language, first group of homotopy of X, relative to A, pointed at a, the pointed space denoted by π1 (X, A, a), and defined by
π1 (X, A, a) = π0 (Paths(X, A, a), a).
RELATIVE HOMOTOPY
147
Since, by definition, π0 (Loops(X, a), a) = π1 (X, a) (art. 5.15) — regarded as pointed space — the sequence of morphisms (♠) rewrites, ˆ# j# 0 i# π1 (X, a) −−→ π1 (X, A, a) −−→ π0 (A, a) −−→ π0 (X, a).
(♣)
This sequence is called the short sequence of the relative homotopy of the pair (X, A), ˆ# ); moreover, at the point a. We have seen that ker(i# ) = val(0 ˆ# ) = val( j# ). ker(0 ˆ# ) — The kernel of 0 ˆ# is the set of the components of Paths(X, A, a) whose 3. ker(0 initial point belongs to the component of A containing a. 4. val( j# ) — The values of j# are the components of the γ ∈ Paths(X, A, a) which are (A, a)relatively homotopic to some loops in X, based at a. In short, the relative homotopy sequence of the pair (X, A), at the point a, is exact. ˆ# ) = val( j# ). Let us recall that, on the one PROOF. We need only check that ker(0 ˆ# ) is made up of the components of Paths(X, A, a) whose initial point hand, ker(0 belongs to the same component of A, containing a. On the other hand, val( j# ) is the set of the components of paths γ ∈ Paths(X, A, a) which are (A, a)relatively homotopic to some loops in X, based at a. ˆ# ). If a path γ is (A, a)relatively homotopic to some loop in 1. val( j# ) ⊂ ker(0 X based at a, its initial point is connected, in A, to a, and belongs to the same component of A containing a. ˆ# ) ⊂ val( j# ). Let us consider a component of A contained in the same 2. ker(0 component of X containing a. Let γ be a stationary path in X, beginning in A and ending at a such that its beginning belongs to the component of A containing a. Let γ (0) = x. Since x and a belong to the same component of A, there exists a stationary path c in A connecting a to x (Figure 5.2). Let ξ(s) = [t 7→ c(s + (1 − s)λ(t))], where λ is the smashing function described in Figure 5.1. Thus, ξ belongs to Paths(Paths(X, A, a)) (art. 5) and ξ(s)(1) = c(1) = x = γ (0). So, σ (s) = ξ(s) ∨ γ is a homotopy connecting (c ◦ λ) ∨ γ ∈ Loops(X, a) to x ∨ γ , which is homotopic to γ . Therefore, γ is (A, a)relatively homotopic to a loop in X, based at a. □ 5.19. The long homotopy sequence of a pair. Let X be a diffeological space, let A be a subspace of X, and let a ∈ A. Let us denote again by i the natural induction i : Loops(A, a) → Loops(X, a). There is no ambiguity with the injection i of (art. 5.18), since the spaces involved are not the same. Then, let us consider the twoterms sequence of smooth maps ˆ 0 i Paths(Loops(X, a), Loops(A, a), a) −−→ Loops(A, a) −−→ Loops(X, a).
148
5. HOMOTOPY OF DIFFEOLOGICAL SPACES
Or, if we prefer, by denoting X 1 = Loops(X, a), A 1 = Loops(A, a), and a1 = [t 7→ a], the above twoterms sequence of smooth maps writes ˆ 0 i Paths(X 1 , A 1 , a1 ) −−→ A 1 −−→ X 1 . We can then apply the construction of (art. 5.18) and get the short sequence of relative homotopy of the pair (X 1 , A 1 ), at the point a1 . Let us denote again by j the natural induction from Loops(X 1 , a1 ) to Paths(X 1 , A 1 , a1 ). Thus, we have, ˆ# j# 0 i# π1 (X 1 , a1 ) −−→ π1 (X 1 , A 1 , a) −−→ π0 (A 1 , a1 ) −−→ π0 (X 1 , a1 ).
(♦)
Let us define the second group of relative homotopy of the pair (X, A), at the point a, by π2 (X, A, a) = π1 (X 1 , A 1 , a1 ) = π0 (Paths(X 1 , A 1 , a1 ), a1 ). So, the short exact sequence (♦) writes now ˆ# j# 0 i# π2 (X, a) −−→ π2 (X, A, a) −−→ π1 (A, a) −−→ π1 (X, a).
(♥)
But the right term π1 (X, a) = π0 (X 1 , a1 ) is just π0 (Loops(X, a), a), that is, π1 (X, a), regarded as a pointed space. It is also the left term of the relative homotopy sequence of the pair (X, A) at the point a, (art. 5.18). Let us connect the right term of the short homotopy sequences relative to the pair (X 1 , A 1 ), to the left term of the short homotopy sequences relative to the pair (X, A). We get ˆ# ˆ# 0 i# j# 0 · · · π2 (X, A, a) −−→ π1 (A, a) −−→ π1 (X, a) −−→ π1 (X, A, a) −−→ π0 (A, a) · · · . Then, let us describe the connection of the morphisms of these two relative homotopy sequences at the junction π1 (X, a). 1. ker( j# : π1 (X, a) → π1 (X, A, a)) — This kernel is the set of classes of loops of X based at a which can be connected, relatively to (A, a), to the constant loop a. 2. val(i# : π1 (A, a) → π1 (X, a)) — This is the set of classes of loops in X, based at a, which are fixedends homotopic to a loop in A. Now, if a loop in X, based at a, can be smoothly deformed into a loop contained in A, then it can be retracted relatively to A into the constant loop a. Conversely, if a loop of X, based at a, is connected relatively to (A, a) to the constant loop a, then it is fixedends homotopic to a loop in A. In other words, ker( j# : π1 (X, a) → π1 (X, A, a)) = val(i# : π1 (A, a) → π1 (X, a)). Thus, the connection of the two short exact relative homotopy sequences is exact. Now, let us define the higher relative homotopy groups of the pair (X, A) at the point
RELATIVE HOMOTOPY
149
a by recurrence. Let us remark first that the inclusion i : A → X induces an inclusion in : Loopsn (A, a) → Loopsn (X, a) (art. 5.17). Then, we can define Pathsn+1 (X, A, a) = Paths(Loopsn (X, a), Loopsn (A, a), a n ), for every integer n, and this gives the higher relative homotopy groups
πn+1 (X, A, a) = π0 (Pathsn+1 (X, A, a), a n ) = π1 (Loopsn (X, a), Loopsn (A, a), a n ). Now, we can iterate the above connection of short relative homotopy sequences for each degree n + 1 → n, and we get the long exact relative homotopy sequence of the pair (X, A), at the point a. ˆ# i# j# 0 i# · · · −−→ πn (X, a) −−→ πn (X, A, a) −−→ πn−1 (A, a) −−→ πn−1 (X, a) · · · (♣) ˆ# i# j# 0 i# · · · −−→ π1 (X, a) −−→ π1 (X, A, a) −−→ π0 (A, a) −−→ π0 (X, a). PROOF. We only need check that ker( j# : π1 (X, a) → π1 (X, A, a)) is equal to val(i# : π1 (A, a) → π1 (X, a)). Let us recall that ker( j# ) is made up of the loops of X based at a which can be connected, relatively to (A, a), to the constant loop a, and val(i# ) is the subset of the classes of loops in X, based at a, which are fixedends homotopic to a loop in A. 1. ker( j# ) ⊂ val(i# ). Let ℓ be a loop in X, based at a, (A, a)relatively homotopic to the constant loop a. Let γ be the homotopy. So, for all s ∈ R,
γ (0) = ℓ, γ (1) = a, γ (s)(0) ∈ A, and γ (s)(1) = a. The properties of γ are schematized by Figure 5.3. Let us consider a line of R2 , turning around the origin, its intersection with the cube describes a homotopy connecting ℓ to γt=0 ∈ Loops(A, a). More precisely, let us consider first the path γ ′ : s 7→ [t 7→ γ (t)(st)] in Loops(X, a). The path γ ′ connects ℓ to [t 7→ γ (t)(t)]. Then, let us consider the path γ ′′ : s 7→ [t 7→ γ ((1−s)t)(t)] in Loops(X, a). The path γ ′′ connects [t 7→ γ (t)(t)] to γs=0 ∈ Loops(A, a). Therefore, ℓ is (A, a)relatively homotopic to a loop in A, based at a. 2. val(i# ) ⊂ ker( j# ). Let comp(γ ) ∈ val(i# ). We can choose γ ∈ Loops(A, a). The path ξ : s 7→ [t 7→ γ (s + (1 − s)t)] is a (A, a)relative homotopy connecting γ to the constant loop a. □ 5.20. Another look at relative homotopy. Let X be a diffeological space, let A be a subspace of X, and let a ∈ A. We shall give another description of the relative homotopy groups πn (X, A, a). Let us begin by n = 2, then π2 (X, A, a) =
150
5. HOMOTOPY OF DIFFEOLOGICAL SPACES
s
as = 1 = !
D`
1
at = 0
D_
Loops(A,a)
at = 1 = ! 0
t
1 as = 0 = l
FIGURE 5.3. A relative homotopy of a loop to the constant loop.
π1 (Loops(X, a), Loops(A, a), a). Let f ∈ Paths(Loops(X, a), Loops(A, a), a). Thus, for all (s, t) ∈ R2 , f (0) ∈ Loops(A, a), f (1)(t) = a, and f (s)(0) = f (s)(1) = a. We identify f with a smooth plot f : R2 → X by f (s, t) = f (s)(t), the properties of f are described in Figure 5.4. Then, let us permute the variables t and s, and let f˜(t)(s) = f (s)(t). Now, f˜ satisfies, for all t ∈ R f˜(t) ∈ Paths(X, A, a), and f˜(0) = f˜(1) = a. Thus, f˜ ∈ Loops(Paths(X, A, a), a). Now, since (t, s) 7→ (s, t) is a diffeomorphism, f 7→ f˜ is a diffeomorphism. More generally, f ∈ Paths(Loopsn (X, a), Loopsn (A, a), a n ), for all n ≥ 1. Let f˜ be defined by f˜(t 0 )(t 1 ) · · · (t n ) = f (t 1 ) · · · (t n )(t 0 ). Then, f˜ belongs to Loopsn (Paths(X, A, a), a), and the map f 7→ f˜ is a diffeomorphism. So, thanks to this identification, we get
πn+1 (X, A, a) = πn (Paths(X, A, a), a), for all n ≥ 1.
RELATIVE HOMOTOPY
151
ft = 1 = !
t 1
fs = 1 = !
fs = 0 Loops(A,a) 0
1
s ft = 0 = !
FIGURE 5.4. f belonging to L2 (X, A, a). Therefore, the relative homotopy groups πn (X, A, a) are pointed spaces for n = 1, groups for n = 2, and Abelian groups for n ≥ 3. Moreover, the morphisms of the long exact homotopy sequence of the pair (X, A), at the point a, (art. 5.19) (♣), ˆ# acts on the are group morphisms wherever it makes sense. Indeed, the operator 0 first variable of the path of loops, while the group acts on the last one.
Exercise
✎ EXERCISE 87 (Homotopy of loops spaces). Let X be a connected diffeological
space, π0 (X) = {X}. Show that π0 (Loops(X)) is equivalent to the set of conjugacy classes of π1 (X, x), where x is any given point in X. Comment on the homotopy of Loops(X) relatively to Loops(X, x).
CHAPTER 6
CartanDe Rham Calculus The general philosophy of diffeology is to carry, functorially, geometrical objects defined and constructed on real domains (art. 1.1) to diffeological spaces. By nature, since diffeology on a set X is defined by parametrizations in X, geometrical covariant objects are perfectly adapted to this approach. Differential forms are one of the clearest examples. This chapter is devoted to introducing the differential calculus in diffeology. The first section of this chapter, on Multilinear Algebra, puts the notations in place and summarizes the basic notions of linear algebra on which all this building is founded. For the professional mathematician, there is nothing new here, and he can skip it. The reason for this section is to give a selfconsistent expository text for the graduate student, or postgraduate, where we regroup what is then used in diffeology. The same holds for the second section, on Smooth Forms on Real Domains, where the foundations of differential calculus in Rn are presented. It is here for the same reason as the first section. Again, the professional may skip this section. It is in the third section (art. 6.28), on Differential Forms on Diffeological Spaces, where the specificity of differential calculus in diffeology is introduced, and where we begin to establish the main theorems relative to differential forms in diffeology. It continues then along the following sections of this chapter. It could help, before absorbing all these axiomatics, to first get an idea on what we shall talk about. A differential form on a diffeological space is defined as the family of its pullbacks by the plots of the space. In other words, a differential form is defined as a map which associates with each plot a smooth form of its domain, satisfying a compatibility condition when the plots are composed with a smooth parametrization. This definition makes sense, if the diffeological space is a manifold, diffeological forms are just the ones we are used to. Then, exterior Cartan calculus and De Rham cohomological calculus, the pullbacks by smooth maps, every basic construction associated with differential calculus, pass naturally to diffeology. The Lie derivative of forms extends to diffeological spaces by adapting the ordinary definition to the diffeological context (art. 6.54). The Cartan formula 153
154
6. CARTANDE RHAM CALCULUS
for diffeological spaces is established (art. 6.72). The sets of differential forms on diffeological spaces are naturally diffeological vector spaces. The definition of pointed pforms on a diffeological space X introduces the space Λp (X) of pforms over X (art. 6.45). The space Λp (X) carries a natural functional diffeology such that the projection on X is a subduction, and such that a global form is just one smooth sections. This construction gives, in particular, a cotangent space T∗ X defined over any diffeological space (art. 6.48), without need to refer to some “tangent space”. The cotangent space in diffeology is not the dual of a tangent space. The Liouville forms (art. 6.49) are introduced and their invariance by the action of the group of diffeomorphisms of the base is established.
Multilinear Algebra This section establishes some notation and presents a summary of the basic definitions and constructions in real linear and multilinear algebra, used thereafter for Cartan calculus in diffeological spaces. I chose to follow the presentation of Souriau’s book “Calcul Linéaire” [Sou64]. I shall mention if a definition or a proposition applies just for finite dimensional real vector spaces. Otherwise, if no such a mention is made, it is assumed to work with any real vector space. 6.1. Spaces of linear maps. Let E and F be two real vector spaces. We denote by E ∗ F the space L(E, F) of linear maps from E to F. E ∗ F = {A : E → F  A(a x + b y) = aA(x) + bA( y), ∀a, b ∈ R, ∀x, y ∈ E}. The space E ∗ F is itself a real vector space with (a A)(x) = a A(x), and (A + B)(x) = A(x) + B(x), for all a ∈ R and all A, B ∈ E ∗ F. 6.2. Bases and linear groups. Let E be a real vector space of finite dimension, with dim(E) = n. A basis of E is a set B of n independent vectors b1 , . . . , bn of E generating the whole space E. Pn 1. Independency — For all si ∈ R, i = 1, . . . , n, i=1 si bi = 0 if and only if si = 0 for all i = 1, . . . , n. 2. Generating — For all u ∈ E, there exist ui ∈ R, i = 1, . . . , n, such that Pn u = i=1 ui bi . Pn The numbers ui ∈ R such that u = i=1 ui bi are called the coordinates of u in the basis B. The condition to be independent for the bi implies that the decomposition of u in terms of coordinates is unique. Every basis B defines a natural isomorphism
MULTILINEAR ALGEBRA
155
from Rn to E, which will be denoted by the same letter, s1 n .. X n B ∈ Isom(R , E), B . = si bi . i=1 sn The two conditions on the bi , to be independent and generators, is equivalent for B to be an isomorphism. Conversely, every isomorphism B ∈ Isom(Rn , E) defines n independent vectors bi = B(ei ), generating E, where the ei are the vectors of the canonical basis of Rn . Therefore, we identify a basis with its associated isomorphism, and we consider indifferently the set of vectors of a basis, or the associated isomorphism, as the same thing, i.e. B = (b1 , . . . , bn ). We shall denote Bases(E) = Isom(Rn , E). We denote by the indexed bold letters ei , i = 1, . . . , n, the vectors of the canonical basis of Rn , that is, ei is the vector having all its coordinates zero, except at the rank i, where it has the value 1. For example: 0 0 1 1 0 e1 = 0 , e2 = , e3 = 1 , etc. 0 0 ↓ ↓ ↓ Regarded as an isomorphism of Rn , the canonical basis In = (e1 , . . . , en ) of Rn is just the identity 1n . The set of all the bases of Rn is just the group of linear transformations, Bases(Rn ) = GL(n, R). As a group, Bases(Rn ) acts on the bases of E, by right composition: For all M ∈ GL(n, R), for all B ∈ Bases(E), B ◦ M−1 ∈ Bases(E). Note that this action is transitive. For every pair of bases B and B ′ the composition B −1 ◦ B ′ ∈ GL(n, R). This operation is called the change of basis. The notion of basis is just a means to reduce vector spaces to standard representatives under the equivalence defined by isomorphisms. Also note that this definition of basis can be extended to any other kind of vector space, finite or infinite dimensional, on any field K, as soon as we have chosen in each class of isomorphisms a favorite representative. 6.3. Dual of a vector space. Let E be a real vector space, the dual of E, denoted by E∗ , is the space of linear maps from E to R, that is, E∗ = E ∗ R = L(E, R).
156
6. CARTANDE RHAM CALCULUS
An element of E∗ is also called a covector. If E is finite dimensional, then E and E∗ are isomorphic, dim(E) < ∞ ⇒ E ∼ E∗ , and dim(E∗ ) = dim(E). PROOF. Let B = (e1 , e2 , . . . , en ), where dim(E) = n. Let us define the dual basis B ∗ = (e1 , e2 , . . . , en ) by ei (e j ) = δij , where δij is the Kronecker symbol: δij = 1 if i = j and 0 otherwise. Then, for every w ∈ E∗ and for every vector x ∈ E, we have X X n n n n X X w(x) = w x i ei = x i w(ei ) = x i wi = w i ei (x), i=1
i=1
Pn
i=1
i=1
where w i = w(ei ). Then, w = i=1 w i e , and B is a generator system of E∗ . It is Pn Pn i ∗ independent, since i=1 si ei = 0 implies i=1 si e (e j ) = s j = 0. Therefore, B ∗ is a basis of E . □ ∗
i
6.4. Bilinear maps. Let E, F and G be three real vector spaces. Let us interpret the space E ∗ (F ∗ G). By definition, E ∗ (F ∗ G) is the space of linear maps from E to the space of linear maps from F to G. Let us consider a linear map A : E → F ∗ G. For any x ∈ E, A(x) ∈ F ∗ G, then, for any y ∈ F, [A(x)]( y) ∈ G. We can summarize this double mapping by A = [x 7→ [ y 7→ z]], that is, for all x ∈ E and all y ∈ F there exists z ∈ G, such that z = [A(x)]( y). We can forget the superfluous brackets and denote z = A(x)( y). So, the map A can be identified with some map from E × F to G, and A(x)( y) could also be be denoted by A(x, y). From the linearity of the operator A, and from the linearity of the operator A(x), for all x ∈ E, we get the following characterization of A(x)( y): A(x + x ′ )( y) = A(x)( y) + A(x ′ )( y) linearity of A, A(s x)( y) = sA(x)( y) A(x)( y + y ′ ) A(x)(s y)
= =
A(x)( y) + A(x)( y ′ ) sA(x)( y)
linearity of A(x),
where x, x ′ ∈ E, y, y ′ ∈ F, and s ∈ R. This is equivalent to X X X A ti xi sj yj = t i s j A(x i )( y j ), i
j
i, j
where si , t j ∈ R, x i ∈ E and y j ∈ F are finite families. Such operators are called bilinear maps.
MULTILINEAR ALGEBRA
157
6.5. Symmetric and antisymmetric bilinear maps. Let E and F be two real vector spaces. The symmetric of a bilinear map A ∈ E∗(E∗F) is the map B ∈ E∗(E∗F) defined by B( y)(x) = A(x)( y). The operator A is said to be symmetric if B = A, and to be antisymmetric if B = −A. Any bilinear map A ∈ E ∗ (E ∗ F) decomposes, in a unique way, into the sum of a symmetric and an antisymmetric component, A(x)( y) = 1 [A(x)( y) + A( y)(x)] + 1 [A(x)( y) − A( y)(x)]. 2 2 We deduce, from this decomposition, that an operator is antisymmetric if and only if A(x)(x) = 0. PROOF. If A is antisymmetric, clearly A(x)(x) = −A(x)(x) = 0. Now, if A(x)(x) = 0, then 0 = A(x + y)(x + y) = A(x)(x) + A(x)( y) + A( y)(x) + A( y)( y) = A(x)( y) + A( y)(x). Therefore, A(x)( y) = −A( y)(x). □ 6.6. Multilinear operators. Let E1 , . . . , EN , EN+1 be a family of real vector spaces. Extending the previous construction (art. 6.4), we can interpret the space E1 ∗ (E2 ∗ (E3 ∗ (· · · ∗ EN+1 ))) as an operator which associates with N vectors (x, y, . . . , z) ∈ E1 × E2 × · · · × EN , some element of EN+1 , such that X X X X rk zk = si t j · · · rk A(x i )( y j ) · · · (zk ), A si x i t j yj · · · i
j
k
i, j,...,k
where si , t j , . . . rk ∈ R, x i ∈ E1 , y j ∈ E2 , . . . , zk ∈ EN are finite families. This last condition expresses the linearity of all the spaces involved in the definition of A. Such operators are called multilinear operators. The sum of two elements of E1 ∗ (E2 ∗ (E3 ∗ (· · · ∗ EN+1 ))), and the multiplication of an element of E1 ∗ (E2 ∗ (E3 ∗ (· · · ∗ EN+1 ))) by a scalar, are given by [A + B](x)( y) · · · (z) = A(x)( y) · · · (z) + B(x)( y) · · · (z), [sA](x)( y) · · · (z) = s[A(x)( y) · · · (z)]. For a multilinear operator A, we use indifferently the multiparentheses notation A(x)( y) · · · (z) or the simple parentheses notation A(x, y, . . . , z), depending upon which is more suitable. 6.7. Symmetric and antisymmetric multilinear operators. Let E and F be two real vector spaces. Let A ∈ E ∗ (E ∗ (E ∗ (· · · ∗ F))) be an nmultilinear operator. 1. The operator A is said to be totally symmetric, or simply symmetric, if its value A(x)( y) · · · (z) does not change when one exchanges any two vectors. 2. The operator A is said to be totally antisymmetric, or simply antisymmetric, if its value A(x)( y) · · · (z) changes sign when one exchanges any two vectors.
158
6. CARTANDE RHAM CALCULUS
Let us consider the group of permutations Sn of the set of indices {1, . . . , n}, acting on the ntuple (x 1 , . . . , x n ) ∈ En by
σ (x 1 , . . . , x n ) = (x σ (1) , . . . , x σ (n) ), for all σ ∈ Sn and all (x 1 , . . . , x n ) ∈ En . Totally symmetric or antisymmetric operators are also characterized by A(x 1 ) · · · (x n ) if A is symmetric, A(x σ (1) ) · · · (x σ (n) ) = sgn(σ ) A(x 1 ) · · · (x n ) if A is antisymmetric, where σ ∈ Sn , and sgn(σ ) is the signature of the permutation σ , that is, sgn(σ ) is equal to 1 if σ decomposes into an even number of transpositions (permutations of only two distinct elements), and sgn(σ ) = −1 otherwise. The number n is called the order or degree of the operator A, and it is usually denoted by deg(A). Note that A is antisymmetric if and only if, evaluated on any family of vectors with two repeated vectors, A vanishes: A antisymmetric ⇔ A · · · (x) · · · (x) · · · = 0. PROOF. The first part of the proposition, that is, the formula with the permutations, results immediately from a decomposition of a permutation in a finite product of transpositions. Now, it is clear that if A is antisymmetric, then A · · · (x) · · · (x) · · · = −A · · · (x) · · · (x) · · · = 0. Conversely, if A · · · (x) · · · (x) · · · = 0, we have A · · · (x + x ′ ) · · · (x + x ′ ) · · · = A · · · (x) · · · (x) · · · + A · · · (x) · · · (x ′ ) · · · + A · · · (x ′ ) · · · (x) · · · + A · · · (x ′ ) · · · (x ′ ) · · · = A · · · (x) · · · (x ′ ) · · · + A · · · (x ′ ) · · · (x) · · · . Therefore, A · · · (x) · · · (x ′ ) · · · = −A · · · (x ′ ) · · · (x) · · · .
□
6.8. Tensors. Let E be a real vector space, and let E∗ = E ∗ R = L(E, R) be the dual space (art. 6.3). 1. A covariant ptensor of E is a pmultilinear operator A defined ptimes on E with values in R, that is, an element of E ∗ (E ∗ (· · · ∗ E) ∗ R), where E is repeated ptimes. A covariant 1tensor is just an element of E∗ . A(x 1 )(x 2 ) · · · (x p ) ∈ R, where x 1 , x 2 , . . . , x p ∈ E. 2. A contravariant ptensor of E is a pmultilinear map B defined ptimes on E∗ with values in R, that is, an element of E∗ ∗ (E∗ ∗ (· · · ∗ E∗ ) ∗ R), where E∗ is repeated ptimes B(w1 )(w2 ) · · · (w p ) ∈ R, where w1 , w2 , . . . , w p ∈ E∗ .
MULTILINEAR ALGEBRA
159
3. A mixed tensor, pcovariant and qcontravariant, is a (p + q)multilinear operator C defined ptimes on E and qtimes on E∗ with values in R. x 1 , x 2 , . . . , x p ∈ E, C(x 1 )(x 2 ) · · · (x p )(w1 )(w2 ) · · · (wq ) ∈ R, where w 1 , w 2 , . . . , w q ∈ E∗ . Note that a 0tensor is any map from E0 = {0} to R; thus, just a number. Therefore, the space of 0tensors of any vector space is R. 6.9. Vector space and bidual. Every element of a vector space E defines an element of its bidual (E∗ )∗ = (E ∗ R) ∗ R, as follows: For all x ∈ E, for all w ∈ E∗ , xˆ (w) = w(x) and xˆ ∈ (E∗ )∗ = E∗ ∗ R. If dim(E) < ∞, then the map x 7→ xˆ is a canonical isomorphism which identifies the space E with its bidual (E∗ )∗ . PROOF. The map xˆ is obviously linear. Let x ∈ E such that xˆ = 0, so xˆ (w) = w(x) = 0 for all w ∈ E∗ . If dim(E) < ∞, then x = 0, and x 7→ xˆ is injective. Thus, dim(E) = dim(E∗ ) = dim((E∗ )∗ ) (art. 6.3), and x 7→ xˆ injective implies x 7→ xˆ is bijective. □ 6.10. Tensor products. Let E be a real vector space. Let A and B be any two tensors of E, covariant, contravariant or mixed. Let A be of order p and B be of order q. We define the tensor product A ⊗ B by A ⊗ B(a1 ) · · · (a p )(b1 ) · · · (bq ) = A(a1 ) · · · (a p ) × B(b1 ) · · · (bq ), where the (ai ) are in the domain of A and the (b j ) in the domain of B. The sign × denotes the ordinary multiplication of real numbers. The tensor product A ⊗ B is a (p + q)tensor. It can be covariant if A and B are covariant, contravariant if A and B are contravariant, mixed otherwise. Moreover, the tensor product is associative, (A ⊗ B) ⊗ C = A ⊗ (B ⊗ C). If A or B is a 0tensor, that is, a real s, then s ⊗ A = A ⊗ s = s × A. 6.11. Components of a tensor. Let E be a real vector space of finite dimension, and let dim(E) = n. Let A be a tensor of E. Let B = (e1 , . . . , en ) be a basis of E, and let B ∗ = (e1 , . . . , en ) be the dual basis of B (art. 6.3). Let us consider, for example, a tensor A, 2times covariant and 1time contravariant. Then, for any x, y ∈ E and any w ∈ E∗ , X X X A(x)( y)(w) = A x i ei y jej w k ek i
=
X i, j,k
j i
x y
j
w k Akij
, where
k
Akij
= A(ei )(e j )(ek ).
160
6. CARTANDE RHAM CALCULUS
The numbers Akij are called the components of the tensor A for the basis B. In fact, the space of these tensors — 2times covariant and 1time contravariant — has a natural basis associated with B, the set of all the tensors ei ⊗ e j ⊗ ek , where i, j, k = 1 · · · n. In other words, X A= Akij ei ⊗ e j ⊗ ek . i, j,k
Let us consider the product of two tensors A and B. Let us assume that Akij are the mn components of A for the basis B and Bpqr are the components of B, then k mn [A ⊗ B]ki jmn pqr = A i j × Bpqr .
Note that the symmetry or the antisymmetry of a tensor — covariant or contravariant — can be checked on its components for any basis. Let us consider, for example, a covariant tensor A, let B be a basis of E, A i j...k if A is symmetric, A σ (i)σ ( j)···σ (k) = sgn(σ ) × A i j...k if A is antisymmetric. For example, for covariant 2tensors the condition of antisymmetry writes A i j + A ji = 0. 6.12. Symmetrization and antisymmetrization of tensors.Let E be a real vector space, and let T be a covariant ptensor of E. 1. The symmetrization of the tensor T is the tensor Sym(T) defined by 1 X T(x σ (1) ) · · · (x σ (p) ). Sym(T)(x 1 ) · · · (x p ) = p! σ ∈S p
The tensor T is symmetric if and only if Sym(T) = T. The map Sym is a projector from the space of all covariant ptensors onto the subspace of symmetric covariant ptensors, Sym ◦ Sym = Sym. 2. The antisymmetrization of T is the tensor Alt(T) defined by 1 X Alt(T)(x 1 ) · · · (x p ) = sgn(σ ) × T(x σ (1) ) · · · (x σ (p) ). p! σ ∈S p
The tensor T is antisymmetric if and only if Alt(T) = T. The map Alt is a projector from the space of all covariant ptensors onto the subspace of antisymmetric covariant ptensors, Alt ◦ Alt = Alt. What has been said above, for covariant tensors, can be transposed to contravariant tensors and, then, give projectors to the spaces of symmetric or antisymmetric contravariant tensors.
MULTILINEAR ALGEBRA
161
PROOF. 1. Let us check that Sym(T) is symmetric. Let ε ∈ S p . We have 1 X Sym(T)(x ε(1) ) · · · (x ε(p) ) = T(x σ ◦ε(1) ) · · · (x σ ◦ε(p) ) p! σ ∈S p
=
1 X T(x σ ′ (1) ) · · · (x σ ′ (p) ), with σ ′ = σ ◦ ε p! σ ′ ∈S
=
Sym(T)(x 1 ) · · · (x p ).
p
If T is already symmetric, then for all σ ∈ S p T(x σ (1) ) · · · (x σ (p) ) = T(x 1 ) · · · (x p ), and since there are p! permutations in S p , Sym(T)(x 1 ) · · · (x p ) = T(x 1 ) · · · (x p ), that is, Sym(T) = T. 2. Let us check that Alt(T) is antisymmetric. Let ε ∈ S p , we have 1 X sgn(σ ) × T(x σ ◦ε(1) ) · · · (x σ ◦ε(p) ) Alt(T)(x ε(1) ) · · · (x ε(p) ) = p! σ ∈S p
=
1 X sgn(σ ′ ◦ ε−1 ) × T(x σ ′ (1) ) · · · (x σ ′ (p) ) p! σ ′ ∈S
=
sgn(ε) × Alt(T)(x 1 ) · · · (x p ),
p
where we denoted σ ′ = σ ◦ ε, and used sgn(ε−1 ) = sgn(ε). Now, if T is already antisymmetric, then for all σ ∈ S p , T(x σ (1) ) · · · (x σ (p) ) = sgn(σ ) × T(x 1 ) · · · (x p ). Thus, 1 X sgn(σ ) × T(x σ (1) ) · · · (x σ (p) ) Alt(T)(x 1 ) · · · (x p ) = p! σ ∈S p
=
1 X sgn(σ )2 × T(x 1 ) · · · (x p ) p! σ ∈S
=
1 X T(x 1 ) · · · (x p ) p! σ ∈S
=
T(x 1 ) · · · (x p ).
p
p
Therefore, Alt(T) = T.
□
6.13. Linear pforms. The antisymmetric covariant tensors play an important role in differential geometry; they are at the basis of the Cartan calculus. It is why they got a special name and notation. Let E be a real vector space, a covariant antisymmetric ptensor of E is called a linear pform of E. The vector space of linear pforms of E is denoted by Λp (E). Note that Λ0 (E) = R and Λ1 (E) = E∗ . NOTE. On the other hand, the space of symmetric covariant ptensors of E is sometimes denoted by V p (E). But symmetric covariant ptensors did not get a special name, except in special cases, as for Euclidean scalar product for instance.
162
6. CARTANDE RHAM CALCULUS
6.14. Inner product. Let E be a real vector space. Let A be a covariant ptensor, p ≥ 1. For any x ∈ E, we denote by A(x) the covariant (p − 1)tensor defined by [A(x)](x 1 ) · · · (x p−1 ) = A(x)(x 1 ) · · · (x p−1 ). The tensor A(x) is called the inner (or interior) product of A with x. The map A 7→ A(x), from Λp (E) to Λp−1 (E), is a linear operator denoted by Int(x), that is, Int(x)(A) = A(x). Note that if A is antisymmetric or symmetric, that is, it changes or not its sign under a permutation of two vectors, then A(x) is still antisymmetric or symmetric. Then, the interior product is also an inner product inside the subspace of antisymmetric or symmetric multilinear covariant tensors. 6.15. Exterior product. Let E be a real vector space. Let A ∈ Λp (E) and B ∈ Λq (E) (art. 6.13), the exterior product A ∧ B ∈ Λp+q (E) is defined by A∧B=
(p + q)! Alt(A ⊗ B), p! q!
where Alt has been defined in (art. 6.12). The exterior product with a 0form s ∈ R is simply given by s ∧ A = A ∧ s = s × A. 1. The exterior product is associative, for any three linear forms A, B, C, A ∧ (B ∧ C) = (A ∧ B) ∧ C. 2. The commutation of the exterior product is given by the rule, A ∧ B = (−1) pq B ∧ A. 3. For all a ∈ E∗ = Λ1 (E), the map B 7→ a ∧ B, from Λp (E) to Λp+1 (E), is a linear operator denoted by Ext(a), that is, Ext(a)(B) = a ∧ B. The exterior product a ∧ B takes a special expression, (a ∧ B)(x)(x 1 ) · · · (x q ) = a(x) × B(x 1 )(x 2 ) · · · (x q ) − a(x 1 ) × B(x)(x 2 ) · · · (x q ) − a(x 2 ) × B(x 1 )(x)(x 3 ) · · · (x q ) − ··· − a(x q ) × B(x 1 ) · · · (x q−1 )(x). EXAMPLE. Let a, b ∈ E∗ , be two 1forms, then a ∧ b = a ⊗ b − b ⊗ a. Note that this is different from the antisymmetrization Alt(a ⊗ b) = (1/2) a ∧ b. PROOF. 1. Let C be of order r, and let x 1 , . . . , x p+q+r ∈ E. Let us denote a.bc = A ∧ (B ∧ C)(x 1 ) · · · (x p+q+r ) and a b.c = (A ∧ B) ∧ C(x 1 ) · · · (x p+q+r ). We have, X 1 a.bc = sgn(σ ) × A(x σ (1) ) · · · (x σ (p) ) p! (q + r)! σ ∈S p+q+r
MULTILINEAR ALGEBRA
× =
163
X 1 sgn(ε)×(B ⊗ C)(x ε◦σ (p+1) ) · · · (x ε◦σ (p+q+r) ) q! r! ε∈{σ (p+1)···σ (p+q+r)}! X X 1 1 sgn(σ ) × sgn(ε) p! q! r! σ ∈S (q + r)! ε∈{σ (p+1)···σ (p+q+r)}! p+q+r
× =
(A ⊗ B ⊗ C)(x σ (1) ) · · · (x σ (p) )(x ε◦σ (p+1) ) · · · (x ε◦σ (p+q+r) ) X X 1 1 sgn(¯ σ) p! q! r! σ¯ ∈S (q + r)! ε∈{σ (p+1)···σ (p+q+r)}! p+q+r
× =
(A ⊗ B ⊗ C)(x σ¯ (1) ) · · · (x σ¯ (p+q+r) ) X 1 sgn(¯ σ ) × (A ⊗ B ⊗ C)(x σ¯ (1) ) · · · (x σ¯ (p+q+r) ), p! q! r! σ¯ ∈S p+q+r
where {σ (p + 1) · · · σ (p + q + r)}! denotes the set of permutations of the indices σ (p+1) · · · σ (p+q+ r), and where σ ¯ = σ ◦¯ε, with ¯ε defined by ¯ε ↾ {σ (1) · · · σ (p)} = 1 and ¯ε ↾ {σ (p + 1) · · · σ (p + q + r)} = ε. So, except the fact that this last expression of a.bc is clearly associative, a simple analogous computation gives the same expression for a b.c, thus the exterior product is associative. 2. Let x 1 , . . . , x p+q ∈ E, let us denote ab = (A ∧ B)(x 1 ) · · · (x p+q ), and let ba = (B ∧ A)(x 1 ) · · · (x p+q ). We have ab
=
1 X sgn(σ ) × A(x σ (1) ) · · · (x σ (p) ) × B(x σ (p+1) ) · · · (x σ (p+q) ) p!q! σ ∈S
=
1 X sgn(σ ) × B(x σ (p+1) ) · · · (x σ (p+q) ) × A(x σ (1) ) · · · (x σ (p) ) p!q! σ ∈S
=
1 X sgn(σ ) × B(x σ ◦ε(1) ) · · · (x σ ◦ε(q) ) × A(x σ ◦ε(q+1) ) · · · (x σ ◦ε(q+p) ), p!q! σ ∈S
p+q
p+q
p+q
where ε is the permutation 2 1 ↓ ↓ ε= p+1 p+2
··· ···
q ↓ p+q
q+1 ↓ 1
q+2 ↓ 2
··· ···
q+p ↓ . p
Thus, ab =
X sgn(σ ′ ) 1 × B(x σ ′ (1) ) · · · (x σ ′ (q) ) × A(x σ ′ (q+1) ) · · · (x σ ′ (q+p) ) p!q! σ ′ ∈S sgn(ε) p+q
sgn(ε) X = sgn(σ ′ )×B(x σ ′ (1) ) · · · (x σ ′ (q) )×A(x σ ′ (q+1) ) · · · (x σ ′ (q+p) ) p!q! σ ′ ∈S p+q
= sgn(ε) × ba.
164
6. CARTANDE RHAM CALCULUS
Then, since the permutation ε is made of pq successive transpositions, sgn(ε) = (−1) pq . Hence, A ∧ B = (−1) pq B ∧ A. 3. To compute a ∧ B, let x 0 , x 1 , . . . , x q be q + 1 vectors of E, and let R = (a ∧ B)(x 0 )(x 1 ) · · · (x q ). Then, by definition: R =
X (p + q)! 1 sgn(σ ) × a(x σ (0) ) × B(x σ (1) ) · · · (x σ (q) ) 1! q! (p + q)! σ ∈S 1+q
= + = +
1 X sgn(σ ) × a(x 0 ) × B(x σ (1) ) · · · (x σ (q) ) q! σ σ (0)=0 1 X sgn(σ ) × a(x σ (0) ) × B(x σ (1) ) · · · (x σ (q) ) q! σ σ (0)̸=0 1 X sgn(σ ) × a(x 0 ) × sgn(σ ↾ {1 · · · q}) × B(x 1 ) · · · (x q ) q! σ σ (0)=0 q 1 X X sgn(σ ) × a(x i ) × B(x σ (1) ) · · · (x σ (q) ). q! i=1 σ σ (0)=i
But, on the one hand, we have sgn(σ ) = sgn(σ ↾ {1 · · · q}). On the other hand we can decompose every permutation σ such that σ (0) = i into the product of the following two permutations. 0 1 ··· i ··· q ª ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ τ i 1 ··· 0 ··· q σ= ª ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ε i σ (1) · · · σ (0) · · · σ (q) Thus, for each σ and i such that σ (0) = i, we have B(x σ (1) ) · · · (x σ (q) ) = sgn(ε) × B(x 1 ) · · · (x 0 ) · · · (x q ). Therefore, because sgn(τ ) = −1, we get R =
1 X sgn(σ ) × a(x 0 ) × sgn(σ ) × B(x 1 ) · · · (x q ) q! σ ∈S q
+
q 1 XX sgn(ε) × sgn(τ ) × a(x i ) × sgn(ε) × B(x 1 ) · · · (x 0 ) · · · (x q ) q! i=1 ε∈S
=
a(x 0 ) × B(x 1 ) · · · (x q )
q
−
q X
a(x i ) × B(x 1 ) · · · (x 0 ) · · · (x q ),
i=1
where, in the second term of the equalities, x 0 is at the rank i.
□
MULTILINEAR ALGEBRA
165
6.16. Exterior monomials and basis of Λp (E). Let E be a real vector space. Let a1 , . . . , a p be p covectors of E. Let us define a1 ∧ a2 ∧ · · · ∧ a p = a1 ∧ (a2 ∧ (· · · ∧ a p ) · · · ), where the exterior product has been defined in (art. 6.15). Such linear pforms a1 ∧ a2 ∧ · · · ∧ a p are called exterior monomials of degree p. 1. The exterior monomial a1 ∧ · · · ∧ a p is explicitly given by X a1 ∧ · · · ∧ a p = sgn(σ ) × aσ (1) ⊗ · · · ⊗ aσ (p) . σ ∈S p
2. The value of a1 ∧ · · · ∧ a p , applied to v1 , . . . , vp ∈ E, is given by X (a1 ∧ · · · ∧ a p )(v1 ) · · · (vp ) = sgn(σ ) × a1 (vσ (1) ) · · · a p (vσ (p) ). σ ∈S p
3. If one of the covectors of the family is a linear combination of the others, the exterior monomial a1 ∧ · · · ∧ a p is zero. 4. Let us assume that E is finite dimensional, with dim(E) = n, and let B = (e1 , · · · , en ) be a basis. The set of monomials of degree p {ei ∧ e j ∧ · · · ∧ ek }, where i < j < · · · < k ∈ {1, · · · n}, is a basis of the vector space Λp (E). In other words, for every linear pform A, there exists a family of numbers A i j···k such that X A= A i j···k ei ∧ e j ∧ · · · ∧ ek , with A i j···k = A(ei )(e j ) · · · (ek ). i< j 0 such that the ball B(x, ε) is strictly contained in U, that is, U − B(x, ε) ̸= ∅. Then, there exists a smooth real function λ equal to 1 on the ball of radius ε/2 centered at x, and equal to zero, outside B(x, ε). The smooth pform a¯ : x 7→ λ(x) a satisfies a¯(x) = a and vanishes outside B(x, ε). For the second question, let O = F(U), since F is a local diffeomorphism, O is Dopen and F∗ (¯ a) = (F−1 )∗ (¯ a) is a pform on O , vanishing outside the Dopen subset F(B(x, ε)). Since differential forms are local (art. 6.36), F∗ (¯ a) can be extended by a differential pform α on M such that α ↾ (M − O ) = 0. Now, since F is a local diffeomorphism, and thanks to Exercise 102, p. 205, the value of α at the point m is characterized by the value of a¯ at x, that is, a. More precisely α m = F∗ (¯ a x ), that is, with our identification, α m = F∗ (a), where F∗ is defined in (art. 6.51). Therefore, p Λm (M) ≃ Λp (Rn ). That answers the third question. For the fourth question, we just built the map F , from U × Λp (Rn ) to Λp (M), defined by F (x, a) = (F(x), F∗ (a)). By construction, F is bijective. Let us check rapidly that F is a local diffeomorphism. Let x 0 ∈ U, there exists an open ball B0 centered at x 0 and ε > 0 such that, for all x ∈ B0 , B(x, ε) is strictly included in U. Then, by the previous construction, we get for each (x, a) ∈ B0 × Λp (Rn ) a smooth pform a¯ such that a¯ x = a. Moreover, we can choose for each x ∈ B0 the bumpfunction λ depending smoothly on x, thus the map (x, a) 7→ (x, a¯) is smooth. Hence, F ↾ B0 is smooth, and therefore F . Conversely, a smooth parametrization r 7→ (m r , α r ) in Λp (M) can be locally lifted by a smooth parametrization r 7→ (m r , A(r)) in M × Ω p (M), that is, α r = A(r)mr . Then, by pullback, we get a smooth parametrization r 7→ (F−1 (m r ), F∗ (A(r))) in U × Ω p (U) such that F −1 (m r , α r ) = (x r = F−1 (m r ), [F∗ (A(r))] x r ). Therefore, F −1 is smooth and F is a local diffeomorphism. When F runs over an atlas of M the charts F run obviously over an atlas of Λp (M). Finally, Λp (M) is a manifold, and p dim(Λp (M)) = dim(M) + dim(Λp (Rn )) = dim(M) + Cn . Note that also shows that
Λp (M) is a locally trivial bundle over M (art. 8.9).
✑ Exercise 104, p. 206 (Smooth forms on diffeological vector spaces). 1) Let
α ∈ Ω1 (O ), and let us show that A(x) : u 7→ α(t 7→ x + tu)0 (1) is linear. Let u, v ∈ E, A(x)(u + v) = α(t 7→ x + tu + t v)0 (1). Let ϕ : (t, s) 7→ x + tu + sv and ∆ : t 7→ (t, t). Then, α(t 7→ x + tu + t v)0 (1) = α(ϕ ◦ ∆)0 (1) = ∆∗ (α(ϕ))0 (1) = α(ϕ)(0,0) (1, 1) = α(ϕ)(0,0) (1, 0) + α(ϕ)(0,0) (0, 1). Now, let j1 : t 7→ (t, 0) and j2 : s 7→
SOLUTIONS TO EXERCISES
483
(0, s), then α(ϕ)(0,0) (1, 0) = j1∗ (α(ϕ))0 (1) = α(ϕ ◦ j1 )0 (1) = α(t 7→ x + tu)0 (1) = A(x)(u) and α(ϕ)(0,0) (0, 1) = j2∗ (α(ϕ))0 (1) = α(ϕ ◦ j2 )0 (1) = α(s 7→ x + sv)0 (1) = A(x)(v). Thus, A(x)(u + v) = A(x)(u) + A(x)(v). Next, let λ ∈ R, A(x)(λu) = α(t 7→ x + t λu)0 (1) = α(t 7→ s = t λ 7→ x + su)0 (1) = α(s 7→ x + su)0 (λ) = λα(s 7→ x + su)0 (1) = λA(x)(u). Therefore, A(x) is linear, that is, A(x) ∈ E∗ . Let us show that A(x) ∈ E∗∞ , that is, for every nplot Q : V → E, A(x) ◦ Q ∈ C ∞ (V, R). Let Tx : u 7→ u + x, Tx is a diffeomorphism of E, then A(x)(Q(s)) = α(t 7→ x + tQ(s))0 (1) = Tx∗ (α)(t 7→ tQ(s))0 (1). But (t, s) 7→ tQ(s) is a plot of E, and Tx∗ (α) is a differential 1form on E, thus Tx∗ (α)((t, s) 7→ tQ(s)) is a smooth 1form on I × V, where I is a small interval around 0 ∈ R. Hence, the map (t, s) 7→ Tx∗ (α)((t, s) 7→ tQ(s))(t,s) is a smooth parametrization in Λ1 (R1+n ), and s 7→ Tx∗ (α)(t 7→ tQ(s))0 (1) = Tx∗ (α)((t, s) 7→ tQ(s))(0,s) (1, 0) is smooth. Let us show now that A ∈ C ∞ (O , E∗∞ ) : A is smooth if for every plot P : U → O and Q : V → E, the parametrization (r, s) 7→ A(P(r))(Q(s)) = α(t 7→ P(r) + tQ(s))0 (1) is smooth. But (r, s, t) 7→ P(r) + tQ(s) is a plot of E, we are in a situation analogous to the previous one and thus A is smooth. 2) Conversely, let A ∈ C ∞ (O , E∗∞ ) and α(P) r = d[A(x) ◦ P] r , with x = P(r), that is, α(P) r = d[s 7→ A(P(r)) ◦ P(s)]s=r . Note first that, since A(P(r)) ◦ P is a real function defined on U, d[s 7→ A(P(r)) ◦ P(s)]s=r is a smooth 1form on U. Next, let F : V → U be a smooth parametrization, let t ∈ V and r = f (t). On the one hand, α(P ◦ F) t = d[s 7→ A(P ◦ F(t)) ◦ P ◦ F(s)]s=t = D(A(P(F(t))) ◦ P ◦ F)(s = t), and on the other hand, F∗ (α(P)) t = α(P) r=F(t) ◦ D(F)(t) = d[s 7→ A(P(r)) ◦ P(s)]s=r=F(t) ◦ D(F)(t) = D(A(P(F(t))) ◦ P)(r = F(t)) ◦ D(F)(t), but D(A(P(F(t))) ◦ P ◦ F)(s = t) = D(A(P(F(t))) ◦ P)(r = F(t)) ◦ D(F)(t), by the chain rule. Thus, α(P ◦ F) t = F∗ (α(P)) t . Therefore, α is a differential 1form on O . 3) Let us check now that σ ◦ π = 1. Let σ (A) = α and π (α) = A′ , then A′ (x)(u) = α(t 7→ P(t) = x + tu) t=0 (1) = D(t 7→ A(P(0)) ◦ P(t)) t=0 (1) = D[t 7→ A(x)(x + tu) = A(x)(x) + tA(x)(u)] t=0 (1) = A(x)(u), thus A′ = A. 4) We remark that π is linear, and let α ∈ ker(π ), that is, α(t 7→ x + tu)0 (1) = 0, for all x ∈ O and all u ∈ E. We know that the value of a 1form is given by its values on the 1plots (art. 6.37), that is, if α(c) = 0, for all 1plots c of E, then α = 0. Now, let c be defined on an interval around t 0 ∈ R, and let x 0 = c(t 0 ). Decompose c into t 7→ s = t − t 0 7→ ¯c (s) = c(s + t 0 ) − x 0 7→ ¯c (s) + x 0 , that is, c = Tx 0 ◦ ¯c ◦ T−t 0 . Then, α(c) t 0 (1) = α(Tx 0 ◦ ¯c ◦ T−t 0 ) t 0 (1) = Tx∗ (α)(¯c )0 (1). But, by hypothesis, there 0 exists u ∈ E such that Tx∗ (α)(¯c )0 (1) = Tx∗ (α)(t 7→ tu)0 (1), Then, since α ∈ ker(π ), 0 0 α(c) t 0 (1) = α(t 7→ x 0 + tu)0 (1) = 0, thus α = 0. Therefore, π is injective and surjective, since π ◦ σ = 1, that is, a linear isomorphism.
484
SOLUTIONS TO EXERCISES
✑ Exercise 105, p. 206 (Forms bundles of irrational tori). Let α be a pform on T . Γ
Let a = π ∗ (α). Thus, for each γ ∈ Γ , γ ∗ (a) = γ ∗ (π ∗ (α)) = (π ◦ γ )∗ (α) = π ∗ (α) = a. Hence, a is invariant under the translations γ ∈ Γ . Now, let us decompose the form a of Rn in the canonical basis of Λp (Rn ) (art. 6.16), X a(x) = ai j···k (x) ei ∧ e j ∧ · · · ∧ ek , i j···k n
where x ∈ R and the ai j···k are smooth real functions. Since the monomials ei ∧ e j ∧ · · · ∧ ek are invariant by translation, we get
γ ∗ (a) = a
⇒
ai j···k (x + γ ) = ai j···k (x),
for all families of indices i j · · · k. But since Γ is a dense subgroup of Rn , and the ai j···k are smooth, they are constant. Therefore, a is a constant pform of Rn . Now, let a ∈ Λp (Rn ), and let us show that there exists α, pform of TΓ , such that a = π ∗ (α). We shall apply the criterion (art. 6.38). Let P and P′ be two plots of Rn , defined on the same domain U, such that π ◦ P = π ◦ P′ . Thus, for every r ∈ U, P′ (r) − P(r) ∈ Γ . But the parametrization P′ − P is smooth, hence locally constant, since Γ is discrete. Thus, restricting P and P′ to connected parts of U, the difference P′ − P is constant, that is, P′ (r) = P(r) + γ . Thus, P′∗ (a) = P∗ (a) on the whole U. The criterion is satisfied and there exists α ∈ Ω p (TΓ ) such that a = π ∗ (α). Conversely, the map a 7→ α is injective, indeed, thanks to (art. 6.39), if π ∗ (α) = 0, then α = 0. Therefore, the map a 7→ α, defined on Λp (Rn ) to Ω p (TΓ ) is an isomorphism. Next, let us consider TΓ × Ω p (TΓ ) ≃ TΓ × Λp (Rn ). A pair (τ , α) is equivalent to (τ ′ , α′ ) if and only if τ = τ ′ and ατ = α′τ ′ . But ατ = α′τ ′ implies a = a′ , where a = πΓ∗ (α) and a′ = πΓ∗ (α′ ). Hence, Λp (TΓ ) ≃ TΓ × Λp (Rn ). NOTE. We can check that a smooth section τ 7→ (τ , a) of Λp (TΓ ) is just a smooth map τ 7→ a, and since C ∞ (TΓ , Λp (Rn )) ≃ Λp (Rn ) are just the constant maps, then every smooth pform on TΓ is constant. Now, we can look at the Liouville form on Λp (TΓ ). But, rather than looking at Liouv, let us consider its pullback πΓ∗ (Liouv) on Rn × Λp (Rn ). Let Q × A be a plot of Rn × Λp (Rn ), it is just a pair of smooth parametrizations defined on some domain U. Then, let r ∈ U and δ r = (δ1 r) · · · (δ p r) be a pvector of Rn ,
πΓ∗ (Liouv)(Q × A)(r)(δ r)
= =
A(r)(Q)(r)(δ r) X A(r)i j···k (δi q)(δ j q) · · · (δk q), i< j 0 such that ]−ε, +ε[ ⊂ K. (b) For all ε > 0 there exists t ∈ R such that 0 < t < ε and t ∈ / K. If we are in the first situation, then K = R. Indeed, for every t ∈ R, there exists N ∈ N such that Nε ≤ t < (N + 1)ε. So, x = t/(N + 1) ∈ K. And, since K is a group for the addition, t = (N + 1)x belongs to K. Therefore, in this case K is not a strict subgroup of R. Thus, we are in the second case. Let P : U → K be a plot, that is P ∈ C ∞ (U, R) and P(U) ⊂ K. Let us assume that 0 ∈ U and that P(0) = 0. If it is not the case, we can compose P at the source and the target such that it will be the case.
SOLUTIONS TO EXERCISES
493
Since U is open, there exists R > 0 such that for every ρ < R the open balls B(ρ) of radius ρ, centered at 0 ∈ U, are contained in U. Then, for every 0 < ρ < R let us choose r ∈ B(ρ) and let k = P(r). Thus, k ∈ K, but also all the P(sr), 0 ≤ s ≤ 1, are elements of K. Since p : s 7→ P(sr) is smooth, therefore continuous, p takes all the values between 0 = p(0) and k = p(1). But by hypothesis (a) this is not possible except if p is constant and k = 0. Therefore, P is locally constant and the group K is discrete. Next, let K be a strict subgroup of R, K is discrete and therefore its Dtopology also is discrete (art. 2.11). There are two cases: either K is generated by one number a, K = aZ; or there exist two numbers a ̸= 0 and b ̸= 0, independent over Q, such that {na}n∈Z ⊂ K, {mb}m∈Z ⊂ K, and {na}n∈Z ∩ {mb}m∈Z = {0}. In the first case, the group is embedded in R. Indeed, any subset A of a discrete space is Dopen, if K = aZ, then one can find an open interval I x centered around each point x of A such that I x ∩ K = {x}, and the intersection of this union of intervals with A is just A. In the second case, K contains the dense subgroup a × [Z + αZ], with α = b/a ∈ R − Q. Then, the intersection of every open interval of R with K contains an infinite number of points of K. Therefore, K is not embedded in R.
✑
Exercise 125, p. 266 (Diagonal diffeomorphisms). A plot of ∆(Diff(X)) ⊂ Diff(XN ) writes, in a unique way, r 7→ ∆(φ r ), where r 7→ φ r is some parametrization in Diff(X). Now, r 7→ ∆(φ r ) is smooth only if (r, x 1 , . . . , x N ) 7→ (φ r (x 1 ), . . . , φ r (x N )) is smooth, which means that, for all k = 1, . . . , N, the map (r, x 1 , . . . , x N ) 7→ φ r (x k ) is smooth. Since the projection prk : (x 1 , . . . , x N ) 7→ x k is a subduction, that is equivalent to (r, x k ) 7→ φ r (x k ) being smooth, which means then that r 7→ φ r is a plot of Diff(X). Therefore, ∆ is an induction.
✑ Exercise 126, p. 267 (The Hilbert sphere is homogeneous). Let us give the proof in two steps.
1. The map π is surjective. Let Z and Z′ be two elements of SC . If Z and Z′ are collinear, then there exists τ ∈ S1 ≃ U(C) such that Z′ = τ Z, and the map Z 7→ τ Z belongs to U(H ). Otherwise, let E be the plane spanned by these two vectors, and let F be its orthogonal for the Hermitian product. According to Bourbaki [Bou55], E and F are supplementary H = E ⊕ F. The vectors Z and Z′ are vectors of the unit sphere S3 ⊂ E ≃ C2 , now the group U(C2 ) acts transitively on S3 , there exists A ∈ U(C3 ) such that Z′ = AZ. This map, extended to H by the identity on F, belongs to U(H ) and maps Z to Z′ . Therefore, the action of U(H ) is transitive on SC , which is equivalent to the assertion that π is surjective. 2. The map π is a subduction. Let Q : U → SC be a plot. We want to lift Q locally along the projection π , that is, for any r0 ∈ U, to find a plot P : V → U(H ), defined on some open neighborhood V of r0 , such that P(r)(e1 ) = Q(r), for all r ∈ V. So,
494
SOLUTIONS TO EXERCISES
let r0 ∈ U, let V be an open neighborhood of r0 , let j : Cm → H be an injection, and let ϕ : V → Cm be a smooth parametrization such that Q ↾ V = j ◦ ϕ. Let us denote E = j(Cm ). The plot Q of SC takes its values in E, and hence in the unit sphere of E: S(E) = E ∩ SC . The diffeology induced on S(E) is the standard diffeology: S(E) ≃ S2m−1 . Thus, Q ↾ V is an ordinary smooth map from V into S(E). But we know that the projection from U(m) onto S(Cm ) is a submersion, a fortiori a subduction. Thus, for any r0 ∈ V there exist a domain W ⊂ V and a smooth lifting φ : W → U(m) such that Q(r) = φ (r)(e1m ), for all r ∈ W, where e1m is the vector (1, 0, . . . , 0) ∈ Cm . Let us assume that e1 = j(e1m ), if it is not the case we conjugate everything with some suitable linear map. Now, let F be the orthogonal of E. The space H is the direct sum of E and F, i.e., H = E ⊕ F. Every vector Z ∈ H has a unique decomposition Z = ZE + ZF such that ZE ∈ E and ZF ∈ F. Let then P(r)(Z) = φ (r)(ZE ) + ZF , for all r ∈ W and all Z ∈ H . For all r ∈ W, the map P(r) is smooth because the decomposition Z 7→ (ZE , ZF ) is linear, and then smooth for the fine diffeology. Moreover P(r) clearly preserves the Hermitian product, and is obviously invertible. The map P lifts Q locally, P(r)(e1 ) = φ (r)(e1m ) + 0 = Q(r), for all r ∈ W. It remains then to check that P is a plot of the functional diffeology of U(H ). But this is quite clear — a finite family of vectors decomposes into components belonging to E and to F, and because the family is finite, one has only a finite intersection of open sets which is open, we get the property we are looking for. The inverse of P(r) does not give more problems. Therefore, we get that SC is homogeneous under U(HC ). Now, PC is the quotient of SC by U(1). Since the composite of subductions U(HC ) → SC → PC is a subduction (art. 1.47), and since the action of U(HC ) on SC passes to PC , PC is a homogeneous space of U(HC ).
✑ Exercise 127, p. 274 (Pullback of 1forms by multiplication). Let us develop the form m∗ (α)(P × Q), δr ∗ m (α)(P × Q)(r ) s δs
= =
δr α[(r, s) 7→ (P(r), Q(s)) 7→ P(r) · Q(s)](r ) s δs δr [αU,s (r) αV,r (s)] , δs
because any 1form on U × V, at a point (r, s), writes [αU,s (r) αV,r (s)], where αU,s is a 1form of U depending on s, and αV,r is a 1form of V depending on r. Thus, δr ∗ m (α)(P × Q)(r ) = αU,s (r)(δ r) + αV,r (s)(δs) s δs
SOLUTIONS TO EXERCISES
495
=
α[r 7→ P(r) · Q(s)] r (δ r)
+
α[s 7→ P(r) · Q(s)]s (δs)
=
(R(Q(s))∗α)(P) r (δ r)
+
(L(P(r))∗α)(Q)s (δs).
Each term of the right sum above is computed by considering successively, in m∗ (α)(P × Q)(r,s) (δ r, δs), s constant and δs = 0, then r constant and δ r = 0. We get finally, considering the diagonal map ∆ : r 7→ (r, r),
α[r 7→ P(r) · Q(r)] r (δ r)
=
∆∗ (m∗ (α)(P × Q)) r (δ r)
=
(R(Q(r))∗α)(P) r (δ r)
+
(L(P(r))∗α)(Q) r (δ r).
✑ Exercise 128, p. 274 (Liouville form on groups). Let F : V → U be a smooth parametrization, then Q ◦ F = (P ◦ F, A ◦ F). On the one hand,
λ(Q ◦ F)s (δs)
=
A(F(s))(P ◦ F)s (δs)
=
F∗ [A(F(s))(P)]s (δs)
=
A(F(s))(P)F(s) (D(F)(s)(δs)),
=
λ(Q)F(s) (D(F)(s)(δs))
=
A(F(s))(P)F(s) (D(F)(s)(δs)).
and on the other hand, F∗ [λ(Q)]s (δs)
Therefore, λ(Q ◦ F) = F∗ (λ(Q)), and λ defines a differential 1form on G × G ∗ . Now, jα∗ (λ)(P) r (δ r) = λ( jα ◦ P) r (δ r) = λ(r 7→ (P(r), α)) r (δ r) = α(P) r (δ r). Thus, jα∗ (λ) = α. Next, let g ′ ∈ G, recalling that Ad∗ (g ′ ) = Ad(g ′−1 )∗ , we have ∗ gG×G ∗ (λ)(Q) r (δ r)
=
λ(gG×G ∗ ◦ Q) r (δ r)
=
λ(r 7→ (Ad(g ′ )(P(r)), Ad∗ (g ′ )[A(r)])) r (δ r)
=
[Ad∗ (g ′ )(A(r))](Ad(g ′ ) ◦ P) r (δ r)
=
Ad(g ′ )∗ [Ad(g ′−1 )∗ (A(r))](P) r (δ r)
=
A(r)(P) r (δ r).
Therefore, λ is invariant under this action of G on G × G ∗ .
✑ Exercise 129, p. 291 (Groupoid associated with x 7→ x ).
Let X = R and Q = R, equipped with the standard diffeology, and let π : X → Q, π (x) = x 3 . Let K be the groupoid associated with π . Since π is injective, X q = π −1 (q) is equal 3
496
SOLUTIONS TO EXERCISES
to the singleton {x = p p {[ 3 q 7→ 3 q′ ]}. Then,
p 3 q}. Hence, Mor(q, q′ ) is itself reduced to the singleton Mor(K) = {[x 7→ x ′ ]  x, x ′ ∈ R},
and set theoretically Mor(K) ≃ R × R. The question is about the diffeology, on R × R, induced by the diffeology of Mor(K). Let P : U → Mor(K) be a plot, and let P(r) = {[x r 7→ x r′ ]}. Let us make explicit the spaces X src◦P and X trg◦P , X src◦P = {(r, x r ) ∈ U × R  r ∈ U}, and X trg◦P = {(r, x r′ ) ∈ U × R  r ∈ U}. The maps Psrc and Ptrg are then given by Psrc (r, x r ) = P(r)(x r ) = x r′ , and Ptrg (r, x r′ ) = P(r)−1 (x r′ ) = x r . These maps are smooth if and only if the parametrizations r 7→ x r′ and r 7→ x r are smooth, which implies in particular that χ ◦ P : r 7→ (x r3 , x r′ 3 ) is smooth. Therefore, the diffeology induced on R × R by the groupoid diffeology of K is the standard diffeology. Note that the injection iQ : Q → Mor(K) is indeed smooth, even if the presence of the cubic root is disturbing. Let r 7→ q r be a plot of Q = R, defined on U, and let P : r 7→ 1X qr be the composite with iQ . We have to check that P is p a plot of Mor(K) ≃ R × R. In this case X src◦P = X trg◦P = {(r, 3 q r )  r ∈ U} and p p p p Psrc (r, 3 q r ) = Ptrg (r, 3 q r ) = 3 q r . A parametrization s 7→ (x rs , 3 q rs ) of X src◦P is a p plot if and only if s 7→ x rs and s 7→ 3 q rs are smooth, and thus Psrc and Ptrg are smooth. Eventually, the real question is, Is this groupoid fibrating? The answer is No! Because the map χ : (x, x ′ ) 7→ (x 3 , x ′3 ) is not a subduction, and now the p reason is exactly because q 7→ 3 q is not smooth.
✑
Exercise 130, p. 304 (Polarized smooth functions). A line D passing through the origin has two unit direction vectors {±u}. So, we can equip P1 (R) with the quotient diffeology of S1 ⊂ R2 by {±1}. This diffeology is equivalent to the powerset diffeology; see Exercise 63, p. 76. Therefore, we can regard T as T = {(±u, f ) ∈ P1 (R) × C ∞ (R2 , C)  f (x + su) = f (x), ∀x ∈ R2 , ∀s ∈ R}. Now, let us consider the pullback of the projection π : T → P1 (R) by the projection p : S1 → P1 (R), that is, p∗ (T) = {(u, f ) ∈ S1 × C ∞ (R2 , C)  f (x + su) = f (x) ∀x ∈ R2 , ∀s ∈ R}. Thus, T is now equivalent to the quotient of p∗ (T) by the equivalence relation (u, f ) ∼ (±u, f ). Then, let us introduce the π /2 rotation J in the plane R2 , and let us consider the map
ϕ : (u, F) 7→ (u, f = [x 7→ F(u · J x)]), for all (u, F) ∈ S1 × C ∞ (R, C), where the dot · denotes the usual scalar product. Next, since u · Ju = 0, f (x + su) = F(u · J(x + su)) = F((u · J x) + (su · Ju)) = F(u · J x) = f (x), and f = [x 7→ F(u · J x)]
SOLUTIONS TO EXERCISES
497
is constant on all the lines parallel to Ru. Moreover, ϕ is bijective, for all u ∈ S1 and f ∈ C ∞ (R, C) such that f (x + su) = f (x),
ϕ−1 (u, f ) = (u, F = [t 7→ f (t × J−1 u)]). The maps ϕ and ϕ−1 are clearly smooth, thus p∗ (T) is trivial, equivalent to pr1 : S1 × C ∞ (R, C) → S1 . This is sufficient to prove that π : T → P1 is a diffeological fiber bundle. Then, the pullback of the action of ε ∈ {±1}, by ϕ, writes ε(u, F) = (εu, F ◦ ˆε), where ˆε : t 7→ ε × t. Hence, T is equivalent to the quotient of S1 × C ∞ (R, C) by this action. Finally, let us consider the induction of R into C ∞ (R, C) by t 7→ [x 7→ t x]. The subbundle ϕ(S1 × R)/{±1} ⊂ T is the quotient of the product S1 × R by the action ε(u, t) = (εu, ε t), ε ∈ {±1}. But this is exactly the Möbius strip, and the Möbius strip is not trivial over P1 (R), thus the fiber bundle T also is not trivial.
✑
Exercise 131, p. 304 (Playing with SO(3)). Since SO(2, e1 ) is a subgroup of SO(3), the projection π : SO(3) → SO(3)/SO(2, e1 ) is a principal fibration, (art. 8.15). Now, let us prove that the map p : SO(3) → S2 , defined by A 7→ Ae1 , is a subduction and then identifies SO(3)/SO(2, e1 ) with S2 . First of all, the map p is surjective. Indeed, let u ∈ S2 , there exists a vector v ∈ S2 orthogonal to u. Then, the matrix A = [u v u × v], where × denotes the vector product, belongs to SO(3), and Ae1 = u. Now, let r 7→ u r be a smooth parametrization of S2 , let r0 be a ¯0 ]w ̸= 0, where point in its domain, and let u0 = u r0 . Let w ∈ R3 such that [1 − u0 u ¯0 ] is the orthogonal projector along u0 . Since the map r 7→ [1 − u r u ¯ r ]w [1 − u0 u is smooth, there exists a small open ball B centered at r0 such that, for all r ∈ B, ¯ r ]w is not zero. Now, let vr = w r /∥w r ∥. Since w r is the vector w r = [1 − u r u not zero, r 7→ vr is smooth, it belongs to S2 and it is orthogonal to u r . Thus, r 7→ A r = [u r vr u r × vr ] is a plot of SO(3) such that A r (e1 ) = u r . Therefore p is a subduction. Now we just observe that p(A) = p(A′ ) if and only if there exists k ∈ SO(2, e1 ) such that A′ = Ak−1 . Therefore, thanks to the uniqueness of quotients (art. 1.52), we conclude that p is a fibration, and moreover a principal fibration. 2 3 Finally, the map (A, v) 7→ (Ae1 , Av), from SO(3) × e⊥ 1 to S × R , takes its values in TS2 and represents the associated fiber bundle SO(3) ×SO(2,e1 ) e⊥ 1.
✑
Exercise 132, p. 304 (Homogeneity of manifolds). Let εn be a smooth bumpfunction defined on Rn , equal to 1 on the ball B′ of radius r/2, centered at 0n , and equal to 0 outside the ball B of radius r. Let ε be a smooth bumpfunction defined on R, equal to 1 on the interval [−δ/2, 1 + δ/2] and equal to 0 outside the interval ]−δ, 1 + δ[. Let f be the vector field defined on Rn × R by f (x, t) = (0n , εn (x) × ε(t)). The vector field f is equal to zero outside the cylinder C and equal to (0n , 1) into the cylinder C′ = B′ × [−δ/2, 1 + δ/2]. Since the support of f is contained in C, f is integrable, and the time 1 of its exponential is a
498
SOLUTIONS TO EXERCISES
compactly supported diffeomorphism, whose support is contained in C. Moreover, since inside C′ the vector field f is constant equal to (0n , 1), its exponential is the translation exp(s f )(x, t) = (x, t + s) as soon as (x, t) and (x, t + s) belong to C′ . Thus exp( f )(0n , 0) = (0n , 1), and exp( f ) satisfies the conditions of the exercise. Now, let F : B → M be some chart of M, where B is an open ball. Let r, r ′ ∈ B, let x = F(r) and x ′ = F(r ′ ). There exists a small open cylinder C containing the segment {r + s(r ′ − r)}1s=0 and contained in B. According to the first part of the exercise (modulo smooth equivalence) there exists a diffeomorphism of B with compact support contained in C , and mapping r to r ′ . Thus, the image of this diffeomorphism by the chart F defines a local diffeomorphism of M, defined on the open subset F(B), mapping x to x ′ and which is the identity outside a closed subset. It can thus be extended, by the identity, into a global compactly supported diffeomorphism of M, mapping x to x ′ . Next, let us choose x and x ′ , any two points in M. Let us note first that there exists an atlas of M made of charts whose domains are open balls, let us call these charts round charts. Since M is connected, there exists a path γ connecting x to x ′ , let {Ft }1t=0 be a family of round charts such that γ (t) ∈ val(Ft ). The set {γ −1 (val(Ft ))}1t=0 is an open covering of [0, 1], by compacity, after reindexation, there exists a finite family {Fi }Ni=1 such that {γ −1 (val(Fi ))}Ni=1 is an open covering of [0, 1]. We can even assume that for every index i = 1, . . . , N, Ji = γ −1 (val(Fi )) is an open interval of R such that only two successive intervals intersect. Choosing a point t i ∈ Ji ∩ Ji+1 , i = 1, . . . , N − 1, we get a family of points x i = γ (t i ) such that two consecutive points (x i , x i+1 ) belong to the values of one round chart Fi . Now, thanks to the previous result we get a finite family of compactly supported diffeomorphisms of M mapping every point of this family to its successor, the first point being x and the last x ′ . Thus, after composition we get a compactly supported diffeomorphism mapping x to x ′ . And we conclude that the map xˆ0 : DiffK (M) → M is surjective. Now, to prove that the projection xˆ0 is a principal fibration, with structure group the stabilizer DiffK (M, x 0 ), we need to lift locally any plot of M. But since M is a manifold, it is sufficient to lift locally any chart F : U → M. Without loss of generality, we can assume that 0 ∈ U, and for simplicity that U is connected. Let us prove first that there exists a smooth map r 7→ Ψr , where r belongs to an open ball centered at 0, contained in U, and Ψr is a compactly supported diffeomorphism of U, mapping 0 to r. For that, let us chose two balls B and B′ of radii R < R′ , contained in U and centered at 0. Let λ be a smooth bumpfunction defined on U, equal to 1 in B and equal to 0 outside B′ . Let us define f r (r ′ ) = λ(r ′ ) × r, for r ′ ∈ U and r < R. The map r 7→ f r is a smooth family of vector fields on U, with supports contained in B′ . For all t, r and r ′ such that r ′ and r ′ + t r belong to B, the exponential of f r coincides with the translation exp(t f r )(r ′ ) = r ′ + t r. Thus, for t = 1, r ′ = 0, and r < R, we get exp( f r )(0) = r. Thanks to the differentiability of r 7→ f r and to the differentiability
SOLUTIONS TO EXERCISES
499
of the solutions of an ordinary differential equation with respect to the parameters, the map r 7→ exp( f r ) is smooth for the functional diffeology. Now, since the support of exp( f r ) is contained in U, F ◦ exp( f r ) ◦ F−1 is a local compactly supported diffeomorphism of M mapping F(U) into itself, therefore it can be extended, by the identity, into a global compactly supported diffeomorphism Φr of M, mapping x 0′ = F(0) to x = F(r), that is, Φr (x 0′ ) = F(r). Next, we know that there exists a diffeomorphism φ mapping x 0 to x 0′ , thus the diffeomorphism ϕ r = Φr ◦ φ maps x 0 to F(r), that is, xˆ0 (ϕ r ) = ϕ r (x 0 ) = F(r). Finally, since r 7→ exp( f r ) is smooth and the composition with smooth maps is a smooth operation, the local lift r 7→ ϕ r of F along xˆ0 , in DiffK (M), is smooth. Therefore, xˆ0 is a diffeological principal fibration. The homogeneity of manifolds has first been proved by Donato in his dissertation [Don84]. Let T(M) be the tangent bundle to M, that is, the space of 1jets of paths in M. Precisely, T(M) is the quotient of Paths(M) by the equivalence relation γ ∼ γ ′ if γ (0) = γ ′ (0), and for all differential 1forms α on M, α(γ )(0) = α(γ ′ )(0). Then, T(M) is the associated fiber bundle DiffK (M) ×DiffK (M,x 0 ) E, where E = Tx 0 (M) = Paths(M, x 0 , ⋆)/∼.
✑ Exercise 133, p. 320 (Covering tori).
First of all, since (Rn , +) is a group and Γ ⊂ Rn is a subgroup, the projection p : Rn → TΓ is a fibration (art. 8.15), a principal fibration. Then, thanks to the unicity, up to equivalence, of universal coverings (art. 8.26), since Rn is simply connected and Γ is discrete, p : Rn → TΓ is the universal covering of TΓ , and Γ identifies with π1 (TΓ ). Now every path t 7→ t γ , where γ ∈ Γ , projects into a loop in TΓ . This family of loops, one for each element of Γ , gives a favorite representative for each element of π1 (TΓ , 1TΓ ), that is, each class of homotopy of loop based at 1TΓ = p(0). Next, considering the circle, we know that the map p : t 7→ (cos(t), sin(t)) is a subduction, making the circle S1 ⊂ R2 diffeomorphic to R/2π Z; see Exercise 27, p. 33. Each loop of S1 is then homotopic to some t 7→ p(2π kt), for k ∈ Z. But p(2π t k) = (cos(2π kt), sin(2π kt)) is also equal to R(2π kt)(1S1 ). By translation with an element of S1 , we get the general statement.
✑ Exercise 134, p. 327 (De Rham homomorphism and irrational tori). There are two different cases, s = α r and s ̸= α r.
1. CASE s = α r. The action of Z × Z on R × R is given by (x, y) 7→ (x + n + αm, y + r(n + αm)), with (n, m) ∈ Z × Z. The following map
Φ : (x, y) 7→ ([x], y − ax), defined from R × R to Tα × R, where [x] ∈ Tα , is a realization of the quotient, Φ(x, y) = Φ(x ′ , y ′ ) ⇔ (x ′ , y ′ ) = (x + n + αm, y + r(n + αm)). We find again the situation with ρ = ρc , and the quotient is trivial.
500
SOLUTIONS TO EXERCISES
2. CASE s ̸= α r. Let us consider the following linear map, 1 x u sx − α y M: 7→ = . y v s − α r −r x + y The map M is a linear isomorphism of R × R with determinant 1. The image by M of the action of Z + αZ is the standard action of Z × Z, (n, m) : (u, v) 7→ (u + n, v + m). Thus, the quotient R ×ρ R is diffeomorphic to the 2torus T2 = T × T. The projection from R ×ρ R ≃ T × T onto the irrational torus Tα is given in terms of (u, v), above, by p : T2 → Tα , with p([u, v]) = [u + α v]. Then, the action of (R, +) on the variables (u, v) is generated by the translation along the vector 1 −α ξ= . s − αr 1 Note that the various choices of homomorphisms ρ change only the speed of the action of R on the 2torus.
✑ Exercise 135, p. 327 (The fiber of the integration bundle). Let r 7→ xˆ
r be a plot of X α with values in the fiber prα−1 (x 0 ). By definition of the quotient diffeology, there exists, at least locally, a smooth lift r 7→ ℓ r suchRthat xˆ r = class(ℓ r ). Let us represent the quotient by the values of the integrals ℓ α, ℓ ∈ Loops(X, x 0 ), and R let us prove that the map r 7→ ℓ α is locally constant. Let us thus compute the r variation of the integral, according to (art. 6.70). We can reduce the question to a 1parameter variation s 7→ ℓs , and because d α = 0, the variation is reduced to Z Z 1 δ α= α(δℓ) = α(δℓ) = α(δℓ)(1) − α(δℓ)(0). ℓs
∂I
0
But α(δℓ) is given (art. 6.56) by s 1 α(δℓ)(t) = α 7→ ℓs (t) t 0 (s=0 t ) s s = α 7→ ℓs (t) D s 7→ (s = 0)(1) t t (s=0 t ) s = α s 7→ 7→ ℓs (t) (1) t s=0 =
α (s 7→ ℓs (t))s=0 (1).
R Now, since ℓs (0) = ℓs (1) for all s, we get α(δℓ)(1) = α(δℓ)(0), and hence δ ℓ α = 0. s Therefore, the map r 7→ xˆ r is locally constant and the fiber in X α over x 0 , equipped with the subset diffeology, is discrete.
SOLUTIONS TO EXERCISES
501
✑ Exercise 136, p. 345 (Spheric periods on toric bundles). Since σ belongs to
Loops(Loops(X, x), x ), we have σ (0)(t) = σ (1)(t) = σ (s)(0) = σ (s)(1) = x for all s, t, that is, σ ◦ j1 (0) = σ ◦ j1 (1) = σ ◦ j2 (0) = σ ◦ j2 (1) = x , where jk is defined in (art. 6.59). We know that the pullback pr1 : σ ∗ (Y) → R2 is trivial (art. 8.9), so there exists a global lifting σ ˜ of σ , π∗ (˜ σ) = π ◦ σ ˜ = σ . Now, Z Z Z Z Z Z Z 2 X ∗ k ω= ω = π (ω) = dλ = λ= (−1) λ− λ . σ
π∗ (˜ σ)
σ ˜
σ ˜
∂σ ˜
σ ˜ ◦ jk (0)
k=1
σ ˜ ◦ jk (1)
Let γk,a = σ ˜ ◦ jk (a), with k = 1, 2 and a = 0, 1, and let γ¯k,a (t) = γk,a (1 − t). We have Z Z Z Z Z Z 2 X
λ−
(−1)k
k=1
λ+
λ =
σ ˜ ◦ jk (0)
σ ˜ ◦ jk (1)
γ1 =γ2,0
λ+
γ2 =γ1,1
λ+
γ3 =¯ γ2,1
λ.
γ4 =¯ γ1,0
Next, since σ ◦ jk (a) = x , the paths γi are paths in Yx = π −1 (x), and they describe a closed circuit: σ ˜ (1)(0) = γ1 (1) = γ2 (0), σ ˜ (1)(1) = γ2 (1) = γ3 (0), σ ˜ (0)(1) = γ3 (1) = γ4 (0), σ ˜ (0)(0) = γ4 (1) = γ1 (0). Then, choosing a point y0 ∈ Yx and identifying Yx with T, thanks to the orbit map τ 7→ τY ( y0 ), we can regard the γi as paths in T, describing a close circuit starting and ending at 0 ∈ T. But since R is a covering of T (actually, the universal covering), thanks to the monodromy theorem, we can lift each path γi by a path x i in R, γi (t) = class(x i (t)). Moreover, we can choose these liftings such that x 1 (0) = 0, x 1 (1) = x 2 (0), x 2 (1) = x 3 (0), x 3 (1) = x 4 (0), and since γ4 (1) = 0, x 4 (1) ∈ Γ . Then, Z Z1 Z1
λ=
λ(γi ) t (1) d t =
γi
0
θ[t 7→ class(x i (t))] t (1) d t.
0
Let us recall that class∗ (θ) = d t means θ[t 7→ class(t)] = d t, that is, θ[r 7→ class(x(r))] = x ∗ (d t) = d x, for all smooth real parametrizations x, thus Z Z1 d x i (t) λ= d t = x i (1) − x i (0), dt γ 0 i
and, finally Z σ
✑
ω=
4 Z X i=1
λ = x 4 (1) − x 1 (0) = x 4 (1) ∈ Γ .
γi
Exercise 137, p. 345 (Fiber bundles over tori). Let us recall that every fiber bundle is associated with a principal fiber bundle (art. 8.16). Thus, it is sufficient, for this exercise, to assume the fiber bundle to be principal. Let π : Y → TΓ be a principal fiber bundle with structure group G. Let p : Rn → TΓ be the universal covering. The pullback pr1 : p∗ (Y) → Rn is a Gprincipal fiber bundle, with the action g(x, y) = (x, gY ( y)), where gY denotes the action of g ∈ G on Y. Since the base of the pullback is Rn , the fibration is trivial (art. 8.19). Therefore, it admits a smooth
502
SOLUTIONS TO EXERCISES
section, that is, there exists φ ∈ C ∞ (Rn , Y) such that π ◦ φ = p. Then, for each x ∈ Rn and each γ ∈ Γ , there exists h(γ )(x) ∈ G such that φ (x) = h(γ )(x)Y (φ (x + γ )). Thus, h ∈ Maps(Γ , C ∞ (Rn , G)) and h(γ + γ ′ )(x) = h(γ )(x) · h(γ ′ )(x + γ ). Note also that, since Γ is Abelian, h(γ )(x) · h(γ ′ )(x + γ ) = h(γ ′ )(x) · h(γ )(x + γ ′ ). Next, pr2 : p∗ (Y) → Y is a subduction, indeed if r 7→ y r is a plot of Y, then locally y r = pr2 (x r , y r ), where r 7→ x r is a local lift in Rn of r 7→ π ( y r ). Then, Y is equivalent to the quotient of Rn × G by the action of Γ induced by h, that is, γ (x, g) = (x + γ , g · h(γ )(x)). Conversely, given such a map h, we get a Gprincipal fiber bundle by quotient. These maps h are kinds of cocycles, the above construction gives a trivial bundle if and only if h is trivial, that is, if and only if there exists f ∈ C ∞ (Rn , G) such that h(γ )(x) = f (x)−1 · f (x + γ ), such h can be regarded as coboundaries.
✑ Exercise 138, p. 345 (Flat connections on toric bundles).
Let π : Y → X be a Tprincipal bundle, with T a 1dimensional torus. Let λ be a connection 1form and let us assume that Θ, the associated connection, is flat, which means, by definition, that the holonomy group is discrete (art. 8.35). Thus, the holonomy bundle p : YΘ ( y) → X is a covering, (art. 8.35, (♠)) and (art. 8.35, Note 1). Let us recall that YΘ ( y) ⊂ Y is made of the ends of horizontal paths starting at y, and let us denote by j : YΘ ( y) → Y the inclusion. Let γ ∈ Paths(YΘ ( y), y), the horizontal path Θ(γ , 0) takes necessarily its values in YΘ ( y) and projects on the same path π ◦ γ as γ in X. But since YΘ ( y) is a covering, there is one and only one lift of π ◦ γ in YΘ ( y) starting at y, thus Θ(γ , 0) = γ . Hence, all the 1plots in YΘ ( y) are horizontal and λ(γ ) = 0 for all γ ∈ Paths(YΘ ( y)). Therefore, the connection form λ vanishes on YΘ ( y) (art. 6.37), that is, j ∗ (λ) = 0. Now π ◦ j = p implies, on the one hand, j ∗ (d λ) = d( j ∗ (λ)) = 0, and on the other hand j ∗ (d λ) = j ∗ (π ∗ (ω)) = (π ◦ j)∗ (ω) = p∗ (ω), where ω is the curvature of λ. Thus, p∗ (ω) = 0, and since p is a subduction, ω = 0 (art. 6.39).
✑
Exercise 139, p. 345 (Connection forms over tori). Let λ be a connection 1form on Y. Let pr : (x, t) 7→ [x, t] be the projection from R × R to Y, the pullback Λ = pr∗ (λ) is a connection 1form on R × R and thus writes, with our usual notation for points and vectors, δx Λ( x ) = a(x)δ x + δ t, t δt where a is a smooth real function. Now, Λ is invariant by Γ . Thus, for all k ∈ Γ , ∗ δx δx kR×R (Λ) ( x ) = Λ( x ) , t t δt δt δ(x + k) δx Λ( x+k ) = Λ( x ) , t t+τ (k)(x) δ(t + τ (k)(x)) δt
SOLUTIONS TO EXERCISES
503
a(x + k)δ x + δ t + τ (k)′ (x)δ x
=
a(x)δ x + δ t,
a(x + k)δ x + τ (k)′ (x)δ x
=
a(x)δ x.
Hence, τ (k)′ (x) = a(x) − a(x + k). Let A be a primitive of a. We get by integration, τ (k)(x) − τ (k)(0) = A(x) − A(0) − A(x + k) + A(k). Then, τ (k)(x) = B(k)+ σ (x + k) − σ (x), for some B : Γ → R and σ ∈ C ∞ (R). Thus, τ is equivalent to B (art. 8.39, (♥)). The condition of cocycle writes then B(k + k′ ) = B(k) + B(k′ ), and B is a homomorphism from Γ to R. Therefore, if there exists a connection 1form on Y, then the cocycle τ defining π is equivalent to a homomorphism. Conversely, if τ is equivalent to a homomorphism B, we just consider τ = B. Then, any 1form Λ(x,t) : (δ x, δ t) 7→ a(x)δ x + δ t, where a is a Γ invariant real function on R, is invariant by the action of Γ on R × R, and since R × R is a covering of the quotient Y = R ×Γ R, there exists a 1form λ on Y such that pr∗ (λ) = Λ (art. 6.38). Next, since Λ is clearly a connection 1form, so is λ. In the special case Γ = Z + αZ, a homomorphism writes B(n + αm) = an + bm, but considering the function σ (x) = a x, B is equivalent to β(n + αm) = cm for some constant c. If c ̸= 0, then we can choose c = 1, for simplicity. Thus, the quotient of R × R by the action (n, (x, t)) 7→ (x + n + αm, t + m) of Z is equivalent to the 2torus T2 , with T = R/Z, for the projection (x, t) 7→ ([t] , [x − α t]).
✑
Exercise 140, p. 357 (Loops in the torus). The 1form K ω restricted to Loops(T2 ) is closed, thanks to the fundamental property of the ChainHomotopy operator. In particular, the restriction of K ω to each component of Loops(T2 ) is closed. Let comp(ℓ) be the connected component of ℓ in Loops(T2 ). The path σ : s 7→ σs , with σs (t) = class(t, s), is a loop in Loops(T2 ), based at ℓ, thus a loop in comp(ℓ). Let us compute the integral of K ω on σ , that is, Z σ
Kω=
Z
1
K ω(σ )s (1) ds.
0
Let σ ¯ (t, s) = σs (t), and let σ ˜ be the lift of σ ¯ in R2 , class ◦˜ σ=σ ¯ , such that σ ˜ (0, 0) = (0, 0), by definition, Z1 t 1 0 1 0 K ω(σ )s (1) = ω 7→ σs (t) dt = ω(¯ σ )(t ) dt s s 0 1 0 1 0 0 (st ) Z1 Z1 1 0 1 0 ∗ ∗ = σ ¯ (ω)(t ) dt = (class ◦˜ σ ) (ω)(t ) dt s s 0 1 0 1 0 0 Z1 Z1 1 0 ∗ 1 2 = (˜ σ ) (e ∧ e )(t ) dt = det D(˜ σ )(t ) d t. s s 0 1 0 0 Z
1
504
SOLUTIONS TO EXERCISES
Hence, Z
Kω=
σ
Z
1
Z
1
ds 0
0
d t det D(˜ σ )(t ) . s
(♦)
R In our case σ ˜ is the identity and σ K ω = 1. Then, since d[K ω ↾ comp(ℓ)] = 0 R and σ K ω ̸= 0, comp(ℓ) is not simply connected; seeExercise 117, p. 240.
✑ Exercise 141, p. 357 (Periods of a surface). Since T
2
is a group, its fundamental group π1 (T , class(0, 0)) is Abelian, and the set of connected components π0 (Loops(T2 )) is in a onetoone correspondence with π1 (T2 , class(0, 0)); see Exercise 87, p. 151. Precisely, π1 (T2 , class(0, 0)) = π1 (T, [0])2 , where we simply denote class(x) by [x], for x ∈ R and class(x) ∈ T = R/Z, and then class(x, y) = ([x], [ y]). Now, π1 (T, [0]) ≃ Z, each class is represented by a loop t 7→ [nt], with n ∈ Z. Therefore, each class of loop in T2 is represented by a loop ℓn,m : t 7→ ([nt], [mt]). Now, let s 7→ σs be a loop in Loops(T2 ) based in ℓn,m , the map (t, s) 7→ σs (t), from R2 to T2 has a unique lift t 7→ (x s (t), ys (t)) in R2 — that is, σs (t) = ([x s (t)], [ ys (t)]) — such that (x 0 (0), y0 (0)) = (0, 0), (art. 8.25). Since σ0 = ℓn,m , x 0 (t) = nt + k and y0 (t) = mt + k′ , but (x 0 (0), y0 (0)) = (0, 0) implies k = k′ = 0. Then, x 0 (t) = nt and y0 (t) = mt. Next, since σs is a loop, σs (1) = σs (0), that is, x s (1) = x s (0) + k and ys (1) = ys (0) + k′ , with k, k′ ∈ Z. Computed for s = 0, that gives k = n and k′ = m, thus x s (1) = x s (0) + n and ys (1) = ys (0) + m. The last condition, σ0 = σ1 = ℓn,m , gives x 1 (t) = x 0 (t)+ k and y1 (t) = y0 (t)+ k′ , that is, x 1 (t) = nt + k and y1 (t) = mt + k′ , with k, k′ ∈ Z. Summarized, these conditions write 2
x 0 (t) = nt y0 (t) = mt
x 1 (t) = nt + k y1 (t) = mt + k′
x s (1) − x s (0) = n, ys (1) − ys (0) = m.
Now, let us define
ξ(u)s (t) =
[u(nt + sk) + (1 − u)x s (t)] [u(mt + sk′ ) + (1 − u) ys (t)]
.
With the conditions summarized above, we can check that ξ(u)s (0) = ξ(u)s (1) and ξ(u)0 (t) = ξ(u)1 (t) = ℓn,m . Thus, ξ is a fixedends homotopy of loops connecting ξ(0) = [s 7→ σs ] to ξ(1) = [s 7→ σs′ ], with σs′ (t) = ([nt + sk], [mt + sk′ ]). Next, since K ω ↾ comp(ℓn,m ) is closed, the integrals of K ω on the loops [s 7→ σs ] and [s 7→ σs′ ] coincide; see Exercise 116, p. 240. Hence, thanks to Exercise 140, p. 357 (♦), that gives Z Z1 Z1 nt + sk t Kω = dt ds det D 7→ s mt + sk′ [s7→σs ] 0 0 (st ) Z1 Z1 n k = dt ds det m k′ 0 0
SOLUTIONS TO EXERCISES
505
nk′ − mk.
= Therefore,
Periods(K ω ↾ comp(ℓn,m )) = {nk′ − mk  k, k′ ∈ Z}. Note that on the component of the constant loop ℓ0,0 , the periods of K ω vanish, which means that K ω ↾ comp(ℓ0,0 ) is exact. Also note that, for (n, m) ̸= (0, 0), Periods(K ω ↾ comp(ℓn,m )) = gcd(n, m) Z. Remark finally that, since T2 is a group, the connected components of Loops(T2 ) form a group for the pointwise addition. For all (n, m) ∈ Z2 , the map ϕn,m : ℓ 7→ ℓ + ℓn,m , defined on the connected component of the constant loop ℓ0,0 , is a diffeomorphism from comp(ℓ0,0 ) to comp(ℓn,m ), mapping ℓ0,0 to ℓn,m . The computation of the periods shows that ϕn,m is not an automorphism of K ω.
✑ Exercise 142, p. 368 (Compact supported real functions, I). Let us first remark that the definition of ω(P) r (δ r, δ′ r) makes sense. Since, by definition of the compact diffeology, for any r0 , there exist an open neighborhood V ⊂ U and a compact K of R such that P(r) and P(r0 ) coincide outside K, the derivatives ∂ ∂ P(r)(t) ∂ P(r)(t) ′ (δ r), and t 7→ (δ r) ∂r ∂t ∂r are compact supported real functions, with their supports in K. t 7→
1) Note that ω(P) r is antisymmetric. Indeed, Z +∞ ∂ ∂ P(r)(t) ∂ P(r)(t) ′ ′ ω(P) r (δ r, δ r) = (δ r) (δ r) d t ∂r ∂t ∂r −∞ Z +∞ ∂ P(r)(t) ′ ∂ ∂ P(r)(t) (δ r) (δ r) d t = ∂t ∂r ∂r −∞ Z +∞ ∂ ∂ P(r)(t) ∂ P(r)(t) ′ = (δ r) (δ r) d t ∂t ∂r ∂r −∞ Z +∞ ∂ P(r)(t) ∂ ∂ P(r)(t) ′ − (δ r) (δ r) d t ∂r ∂t ∂r −∞ Z +∞ ∂ ∂ P(r)(t) ′ ∂ P(r)(t) = 0− (δ r) (δ r) d t ∂ r ∂t ∂r −∞ =
−ω(P) r (δ′ r, δ r).
Now, let F : V → U be a smooth mparametrization. Let s ∈ V, δs, δ′ s ∈ Rm , let us denote r = F(s), δ r = D(F)s (δs) and δ′ r = D(F)s (δ′ s). We have Z +∞ ∂ ∂ P(F(s))(t) ∂ P(F(s))(t) ′ ′ ω(P ◦ F)s (δs, δ s) = (δs) (δ s) d t ∂s ∂t ∂s −∞
506
SOLUTIONS TO EXERCISES
=
Z
+∞
−∞ +∞
=
Z
−∞
=
∂ ∂ P(r)(t) ∂r ∂ P(r)(t) ∂ r ′ (δs) (δ s) d t ∂r ∂t ∂s ∂r ∂s ∂ ∂ P(r)(t) ∂ P(r)(t) ′ (δ r) (δ r) d t ∂r ∂t ∂r
F∗ (ω(P))s (δs, δ′ s).
Thus, ω satisfies the conditions to be a differential 2form on X. 2) Denoting s 1 0 ′ r = ′ , δr = , δr= , and P(r) = s f + s′ g, s 0 1 we get: ∂ ∂ ∂ ∂ P(r)(t) ′ (δ r) = s f (t) + s g(t) = f˙(t), ∂r ∂t ∂s ∂ t ∂ P(r)(t) ′ ∂ (δ r) = ′ s f (t) + s′ g(t) = g(t). ∂r ∂s Then, Z +∞ s 1 0 ′ ¯ ( f , g). ω 7→ s f + s g = f˙(t)g(t) d t = ω s s′ ( s′ ) 0 1 −∞ 3) Let u ∈ X and P be a plot of X. Using the notation above, we have Tu∗ (ω)(P) r (δ r, δ′ r)
and since
=
ω(Tu ◦ P) r (δ r, δ′ r)
=
ω(r 7→ P(r) + u) r (δ r, δ′ r),
∂ P(r) ∂ P(r) + u = , ∂r ∂r
we get ω(r 7→ P(r) + u) r (δ r, δ′ r) = ω(r 7→ P(r)) r (δ r, δ′ r), that is, Tu∗ (ω) = ω. 4) The space X is contractible. Indeed, the map s 7→ s f , s ∈ R, is a (smooth) deformation retraction connecting the constant map f 7→ 0 to 1X . Thus, X is nullhomotopic. Then, since the holonomy group is a homomorphic image of π1 (X) (art. 9.7, item 2), we get Γ = {0}. 5) Since Γ vanishes, the path moment map Ψ (p), for a path p connecting f to g, depends only on the ends f and g, we can chose the path p : s 7→ sg + (1 − s) f . Let F be a plot of G, that is, a plot of X. The definition (art. 9.2, (♥)) gives then Z 1 s 1 0 Ψ (p)(F) r (δ r) = ω 7→ TF(u) (p(s + t)) dt u 0 δ r s=0 0 ( u=r )
SOLUTIONS TO EXERCISES
=
Z
1
0
ω
507
s 7→ p(s + t) + F(u) u
s=0 ( u=r )
1 0 d t. 0 δr
Let us introduce x=
s 0 1 0 , x0 = , δ x0 = , and δ′ x 0 = . r r 0 δr
Then, the integrand I in the above formula rewrites s 1 0 I = ω 7→ p(s + t) + F(u) u 0 δr s=0 ( u=r ) = ω [x 7→ p(s + t) + F(u)] x 0 (δ x 0 , δ′ x 0 ) Z +∞ § ∂ ˙(u)(τ ) (s + t)˙ g (τ ) + (1 − s − t) f˙(τ ) + F δ x0 = ∂ x x=x 0 −∞ ª ∂ (s + t)g(τ ) + (1 − s − t) f (τ ) + F(u)(τ ) δ′ x 0 d τ × ∂x x=x 0 Z +∞ § ∂ ˙(r) = (s + t)˙ g + (1 − s − t) f˙ + F ∂ s s=0 −∞ ª ∂ t g(τ ) + (1 − t) f (τ ) + F(r)(τ ) δ r d τ × ∂r Z +∞ § ª ∂ F(r)(τ ) ˙ = g˙ (τ ) − f (τ ) δr d τ. ∂r −∞ We get finally
Ψ (p)(F) r (δ r)
= =
Z 1 Z
+∞ §
ª ∂ F(r)(τ ) δr d τ d t g˙ (τ ) − f˙(τ ) ∂r 0 −∞ Z +∞ § ª ∂ F(r)(τ ) g˙ (τ ) − f˙(τ ) δr d τ. ∂r −∞
✑
Exercise 143, p. 372 (Compact supported real functions, II). Let ψ be the 2points moment map associated with the action of G. 1) Thanks to Exercise 142, p. 368, it is clear that
ψ( f , g) = µ(g) − µ( f ), with µ( f )(F) r (δ r) =
Z
+∞
−∞
∂ F(r)(t) f˙(t) δ r d t, ∂r
where F is a plot of G, that is, a plot of X. We have just to check that µ( f ) is an element of G ∗ , that is, invariant by G. Let u ∈ X, we have Tu∗ (µ( f ))(F) r (δ r)
=
µ(Tu ◦ F) r (δ r)
=
µ(r 7→ F(r) + u) r (δ r)
508
SOLUTIONS TO EXERCISES
=
Z
+∞
−∞ +∞
=
Z
−∞
=
∂ [F(r)(t) + u(t)] f˙(t) δr d t ∂r ∂ F(r)(t) f˙(t) δr d t ∂t
µ( f )(F) r (δ r).
Thus, µ is indeed a primitive of ψ. 2) Thanks to (art. 9.10, item 3), modulo a coboundary, a Souriau cocycle is given by θ(u) = ψ( f0 , Tu ( f0 )), where f0 is element of X. We can choose f0 = 0, which gives θ(u) = ψ(0, Tu (0)) = ψ(0, u) = µ(u) − µ(0) = µ(u). Thus, θ = µ. Now, a coboundary is defined by ∆c = [u 7→ Ad∗ (u)(c) − c]. But G is Abelian, thus Ad = 1G , hence there is no nontrivial coboundary except 0. Therefore, since µ ̸= 0, θ is not trivial.
✑
Exercise 144, p. 385 (Compact supported real functions, III). First of all the moment map µ computed in Exercise 143, p. 372, is injective. Indeed, since µ is linear we have just to solve the equation µ( f ) = 0, that is, Z +∞ ∂ F(r)(t) 0= f˙(t) δr d t ∂r −∞ for all nplots F : U → X, n ∈ N, for all r ∈ U and all δ r ∈ Rn . Let us choose F(r) = r g, with g ∈ X, r ∈ R, and δ r = 1. Then, Z +∞ f˙(t)g(t) d t, for all g ∈ X. 0= −∞
Thanks to the fundamental lemma of variational calculus, since f is smooth, f˙ = 0, that is, f = cst. But f is compact supported, then f = 0. Hence, µ is injective. Now, X is obviously the quotient of itself by u 7→ Tu (0) = u. Therefore, (X, ω) is a symplectic homogeneous space.
✑ Exercise 145, p. 394 (The classical moment map). Let Ψ be the paths moment
map of G on (M, ω). For all p ∈ Paths(M), Ψ (p) is a 1form on G. Thus, Ψ (p) is characterized by its values on the 1plots F : t 7→ g t (art. 6.37). But since Ψ (p) is a leftinvariant 1form, Ψ (p) is characterized by its values on the 1plots pointed at 1G , that is, F(0) = 1G . Next, since G is a Lie group, every path F, pointed at 1G , is tangent to a homomorphism, thus we can assume that F ∈ Hom∞ (R, G), and then F(t) = exp(tZ), with Z ∈ T1G (G). According to (art. 9.20), since for t = 0 and δ t = 1, −1 ∂ F(t)(p(s)) δ p(s) = [D(F(0))(p(s))] (1) = ZM (p(s)), ∂t t=0
SOLUTIONS TO EXERCISES
509
we get
Ψ (p)(F)0 (1) =
Z
1
ω p(s) (˙p(s), ZM (p(s))) ds.
0
Now, let us assume that the action of G is Hamiltonian, that is, Ψ (p)(F)0 (1) = µ(m′ )(F)0 (1) − µ(m)(F)0 (1), with m′ = p(1) and m = p(0). With our notation, that gives Ψ (p)(F)0 (1) = µZ (m′ ) − µZ (m). Let us apply this computation to the path ps (t) = p(st). After a change of variable, we get Zs
µZ (ms ) =
ω p(t) (˙p(t), ZM (p(t))) d t + µZ (m)
0
with ms = p(s). The derivative of this identity, with respect to s, for s = 0, gives then ∂ µZ (ms ) = ω(δm, ZM (m)), with δm = ˙p(m). ∂ s s=0 Therefore, with obvious notation, µZ is the solution of the differential equation ω(ZM , ·) = −d[µZ ](·), that is, iZM (ω) = −d µZ . Finally, decomposing Z in a basis PN PN {ξ i }Ni=1 of the tangent space T1G (G), Z = i=1 Z i ξ i , gives µZ (m) = i=1 Z i µi (m), ¯ (m) : Z 7→ µZ (m) belongs to the dual [T1G (G)]∗ , which is where µi = µξ i . Then, µ identified with the space of momenta G ∗ . We find again, that way, the classical ¯ : M → [T1G (G)]∗ , [Sou70]. definition of the moment map µ
✑ Exercise 146, p. 394 (The cylinder and SL(2, R)). First of all, let X and X
′
be two vectors of R and M ∈ SL(2, R), ω(MX, MX ) = det(M)ω(X, X ) = ω(X, X ), thus SL(2, R) preserves ω. Let us next check that SL(2, R) is transitive on R2 − {0}. Let X = (x, y) ̸= (0, 0). If x ̸= 0 or y ̸= 0, then x x−1 x 1 1 x y or M= ∈ SL(2, R), and M = . y 1+x y 0 y y 1 ′
2
′
′
Hence, SL(2, R) is transitive. Now, since R2 is simply connected, the action of SL(2, R) is Hamiltonian (art. 9.7), and since this action has a fixed point, it is exact (art. 9.10, Note 2). Consider now the path γX , connecting 0 to X, and the 1plot Fσ : s 7→ esσ , with σ ∈ sl(2, R). The application of (art. 9.20, (♦)) gives Z1 Z1 Ψ (γX )(Fσ )0 (1) = ω(˙ γX (t), δγX (t)) d t = ω(X, t σ X) d t = 1 ω(X, σ X), 2 0 0 thanks to (art. 9.20, (♥)), and to ∂ esσ (γX (t)) δγX (t) = (1) = t σ X. ∂s s=0 And we deduce the expression of the moment map µ, the constant is fixed with µ(0) = 0. It is not difficult then to check that the preimages of µM are the pairs ±X. Actually, the image of µM is a 1sheet hyperboloid in R3 ≃ sl(2, R).
510
SOLUTIONS TO EXERCISES
✑ Exercise 147, p. 420 (The moment of imprimitivity). First of all let us check the
variance of Taut by the action of C ∞ (X, R). Let f be a smooth real function defined on X, and let us denote by Q × P a plot of X × Ω1 (X). We have f¯∗ (Taut)(P × Q) r = Taut( f¯ ◦(Q×P)) r = (P(r)− d f )(Q) r = P(r)(Q) r − d f (Q) r = Taut(Q×P) r − d f (pr1 ◦ (Q × P)) r = Taut(Q × P) r − pr∗1 (d f )(Q × P) r . Thus, f¯∗ (Taut) = Taut − pr∗1 (d f ).
Now let us check that this action is compatible with the value relation. Let (x, α) and (x ′ , α′ ) be two elements of X × Ω1 (X) such that value(α)(x) = value(α′ )(x ′ ), that is, x = x ′ and, for every plot Q of X centered at x, α(Q)0 = α′ (Q)0 . Then, (α − d f )(Q)0 = (α′ − d f )(Q)0 and value(α − d f )(x) = value(α)(x) − value(d f )(x), or (α − d f )(x) = α(x) − d f (x). Thus, the action of C ∞ (X, R) projects on T∗ X as the action f¯ : (x, a) 7→ a − d f (x). Now, since f¯∗ (Taut) = Taut − pr∗1 (d f ), clearly f¯∗ (Liouv) = Liouv − π ∗ (d f ). Put differently, f¯∗ (Liouv) = Liouv − dF( f ) with F ∈ C ∞ (C ∞ (X, R), C ∞ (T∗ X, R)) and F( f ) = π ∗ ( f ) = f ◦ π . Let us denote by R(x, a) the orbit map f 7→ a − d f (x). Let p be a path in T∗ X such that p(0) = (x 0 , a0 ) and p(1) = (x 1 , a1 ). By definition, for ω = dLiouv, Ψ (p) = ˆp∗ (K ω) = ˆp∗ (K dLiouv). Now, applying the property of the ChainHomotopy ˆ∗ − 0 ˆ∗ , we get operator K ◦ d + d ◦ K = 1
Ψ (p)
=
ˆp∗ (K dLiouv)
=
ˆ∗ (Liouv) − 0 ˆ∗ (Liouv) − dK Liouv) ˆp∗ (1
=
ˆ ◦ ˆp)∗ (Liouv) − (0 ˆ ◦ ˆp)∗ (Liouv) − d[(K Liouv) ◦ ˆp] (1
=
R(x 1 , a1 )∗ (Liouv) − R(x 0 , a0 )∗ (Liouv) − d[ f 7→ K Liouv(ˆp( f ))].
Let us consider first the term [ f 7→ K Liouv(ˆp( f ))]. Let p(t) = (x t , a t ), then ˆp( f ) = [t 7→ (x t , a t − d f (x t ))]. Thus, Z1 Z1 K Liouv(ˆp( f )))
=
=
a t [s 7→ x s ]s=t d t −
0 Z1
d f [t 7→ x t ] d t
0
a t [s 7→ x s ]s=t d t − [ f (x 1 ) − f (x 0 )].
0
Hence, ¨ d[ f 7→ K Liouv(ˆp( f ))]
=
d
Z
1
f 7→
« a t [s 7→ x s ]s=t d t − [ f (x 1 ) − f (x 0 )]
0
=
−d[ f 7→ f (x 1 ) − f (x 0 )].
Let us compute R(x, a)∗ (Liouv), for (x, a) in T∗ X. Let P : U → C ∞ (X, R) be a plot, we have R(x, a)∗ (Liouv)(P) = Liouv(R(x, a) ◦ P) = Liouv(r 7→ P(r)(x, a)) = Liouv(r 7→ a + d[P(r)](x)) = (a + d[P(r)](x))(r 7→ x). = 0.
SOLUTIONS TO EXERCISES
511
The last equality happens because the 1form a + d[P(r)](x) is evaluated on the constant plot r 7→ x, and every form evaluated on a constant plot vanishes. We get finally Ψ (p) = d[ f 7→ f (x 1 )] − d[ f 7→ f (x 0 )]. Now, clearly, Ψ (p) = ψ(p(0), p(1)), with p(0) = (x 0 , a0 ) and p(1) = (x 1 , a1 ). Then, the action of C ∞ (X, R) is Hamiltonian, Γ = {0}, and for the 2points moment map, we have ψ((x 0 , a0 ), (x 1 , a1 )) = µ(x 1 , a1 ) − µ(x 0 , a0 ), with
µ : (x, a) 7→ d[ f 7→ f (x)]. Noting δ x the real function f 7→ f (x), µ(x, a) = d δ x . Let us now check the invariance of µ. Note that, for every h ∈ C ∞ (X, R), δ x ◦ L(h) = [ f 7→ f (x) + h(x)]. Thus, for all h ∈ C ∞ (X, R), ˆh∗ (µ)(x, a) = ˆh∗ (d δ x ) = d(δ x ◦ L(h)) = d[ f 7→ f (x) + h(x)] = d[ f 7→ f (x)] = d δ x = µ(x, a). Hence, µ is invariant, and it is a primitive of the 2points moment map ψ. Therefore, the Souriau class of the action of C ∞ (X, R) on T∗ X vanishes.
Afterword I was once a student of JeanMarie Souriau, working on my doctoral dissertation, 18 when he introduced « diffeologies ». I remember well, we used to meet for a seminar at that time — the early 1980s — every Tuesday, at the Center for Theoretical Physics, on the Luminy campus in Marseille. JeanMarie was trying to generalize his quantization procedure to a certain type of coadjoint orbits of infinite dimensional diffeomorphism groups. He wanted to regard these groups of diffeomorphisms as Lie groups, like everybody else, but he also wanted to avoid topological finesses, considering that they were not essential for this purpose. He then invented a lighter « differentiable » structure that he called « diffeologies » on groups of diffeomorphisms. These groups quickly became autonomous objects. Finally, he abandoned groups of diffeomorphisms for abstract groups with an abstract differential structure. He called them « groupes différentiels », this was the first name for the future diffeological groups. Differential spaces was born. Listening to JeanMarie talking about his differential groups, It was clear that the axiomatics of differential groups, should be extended to any set, not only to groups, and I remember a particularly hot discussion on this question in the cafeteria of the Luminy campus. It was during a break in our seminar. We were there: JMS (as we called him), Jimmy Elhadad, Christian Duval, Paul Donato, HenryHugues Fliche, Roland Triay, and myself. Souriau insisted on not considering anything other than differential groups or their orbits. (Souriau was really obsessed by groups), and I was thinking that it was time to generalize diffeologies to any sets. But at that moment, I was working on the classification of SO(3)symplectic manifolds which had nothing to do with diffeology, and I had no time for anything else. A few weeks later, he presented the general theory of « espaces différentiels » as he called it. I must say that at the time, this theory seemed to us, his students, as a curiosity, but so general that we saw no real stake in it, except a certain intellectual satisfaction... We were doubtful. I decided to forget differential spaces and stay focused on « real maths », sympletic manifolds. I went to Moscow, spent a year there, and came back with a complete classification in dimension 4 and 18I am talking about the state doctorate. This was before the standardization on the American PhD model. 513
514
AFTERWORD
some general results in any dimension. This work represented for me a probable doctoral thesis. It was the first global classification theorem in symplectic geometry after the homogeneous case, the KirillovKostantSouriau theorem, which states that any homogeneous symplectic manifold by a Lie group is a covering of some coadjoint orbit. But JeanMarie did not pay much attention to my work, absorbed as he was by his « diffeologies ». I was really disappointed, I thought that this work deserved to become my doctorate. At the same time, Paul Donato gave a general construction of the universal covering for any quotient of « differential groups », that is, the universal covering of any homogeneous « differential space ». This construction became his doctoral thesis. I then decided to abandon, for a while, symplectic geometry and to be more interested in differential spaces, since it was the only subject that JMS could, or wanted, to talk about at that time. The coming of the irrational torus. It was the year 1983, we were participating in a conference on symplectic geometry, in Lyon, when we decided, together with Paul, to test diffeology on the irrational torus, the quotient of the 2torus by an irrational line. This quotient is not a manifold but remains a diffeological space, moreover a diffeological group. We decided to call it Tα , where α is the slope of the line. The interest for this example came, of course, from the DenjoyPoincaré flow that we have heard so much about during this conference. What had diffeology to say about this group, for which topology is completely silent? We used the techniques worked out by Paul and computed its fundamental group, we found Z+αZ ⊂ R. The real line R itself appeared as the universal covering of Tα . I remember how we were excited by this computation, as we didn’t believe really in the capabilities of diffeology for saying anything serious about such « singular » spaces or groups. Don’t forget that diffeologies had been introduced for studying infinite dimensional groups and not singular quotients. We continued to explore this group and discovered that, as diffeological space, Tα is characterized by α, up to a conjugation by GL(2, Z), and we found that the components of the group of diffeomorphisms of Tα distinguish the cases where α is quadratic or not. It became clear that diffeology was not such a trivial theory and deserved to be developed further. At the same time, Alain Connes introduced the first elements of noncommutative geometry and applied them to the irrational flow on the torus — our favorite example — and his techniques didn’t give anything more (and at this moment, less) than the diffeological approach, which we considered more in the spirit of differential geometry. We were well placed to know the application of Connes’ theory of irrational flows because he had many fans, at the Center for Theoretical Physics at the time, who developed his ideas. Eventually, this example convinced me that diffeology was a good tool, not as weak as it seemed. And I decided to continue exploring this path. The result of the computation of the fundamental group of Tα made me think that everything
AFTERWORD
515
was as if the irrational flow was a true fibration of the 2torus: the fiber R being contractible the homotopy of the quotient Tα had to be the same as the total space T2 , and one should avoid Paul’s group specific techniques to get it. But, of course, Tα being topologically trivial it could not be an ordinary locally trivial fibration. I decided to investigate this question and, finally, together with a higher homotopy theory, I gave a definition of diffeological fiber bundles, which are not locally trivial, but locally trivial along the plots — the smooth parametrizations defining the diffeology. It showed two important things for me: The first one was that the quotient of a diffeological group by any subgroup is a diffeological fibration, and thus T2 → Tα . The second point was that diffeological fibrations satisfy the exact homotopy sequence. I clarified in passing the relation between diffeology and topology by introducing the Dtopology, since this was clearly a question raised by these new definitions. I was done, I understood why the homotopy of Tα , computed with direct techniques elaborated by Paul, gave the homotopy of T2 , because of the exact homotopy sequence. I spent one year on this work, and I returned to JeanMarie with that and some examples. He agreed to listen to me and decided that it could be my dissertation. I defended it in November 1985, and since then I have become completely involved in the adventure of diffeology. Differential, differentiable, or diffeological spaces? The choice of the formula « differential spaces » or « differential groups » was not very happy, because « differential » was already used in math and had a certain usage, especially « differential groups » which are groups with a derivation operation. This was often pointed out to us. I remember that Daniel Kastler insisted that JMS change this name. From time to time we tried to find something else, without success. Finally, it was during Paul’s thesis defense, if I remember correctly, that Van Est suggested the word « diffeological » as « topological » to replace « differential ». We agreed and decided to use it, « differential spaces » became « diffeological spaces ». There was a damper, however, « différentiel » as well as « topologique » have four spoken syllables when « difféologique » has five. Anyway, I used and abused this new name, and some colleagues made fun of me. One of them once told me: Your « dix fées au logis ». . . For a long time then these ten fairies at home pursued me. Later, Daniel Bennequin pointed out to me that KuoTsai Chen, in his work, Iterated path integrals [Che77] in the 1970s, defined « differentiable spaces » which looked a lot like « diffeological spaces ». I went to the library, read Chen’s paper and drew the quick (but unfounded) conclusion that our « diffeological spaces » were just equivalent to Chen’s « differentiable spaces », with a slight difference in the definition. I was very disappointed, I was working on a subject I thought completely new and it appeared to be known and already worked out. I decided to drop « diffeology » for « differentiable » and to give credit to Chen, but my attempt
516
AFTERWORD
to use Chen’s vocabulary failed — the word « diffeology » had already entered the practice, having helped popularize it myself. However, it is worth noting that, although the axiomatics of Chen and Souriau are similar, Souriau’s choice is better suited from the point of view of geometry. The definition of the plots on open domains, rather than on standard simplices or convex subsets, radically changes the scope of the theory. Last word? I would add some words about the use or misuse of diffeology. Some colleagues were skeptical about diffeology, and told me that they are waiting for diffeology to prove something great. Well, I don’t know any theory proving anything, but I know mathematicians proving theorems. Let me put it differently: number theory doesn’t prove any theorem, mathematicians solve problems raised by number theory. A theory is just a framework to express questions and pose problems, it is a playground. The solutions of these problems depend on the skill of the mathematicians who are interested in them. As a framework for formulating questions in differential geometry, I think diffeology is a very good one, it offers good tools, simple axioms, simple vocabulary, simple but rich objects, it is a stable category, and it opens a wide field of research. Now, I understand my colleagues, there are so many attempts to extend the usual category of differential geometry, and so many expectations, that it is legitimate to be doubtful. Nevertheless, I think that we now have enough convincing examples, simple or more elaborate, for which diffeology brings concrete and formal results. And this is an encouragement to persist on this path, to develop new diffeological tools, and perhaps to prove some day, some great theorem :). Jerusalem 2011 (revised 2022). When I started this book, JeanMarie Souriau was still alive. He frequently asked me about my progress. He was eager to know if people were buying into his theory, and he was happy when I could tell him sometimes that, yes, some people in Tel Aviv or Texas had mentioned it in a paper or discussed it on an Internet forum. Today, as I finish this book and write the last sentences, JeanMarie is no longer with us. He will not see the book published and finished. It is sad, diffeology was his last program, in which he had high expectations concerning geometric quantization. I don’t know if diffeology will live up to his expectations, but I am sure that it is now a mature theory, and I dedicate this book to his memory. Whether it is the right framework for carrying out Souriau’s quantization program remains an open question. Aixenprovence 2012.
Notation and Vocabulary Diffeology and diffeological spaces R The real numbers. N The natural integers. × The product of sets or the product of a number by something. def( f ) The set of definition of the map f . val( f ) The values of the map f . Maps(X, Y) The maps from X to Y. 1X The identity map of X. ndomain A (nonempty) open set of the vector space Rn . domain An arbitrary ndomain, for some n. Domains(Rn ) The domains of Rn . Domains The domains of the Rn , n running over N. P(E) The powerset of the set E, that is, the set of all the subsets of the set E. dim(U) The dimension of the domain U, that is, if U ⊂ Rn , dim(U) = n. Parametrization Any map defined from a domain to some set. Param(X) The parametrizations of a set X. Param(U, X) The parametrizations of a set X defined on a domain U. x A bold lower case letter, a constant map (here with value x). ∂r For any smooth map F : s 7→ r between real domains, D(F)(s) or D(F)s or ∂s the tangent linear map of F at the point s. prk From a product, the projection on the kth factor. D Refers to a diffeology. D1, D2, D3 Refers to the three axioms of diffeology. D(U, X) The plots, defined on U, of the space X. D(X, X′ ) or C ∞ (X, X′ ) The smooth maps from X to X′ . 517
518
NOTATION AND VOCABULARY
Diff(X, X′ ) {Set}, {Diffeology} etc. D◦ (X) X◦ D• (X) X• f ∗ (D ′ ) ` i∈I X i class(x) f (D) Q ∗ i∈I X i Paths(X) Pathsk (X)
δx 〈F 〉 Nebula(F ) dim(X) Gen(X)
∞ Cloc (X, X′ ) Diffloc (X, X′ ) =loc germ Dopen dim x (X)
L∞ (E, E′ ) H , HR , HC X·Y
The diffeomorphisms from X to X′ . Names of categories. The discrete diffeology of X. X equipped with the discrete diffeology. The coarse diffeology of X. X equipped with the coarse diffeology. The pullback of the diffeology D ′ by f . The sum (coproduct) of diffeological spaces. The equivalence class of x. The pushforward of the diffeology D by f . The product of diffeological spaces. The space of paths in X, that is, C ∞ (R, X). The space of iterated kpaths in X, that is, C ∞ (R, Pathsk−1 (X)). Any vector of Rn , when x is a generic point in an ndomain. The diffeology generated by a family F of parametrizations. The nebula of the family of parametrizations F . The global dimension of X, for a diffeological space. The generating families of the diffeology of X. Locality and diffeologies The locally smooth maps from X to X′ . The local diffeomorphisms from X to X′ . Is equal/coincides locally. The germ of a map. Open for the Dtopology. The pointwise dimension of X at x. Diffeological vector spaces The smooth linear maps from E to E′ . The standard Hilbert space, on R, on C. The scalar or Hermitian product.
Modeling spaces, manifolds, etc. SR , SC The infinite Hilbert sphere, in HR or HC . P , PC The infinite projective space. Hn , Kn The half nspace or the ncorner.
NOTATION AND VOCABULARY
519
Homotopy of diffeological spaces ˆ ˆ 0(γ ), 1(γ ), ends(γ ) Starting point, ending point, and ends of a path γ . Paths(X, A, B) The paths in X, starting in A and ending in B. Loops(X) Loops in X. Loops(X, x), Loopsn (X, x) Loops and iterated loops in X, based at x. γ ∨ γ ′ Concatenation of paths. rev(γ ) The reverse path of γ . stPaths, stLoops Stationary paths, loops. γ ⋆ Smashed path, making it stationary. π0 (X), πk (X, x) The components of X and kthhomotopy groups based at x. πk (X, A, x) Relative homotopy pointedsets/groups. Π (X) The Poincaré groupoid of X.
E ∗ F or L(E, F) E∗ Vector — Covector ⊗, ∧ sgn(σ ) L∞ (E, F), E∗∞ M∗ (A) vol, volB Λk (E) Ωk (X)
Λkx (X) α(P) f ∗ (α) dα θ
δP, δσ , δc α⌋δσ iF £F Cub p (X), C p (X)
CartanDe Rham calculus The space of linear maps from E to F. Dual vector space E, that is, E ∗ R. An element of a vector space or its dual. Tensor product, exterior product. Signature of the permutation σ . Smooth linear maps, smooth dual. Pullback of a covariant tensor A by a linear map M. Volume, canonical volume of a basis B. The space of all klinear forms on a vector space E. The space of differentiable kforms on a diffeological space X. The space of the values of the kforms of X at the point x. The value of the differential form α on the plot P. The pullback of the differential form α by the smooth map f . The exterior derivative of the differential form α. The canonical 1form on R or on an irrational torus R/Γ . The variation of a plot P, a cube σ , a chain c. The contraction of a kform α by a variation of a cube σ , a differential (k − 1)form on def(σ ). The contraction by an arc of diffeomorphisms F. The Lie derivative by an arc of diffeomorphisms F. The smooth pcubes, pchains, in X.
520
NOTATION AND VOCABULARY
Z⋆ (X, ·), Z⋆ (X, ·) B⋆ (X, ·), B⋆ (X, ·) ⋆ H⋆ (X, ·), Z H (X, Z ·)
α,
σ
α
The integral of a differential form on a
c
Magma K L(γ ), R(γ )
Hom (G, G ) GAb R(x) or xˆ L(g), R(g) Ad(g) Coset G∗ Ad∗ , AdΓ∗ ,θ ∞
The cycles/cocycles groups with coefficients. The boundary/coboundary groups with coefficients. The homology/cohomology groups with coefficients.
′
src, trg, χ f ∗ (T) T ×G E or T ×ρ E Θ HorPaths(Y, Θ) TΓ R(X) Tα
Ψ , Ψω ψ, ψω µ, µω θ, θω σ , σω
cube/cubicchain. A set A equipped with an internal operation ⋆. The ChainHomotopy operator. Pre or postconcatenation by γ . Diffeological groups The smooth homomorphisms from G to G′ . The Abelianized group G/[G, G]. The orbit map from G to X. The left/right multiplication by g in G. The adjoint action of g on G, Ad(g)=L(g)◦R(g −1 ). The left or right orbits of a subgroup in a group. The space of momenta of a diffeological group G. The coadjoint action of g on G ∗ , on G ∗ /Γ with cocycle θ. Diffeological fiber bundles The source, target and characteristic maps on a groupoid. The pullback by f of the total space T of a projection. An associate bundle. A connection on a principal bundle. The horizontal paths in Y, for the connection Θ. A torus Rn /Γ , Γ discrete (diffeologically) and generator of Rn . The group of (R, +)principal bundles over X. The torus of periods of a closed form α. Symplectic diffeology The moment of paths, the index ω is for universal. The 2points moment map. A 1point moment map. The lack of equivariance of a moment map, a group cocycle in G ∗ /Γ . The Souriau class, the class of the cocycles θ, θω .
Index Abelianized, 271, 321, 367 Antiaction, 263 Antisymmetric, 157 Antisymmetrization, 160 Arc of plots, 210, 234 Arrow, 278 Atlas, 96, 98, 107, 119
Contractible, 110, 135, 136 Contraction differential form, 211 Contravariant tensor, 158 Coordinates, 85, 154, 165, 167, 173 Corner, 119 Corner orbifold, 407 Cotangent space, 198 Covariant tensor, 158 Covering, 314, 336 Cube, 176, 216 Cubic boundary, 223 Cubic chain, 214 Cubic coboundary, 225 Cubic cochain, 224, 225 Cubic cocycle, 225 Cubic cohomology, 225 Cubic cycle, 223 Cubic homology, 223 Curvature, 337
Base space, 276, 288 Basic differential form, 184, 319 Basis, 154 Bidual, 159 Bilinear map, 156 Bott cocycle, 414 Bundle, 196 Cartesian closed, 44 Centered plot, 77, 183, 186 Central extension, 414 ChainHomotopy operator, 250, 257, 364 Characteristic, 381, 391, 424 Characteristic class, 347 Characteristic map, 278 Chart, 96, 98, 106, 107, 119 Coadjoint orbit, 269, 412 Coboundary, 371 Component, 131, 160, 279 Concatenable paths, 126 Cone orbifold, 409 Connection, 328 Connection form, 337
Dcontinuity, 67 Dhomeomorphism, 67 Dopen, 67 Dtopology, 67 De Rham coboundary, 241 De Rham cocycle, 241 De Rham cohomology group, 241 De Rham homomorphism, 241, 324, 327 Deformation retraction, 137, 257 Degenerate, 221 Diffeological 1torus, 336 521
522
Diffeological fibration, 288 Diffeological group, 44, 260 Diffeological groupoid, 139, 281 Diffeological Lie group, 260 Diffeological manifold, 106 Diffeological space, 5 Diffeological subspace, 22 Diffeological vector space, 81 Diffeology, 5, 9 coarse diffeology, 13 diffeology image, 29 diffeology product, 40 discrete diffeology, 12 fine diffeology, 83 foliated diffeology, 27 group diffeology, 260 groupoid diffeology, 281 Klein diffeology, 28 manifold diffeology, 96 pullback diffeology, 17 pushforward diffeology, 29 smooth diffeology, 6 subset diffeology, 22 sum diffeology, 26 wire diffeology, 6 Diffeomorphism, 10, 44 Differential form, 178 Dimension, 58, 78 Discrete subspace, 24 Dlinear category, 82 Domain, 2 Dual vector space, 155 Effective action, 262 Embedding, 70 Ends map, 125 Equiaffine arc length, 193 Étale map, 66 Euclidean diffeological vector space, 89 Evaluation map, 42, 44
INDEX
Exact homotopy sequence, 312 Exact moment map, 370 Exterior derivative, 174 Exterior product, 162, 182 Fiber, 276, 277, 288 Fiber bundle, 288 Fibered product, 291 Fibrating groupoid, 282 Fine structure, 411 FineLinear category, 86 Fineness, 12 Finite topology, 89 Fixed ends homotopy, 129 Flow, 341 Frölicher space, 124 Free ends homotopy, 129 Frontier condition, 28 Functional diffeology, 42, 203, 285 Fundamental group, 140 Gprincipal fiber bundle, 296 Galoisian covering, 314, 322 Generating family, 50, 77 Generating group, 264 Germ, 65, 70, 77 Global plot, 5 Group center, 263 Group covering, 265 Group of automorphisms, 251 Group of flux, 378 Group of periods, 241, 350 Groupoid, 140, 278 Halfspace, 117 Hamiltonian, 364, 368 Hamiltonian diffeomorphism, 378 Hamiltonian space, 377 Heisenberg group, 402 Hermitian diffeological vector space, 90
INDEX
Higher homotopy group, 142 Higher relative homotopy group, 148 Holonomy, 367 Holonomy bundle, 333 Holonomy group, 333 Homogeneous, 264 Homogeneous symplectic space, 384 Homotopic paths, 130 Homotopy group, 140 Hopf fibration, 412 Horizontal lift, 329 Horizontal path, 329 HSpace, 142 Imprimitivity, 421 Induction, 19, 21 Infimum, 14 Inner/interior product, 162 Integral, 226 Integral of a smooth form, 176 Integration function, 323 Integration operator, 246 Intersection form, 403 Irrational torus, 10, 35, 298, 340 Isotropy, 278 Iterated space of paths, 46 Juxtaposable paths, 126 kPath, 46 Kernel, 279 Klein space, 28 Klein stratum, 28 Latice, 15 Lie derivative, 207 Linear pform, 161 Linear map, 154 Liouville form, 198 Local diffeomorphism, 66 Local family, 411
523
Local lift, 30 Local path, 328 Local smooth map, 64 Local subduction, 73 Locally trivial, 277 Loops bundle, 310 Magma, 253 Manifold, 96 Manifold with boundary, 119 Manifold with coners, 120 Maximum, 15 Minimum, 15 Mixed tensor, 159 Momemtum, momenta, 267 Monodromy, 334 Monodromy representation, 334 Monodromy theorem, 317 Morphism, 276, 278 Multilinear operator, 157 Natural, canonical projection, 34 Nebula, 56, 57 Orbifold, 121 Oriented manifold, 191 Parallel transport, 330 Parametrization, 2, 4 Partial derivative, 3 Path, 125 Paths 1cocycle, 347 Paths moment map, 364 pCube, 214 Permutation, 158 Plot, 5 Poincaré groupoid, 139 Pointwise pullback, 200 Pointwise pushforward, 200 Powerset diffeology, 76 Presymplectic, 422
524
Principal action, 292 Principal fiber bundle, 292 Principal fiber bundle structure groupoid, 292 Principal fibration, 292 Product, 291 Projection, 276, 288 Projective space, 412 Pullback, 17, 70, 181, 276, 290, 332 Pushforward, 29, 229 pvector bundle, 202 Quasifold, 121 Quotient diffeology, 35 Ray, 209 Reduced pchain, 221 Reduced holonomy group, 334 Reduction, 277 Relative homotopy group, 146 Restriction, 291 Retraction, 137 Retraction retract, 137 Section, 36, 277 Semicubic, 70, 102 Simply connected, 140 Sliding, 211 Smooh embedding, 70 Smooth pform, 171 Smooth action, 262 Smooth extension, 261 Smooth map, 9 Smooth retraction, 110 Smooth surjection, 276 Smooth tensor, 171 Source, 278 Souriau cocycle, 371, 418 Souriau cohomology class, 372 Space of momenta, 267 Space of paths, 46 Stationary path, 127
INDEX
Structure group, 121, 292, 301 Structure groupoid, 121, 301 Structure of fiber bundle, 301 Subbundle, 291 Subduction, 32 Subgroupoid, 278 Submanifold, 101 Supremum, 14 Symmetric, 157 Symmetrization, 160 Symplectic, 422, 424 Symplectic diffeological space, 384 symplectic reduction, 381 Tangent bundle, 202 Tangent linear map, 3 Target, 278 Tautological bundle, 328 Timedependent Hamiltonian, 379 Torus, 194 Torus of periods, 350 Total space, 276, 288 Transition map, 98 Transitive, 264 transitivity component, 279 Transposition, 158 Trivial groupoid, 283 Twisted cocycle, 270 2points moment map, 369 Tychonoff topology, 89 Unit, 278 Universal 2points moment map, 377 Universal covering, 318, 336 Universal moment map, 377 Universal paths moment map, 377 Universal Souriau class, 377 Universal Souriau cocycle, 377 Value of differential form, 186 Volume, 169, 192
Bibliography [Arn65] [Arn80] [BaHo09] [Ban78] [BaWe97] [BFBF09] [BeGo72] [BFW10] [Bom67] [Boo69] [Bou55] [Bou61] [Bou72] [Bou82] [BoCh67] [Bot78]
[BoGa07] [Bry93] [Car87] [Che77]
Vladimir I. Arnold, Small denominators, mapping of the circumference onto itself. Isvestja A.N. SSSR series math., vol. 25, 1965. Chapitres supplémentaires à la théorie des équations différentielles. MIR, Moscou, 1980. John Baez and Alexander Hoffnung, Convenient Categories of Smooth Spaces. Transactions of the American Mathematical Society, vol. 363(11), pp. 5789–5825, 2011. Augustin Banyaga, Sur la structure du groupe des difféomorphismes qui préservent une forme symplectique. Comment. Math. Helv., vol. 53, pp. 174–227, 1978. Sean Bates and Alan Weinstein, Lectures on the geometry of quantization. Berkeley Mathematics Lecture Notes, American Mathematical Society, Providence, RI, 1997. Daniel Bennequin, Ronit Fuchs, Alain Berthoz, Tamar Flash, Movement Timing and Invariance Arise from Several Geometries. PLoS Comput Biol., vol. 5(7), 2009. Marcel Berger and Bernard Gostiaux, Cours de géométrie. PUF, Armand Colin, Paris, 1972. Christian Blohmann, Marco C. B. Fernandes, and Alan Weinstein, Groupoid Symmetry And Constraints In General Relativity. Comm. in Contemporary Mathematics, vol. 15(1), 2013. Jan Boman, Differentiability of a function and of its compositions with functions of one variable. Mathematica Scandinavica, vol. 20, pp. 249–268, 1967. William M. Boothby, Transitivity of the automorphisms of certain geometric structures. Trans. Amer. Math. Soc., vol. 137, pp. 93–100, 1969. Nicolas Bourbaki, Espaces vectoriels topologiques. Eléments de mathématiques, Hermann, Paris, 1955. Topologie générale. Eléments de mathématiques, Hermann, Paris, 1961. Théorie des ensembles. Eléments de mathématiques, Hermann, Paris, 1972. Variétés différentielles et analytiques. Eléments de mathématiques, Diffusion CCLS, Paris, 1982. Zenon I. Borevitch and Igor R. Chafarevitch, Théorie des nombres. Monographies Internationales de mathématiques Modernes, GauthierVillars, Paris, 1967. Raoul Bott, On some formulas for the characteristic classes of group actions. Differential Topology, Foliations and GelfandFuchs Cohomology, Lect. Notes in Math. vol. 652, Springer Verlag, 1978. Charles P. Boyer and Krzysztof Galicki, Sasakian Geometry. Department of Mathematics and Statistics, University of New Mexico, Albuquerque, N.M. 87131, 2007. JeanLuc Brylinski, Loop spaces, characteristic classes and geometric quantization. Birkäuser, 1993. Pierre Cartier, Jacobiennes généralisées, monodromie unipotente et intégrales itérées. Séminaire Bourbaki – 40ème année, vol. 687, 1987–88. KuoTsai Chen, Iterated path integrals. Bull. of Am. Math. Soc., vol. 83(5), pp. 831–879, 1977.
525
526
[CW19] [Die70a] [Die70c] [Doc76] [Dnl99] [Don84] [Don88] [Don94] [DI83]
[DoIg85] [DIZ22] [DNF82] [EOM02] [Fro81] [FuRo81] [God40] [God64] [GuPo74] [GIZ19] [GIZ22] [Hai79] [Her79] [HoYo61] [Hu59] [Igl85] [Igl86] [Igl87]
BIBLIOGRAPHY
J. Daniel Christensen and Enxin Wu, Diffeological vector spaces. Pacific Journal of Mathematics, vol. 303(1), pp. 73–92, 2019. Jean Dieudonné, Eléments d’analyse. vol. I, GauthiersVillars, Paris, 1970. Eléments d’analyse. vol. III, GauthiersVillars, Paris, 1970. Manfred P. Do Carmo, Differential geometry of curves and surfaces. PrenticeHall Inc. Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey, 1976. Simon K. Donaldson, Moment maps and diffeomorphisms. Asian Journal of Math., vol. 3, pp. 1–16, 1999. Paul Donato, Revêtement et groupe fondamental des espaces différentiels homogènes. Thèse de doctorat d’état, Université de Provence, Marseille, 1984. Géométrie des orbites coadjointes des groupes de difféomorphismes. in proc. Lect. Notes in Math. vol. 1416 pp. 84–104 1988. Diff(S1 ) as coadjoint orbit in the Virasoro space of moments. Journal of Geometry and Physics, vol. 13, pp. 299–305, 1994. Paul Donato and Patrick Iglesias, Exemple de groupes différentiels : flots irrationnels sur le tore. Preprint CPT83/P.1524, Centre de Physique Théorique, Marseille, July 1983. http://math.huji.ac.il/~piz/documents/EDGDFISLT.pdf Exemple de groupes difféologiques : flots irrationnels sur le tore. C.R. Acad. Sci. Paris, vol. 301(4), 1985. Paul Donato and Patrick IglesiasZemmour, Every symplectic manifold is a (linear) coadjoint orbit. Canadian Mathematical Bulletin, vol. 65(2), pp. 345360, 2022. Boris Doubrovine, Serguei Novikov and Anatoli Fomenko, Géométrie contemporaine. MIR, Moscou, 1982. Encyclopedia of Mathematics. Springer Verlag, NewYork Heidelberg Berlin, 2002. Alfred Frölicher, Applications lisses entre espaces et variétés de Fréchet. C. R. Acad. Sc. vol. 293, Paris, 1981. Dimitry B. Fuchs and Vladimir A. Rohlin, Premier cours de topologie, Chapitres géométriques. MIR, Moscou, 1981. Kurt Gödel, The consistency of the axiom of choice and of the generalised continuumhypothesis with the axioms of set theory. Princeton University Press, Princeton–New Jersey, 1940. Roger Godement, Topologie algébrique et théorie des faisceaux. Hermann, Paris, 1964. Victor Guillemin and Alan Pollack, Differential topology. Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 1974. Serap Gürer and Patrick IglesiasZemmour, Differential forms on manifolds with boundary and corners. Indagationes Mathematicae, vol. 30(5), pp. 920–929, 2019. Orbifolds as stratified diffeologies. Preprint, 2022, http://math.huji.ac.il/~piz/documents/OASD.pdf Richard M. Hain, A characterization of smooth functions defined on a Banach Space. Proc. Amer. Math. Soc., vol. 77, pp. 63–67, 1979. Michael R. Hermann, Sur la conjugaison différentiable des difféomorphismes du cercle à des rotations. Publication mathématiques, I.H.E.S. Bures sur Yvette, 1979. John G. Hocking and Gail S. Young, Topology. Dover Publication, 1961. SzeTsen Hu, Homotopy Theory. Academic Press, NewYork, 1959. Patrick Iglesias, Fibrations difféologiques et homotopie. Thèse de doctorat d’État, Université de Provence, Marseille, 1985. Difféologie d’espace singulier et petits diviseurs. C.R. Acad. Sci. Paris, vol. 302, pp. 519–522, 1986. Connexions et difféologie. Aspects dynamiques et topologiques des groupes infinis de transformation de la mécanique, Hermann, Paris, vol. 25, pp. 61–78, 1987.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
[Igl87b]
527
Bicomplexe cohomologique des espaces différentiables. Preprint CPT87/P.2052, Marseille, France, 1987. http://math.huji.ac.il/~piz/documents/UCDCPLEDESRALCDDR.pdf Les SO(3)variétés symplectiques et leur classification en dimension 4. Bull. Soc. Math. [Igl91] France, vol. 119(4), pp. 371–396, 1991. [Igl95] La trilogie du Moment. Ann. Inst. Fourier, vol. 45, 1995. [Igl98] Les origines du calcul symplectique chez Lagrange. L’Enseignement Mathématique, vol. 44, pp. 257–277, 1998. [PIZ10] Patrick IglesiasZemmour, The Moment Maps in Diffeology. Memoirs of the American Mathematical Society, vol. 972, 2010. [PIZ15] Example of singular reduction in symplectic diffeology. Proceedings of the American Mathematical Society, vol. 144(3), pp. 1309–1324, 2016. Every symplectic manifold is a coadjoint orbit. In Frontiers of Fundamental Physics 14 [PIZ16] (FFP14) – Mathematical Physics, (224), pp. 1–17, 2016. DOI: https://doi.org/10.22323/1.224.0141 [PIZ19] Refraction and reflexion according to the principle of general covariance. Journal of Geometry and Physics, vol. 142, pp. 1–8, 2019. [PIZ21a] An Introduction to Diffeology. In New Spaces in Mathematics: Formal and Conceptual Reflections, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, pp. 31–82, 2021. ˇechdeRham Bicomplex in Diffeology. Israeli Journal of Mathematics, (To appear), [PIZ21b] C 2021. http://math.huji.ac.il/~piz/documents/CDRBCID.pdf Klein Stratification of Diffeological Spaces. Blog post February 2022. [PIZ22a] http://math.huji.ac.il/~piz/documents/DBlogRmkKSODS.pdf [PIZ22b] The diffeomorphisms of the space of geodesics of the 2torus. Blog post March 2022. math.huji.ac.il/~piz/documents/DBlogRmkDOGT2.pdf [PIZ22c] Smooth embeddings and smoothly embedded subsets. Blog post July 2022. http://math.huji.ac.il/~piz/documents/DBlogRmkKSODS.pdf [IgLa90] Patrick Iglesias and Gilles Lachaud, Espaces différentiables singuliers et corps de nombres algébriques. Ann. Inst. Fourier, Grenoble, vol. 40(1), pp. 723–737, 1990. [IKZ10] Patrick Iglesias, Yael Karshon and Moshe Zadka, Orbifolds as diffeologies. Trans. Am. Math. Soc., vol. 362(6), pp. 2811–2831, 2010. [IZK12] Patrick IglesiasZemmour and Yael Karshon, Smooth Lie groups actions are diffeological subgroups. Proc. Am. Math. Soc., vol. 140(6), pp. 731–739, 2012. [IZL18] Patrick IglesiasZemmour and JeanPierre Laffineur, Noncommutative geometry and diffeology: The case of orbifolds. J. Noncommut. Geom., vol. 12(4), pp. 1551–1572, 2018. [IZP21] Patrick IglesiasZemmour and Elisa Prato, Quasifolds, diffeology and noncommutative geometry. J. Noncommut. Geom., vol. 15(2), pp. 735–759. 2021. [Iva99] Gheorghe Ivan, Strong morphisms of groupoids. Balkan Journal of Geometry and its Applications, vol. 4(1), pp. 91–102, 1999. [Jor82] Henri Joris, Une application C ∞ nonimmersive qui possède la propriété universelle des immersions. Arch. Math., vol. 39, pp. 269–277, 1982. [Kak43] Shizuo Kakutani, Topological properties of the unit sphere of a Hilbert space. Proc. Imp. Acad. Tokyo, vol. 19, pp. 269–271, 1943. [KaMe85] Mikhail I. Kargapolov and Iuri I. Merzliakov, Elements de la théorie des groupes. MIR, Moscou, 1985. [KMW22] Yael Karshon David Miyamoto and Jordan Watts, Diffeological submanifolds and their friends. (Preprint), 2022. https://arxiv.org/pdf/2204.10381.pdf
528
BIBLIOGRAPHY
[KaMi22] Yael Karshon and David Miyamoto, Quasifold groupoids and diffeological quasifolds. Preprint ArXiv, 2022. https://arxiv.org/pdf/2206.14776.pdf [Kir76] Alexandre A. Kirillov, Elements of the theory of representations. Berlin, Springer Verlag, 1976. [Kle74] Felix Klein, Le programme d’Erlangen. Discours de la méthode, GauthierVillars, Paris, 1974. [KoNo63] Shoshichi Kobayashi and Katsumi Nomizu, Foundations of differential geometry. Interscience Publishers, 1963. [YKS10] Yvette KosmannSchwarzbach, The Noether Theorems. Sources and Studies in the History of Mathematics and Physical Sciences, Springer Verlag, 2010. [Kos70] Bertram Kostant, Orbits and quantization theory. in proc. International Congress of Mathematicians, 19701971. [Lee06] John M. Lee, Introduction to Smooth Manifolds. Graduate Texts in Mathematics, Springer Verlag, New York, 2006. Joshua Leslie, On a Diffeological Group Realization of Certain Generalized Symmetrizable [Les03] KacMoody Lie Algebras. Journal of Lie Theory, vol. 13(3), 2003. [McK87] Kirill Mackenzie, Lie groupoids and Lie algebroids in differential geometry. London Math. Soc. Lecture Notes Series, vol. 124, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, UK, 1987. [McL71] Saunders Mac Lane, Categories for the working mathematician. Graduate Texts in Mathematics, Springer Verlag, NewYork Heidelberg Berlin, 1971. [McL75] Saunders Mac Lane, Homology. Graduate Texts in Mathematics Springer Verlag, NewYork Heidelberg Berlin, 1975. [Man70] Youri I. Manine, Cours de géométrie algébrique. Moscow State University Ed., 1970. [MaWe74] Jerrold Marsden and Alan Weinstein, Reduction of symplectic manifolds with symmetry. Rep. Math. Phys., vol. 5, pp. 121–130, 1974. [MW82] Jerry Marsden and Alan Weinstein. The hamiltonian structure of the maxwellvlasov equations. Physica D, vol. 4, pp. 394–406, 1982. [Mil74] John Milnor, Caracteristic classes. Annals of Math. Studies, Princeton University Press, vol. 76, 1974. [Mor02] Ieke Moerdijk, Orbifolds as groupoids: an introduction. In Orbifolds in Mathematics and Physics, Contemporary Mathematics, pp. 205222, 2002. [Mos66] Jurgen Moser, A rapidly convergent iteration method and nonlinear differential equations II. Ann. Scuola Norm. di Pisa, vol. III(20), 1966. [Omo86] Stephen M. Omohundro, Geometric Perturbation Theory in Physics. World Scientific, 1986. [Pra01] Elisa Prato, Simple Non–Rational Convex Polytopes via Symplectic Geometry. Topology, vol. 40, pp. 961–975 2001. Ichiro Satake, On a generalization of the notion of manifold. Proceedings of the National [Sat56] Academy of Sciences, vol. 42, pp. 359–363, 1956. [Sat57] Ichiro Satake, The GaussBonnet theorem for Vmanifolds. Journal of the Mathematical Society of Japan, vol. 9(4), pp. 464–492, 1957. [Sch11] Urs Schreiber, Differential cohomology in a cohesive ∞topos. habilitation thesis, Universität Hamburg, Germany, 2011. [Sik67] Roman Sikorski, Abstract covariant derivative. Colloquium Mathematicum, vol. 18, pp. 151–172, 1967. [Smi66] Wolfgang J. Smith, The De Rham theorem for generalized spaces. Tohôku Math. Journ., vol. 18(2), 1966. [Sou64] JeanMarie Souriau, Calcul linéaire. P.U.F. Paris, 1964. [Sou70] Structure des systèmes dynamiques, Dunod, Paris, 1970. [Sou80] Groupes différentiels. Lect. Notes in Math., Springer Verlag, NewYork, vol. 836, pp. 91–128, 1980.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
[Sou83] [Sou84] [Sta10] [Tyc35] [Wey39] [Wht78] [Whi43] [WZ22] [Zie96]
529
Géométrie globale du problème à deux corps. Modern Developments in Analytical Mechanics, Accademia della Scienza di Torino, pp. 369–418, 1983. Groupes différentiels et physique mathématique. Collection travaux en cours, Hermann, Paris, pp. 73–119, 1984. Andrew Stacey, Comparative Smootheology. Theory and Applications of Categories, vol. 25(4), pp. 64–117, 2011. Andrei Tychonoff, Ein Fixpunktsatz. Math. Ann., vol. 111, pp. 767–776, 1935. Hermann Weyl, Classical Groups. Princeton University Press, New Jersey, 1939–1946. Georges W. Whitehead, Elements of Homotopy Theory. vol. 61, Graduate texts in Math, Springer Verlag, NewYork, 1978. Hassler Whitney, Differentiable even functions. Duke Math. J., vol. 10, pp. 159–160, 1943. Enxin Wu and Zhongqiang Yang, Topology of diffeological vector spaces. 2022. https://arxiv.org/abs/2205.09562 François Ziegler, Théorie de Mackey symplectique, in Méthode des orbites et représentations quantiques. Thèse de doctorat d’Université, Université de Provence, Marseille, 1996. http://arxiv.org/pdf/1011.5056v1.pdf
图书在版编目（CIP）数据 广义微分几何 = Diffeology : 英文 / ( 法 ) 帕特里克·伊格莱西亚斯  泽穆尔著 . — 北京 : 世界图书出 版有限公司北京分公司 , 2022.9 ISBN 9787519296087 Ⅰ . ①广… Ⅱ . ①帕… Ⅲ . ①微分几何－英文 Ⅳ .O186.1 中国版本图书馆 CIP 数据核字（2022）第 099867 号
This work was originally published by the American Mathematical Society under the title Diffeology, © 2013 by the American Mathematical Society. All rights reserved. The present edition was created by Beijing World Publishing Corporation Ltd. under authority of the American Mathematical Society and is published under license. Special Edition for People’s Republic of China Distribution Only. This edition has been authorized by the American Mathematical Society for sale in People’s Republic of China only and is not for export therefrom.
——————————————————————————————————————————— 中文书名 广义微分几何 英文书名
Diffeology
著
［法］帕特里克·伊格莱西亚斯  泽穆尔（Patrick IglesiasZemmour）
者
策划编辑
陈
责任编辑
陈 亮
亮 刘叶青
出版发行 世界图书出版有限公司北京分公司 地 址 北京市东城区朝内大街 137 号 邮 编 100010 电 话 01064038355（发行） 64033507（总编室） 网 址 http://www.wpcbj.com.cn 邮 箱 [email protected] 销
售 新华书店
印
刷 北京建宏印刷有限公司
开
本 710 mm×1000 mm 1/16
印
张 35
字
数 529 千字
版
次 2022 年 8 月第 1 版
印 次 2022 年 8 月第 1 次印刷 版权登记 0120217449 国际书号 ISBN 9787519296087 定 价 119.00 元 ——————————————————————————————————————————— 版权所有 翻印必究 （如发现印装质量问题，请与所购图书销售部门联系调换）
Special Edition for People's Republic of China Distribution Only. This edition has been authorized by the American Mathematical Society for sale in People's Republic of China only and is not for export therefrom.
Diffeology is a natural extension of differential geometry that covers a wide spectrum of objects, ranging from singular spaces of any kind to infinite dimensional spaces, and sometimes mixing the two. With its developments in higher homotopy theory, fiber bundles, modeling spaces, CartandeRham calculus, moment map and symplectic constructions, diffeology spans a wide range of traditional fields, treating geometrical objects that are or are not manifolds on an equal footing in a common framework. This textbook establishes the foundations of the theory, and develops the main areas of application. These are illustrated by a series of examples, chosen explicitly because they are not covered by traditional differential geometry. The advantage of diffeology comes from the conjunction of two strong properties: first, diffeology is stable by all settheoretic operations: sum, product, subset and quotient. It is said to be a complete and cocomplete category. It is also Cartesian closed, the set of smooth maps having itself a natural diffeology. Second, and perhaps more importantly, diffeology even deals with nonHausdorff quotient spaces in a nontrivial way, as is the case with irrational tori. This specific property becomes crucial for new constructions and is at the origin of the generalization of theorems that do not exist otherwise.